Limestone Mine

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
FOR
THE PROPOSED BAGA-BHALAG LIMESTONE AND SHALE DEPOSIT FOR PRODUCTION CAPACITY
OF 4.0 MTPA (3.60 MTPA LIMESTONE AND 0.40 MTPA SHALE) IN ML AREA OF 172.7434 HA
AT
BAGA, BHALAG, SAMTYARI, PADIYAR & SEHNALI VILLAGES, ARKI TEHSIL, SOLAN DISTRICT AND
SOLDHA & MAINS VILLAGES, SADAR TEHSIL, BILASPUR DISTRICT, HIMACHAL PRADESH
REPORT FOR PUBLIC HEARING
Project Proponent :
Jaypee Himachal Cement Plant (JHCP)

Himachal Pradesh
(A unit of Jaiprakash Associates Limited)
Environment Consultant :
Vimta Labs Ltd. Plot No.142, IDA,Phase-II, Cherlapally, Hyderabad – 500 051
www.vimta.com
April, 2016
Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed Baga-Bhalag Limstone and Shale Deposit
ML area of 172.7434 ha with Production Capacity of 4.0 MTPA (3.60 MTPA Limestone and 0.40
MTPA Shale) at Villages Baga, Bhalag, Samtyari, Padiyar, Sehnali of Tehsil Arki, District Solan
and villages Soldha & Mains Villages of Tehsil Sadar, District Bilaspur, Himachal Pradesh
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
_______________________________________________________________
Chapter # Title Page #
_______________________________________________________________
Table of Contents TC-1

List of Figures TC-5
List of Tables TC-7
1.0 Introduction
1.1 Purpose of the Report C1-1
1.2 Identification of the Project Proponent C1-1
1.3 Project Background and Justification C1-2
1.4 Project Details C1-3
1.5 Environmental Setting C1-3
1.7 Scope of the Study C1-9
1.8 Methodology of the Study C1-9
2.0 Project Description and Source of Pollution
2.1 Type of the Project C2-1

2.2 Need of the Project C2-1
2.3 Details of Mine Operations C2-1
2.4 Geology C2-11
2.5 Details of Exploration C2-19
2.6 Method of Mining C2-24
2.7 Extent of Mechanization C2-47
2.8 Mine Drainage C2-50
2.9 Stacking of Mineral Rejects and Disposal of Waste C2-51
2.10 Use of Mineral C2-51
2.11 Conceptual Plan C2-52
2.12 Progressive Mine Closure Plan C2-59
2.13 Resource Requirement C2-65
2.14 Sources of Pollution C2-66
3.0 Baseline Environmental Status

3.1 Introduction C3-1
3.2 Geology and Hydrogeology C3-1
3.3 Land Use studies C3-14
3.4 Soil Characteristics C3-16
3.5 Meteorology C3-20
3.6 Air Quality C3-30
3.7 Water Quality C3-39
3.8 Noise Level Survey C3-46
3.9 Flora and Fauna Studies C3-50
3.10 Demography and Socio-Economics C3-70
3.11 Traffic Density Survey C3-75
VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-1

Table of Contents
Table of Contents (Contd...)

_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
4.0 Impact Assessment

4.2 Impacts during Mine Developmental Phase C4-1
4.3 Impacts during Operational Phase C4-3
4.4 Impact on Air quality C4-6
4.5 Cumulative Predicted Impacts due to Industries in
Study Area C4-10
4.5 Impact on Water Resources and Quality C4-14
4.6 Impact on Noise Levels and Ground Vibrations C4-25
4.7 Impact on Soil C4-30
4.8 Impact on Flora and Fauna C4-31
4.9 Impact on Land use Pattern C4-32
4.10 Impact on Socio-economic Aspects C4-33
4.11 Impact on Places of Tourist/Religious/Historical
Importance C4-35
4.12 Progressive Mine Closure Plan C4-37
5.0 Environmental Management Plan

5.2 Air Pollution Management C5-2
5.3 Water Pollution C5-4
5.4 Noise and Vibration C5-6
5.5 Reclamation and Rehabilitation C5-8
5.6 Waste Dump Management C5-9
5.7 Soil Conservation C5-9
5.8 Greenbelt Development C5-11
5.9 Measures to Improve Socio-economic Conditions of
Local Population C5-13
5.10 Environmental Management System C5-14
5.11 Occupational Safety and Health C5-18
5.12 Training and Human Resources Development C5-19
5.13 Budgetary Allocation for Environmental Protection C5-19
5(A) Environmental Monitoring Programme
5(A).1 Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures C5(A)-1

5(A).2 Environmental Monitoring C5(A)-1
5(A).3 Monitoring Methods and Data Analysis C5(A)-3
5(A).4 Monitoring Equipment and Consumables C5(A)-4
6.0 Analysis of Alternative Technology

6.2 Description of Alternative Site C6-1

Table of Contents

_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
6.3 Assessment of New and Untested Technology for the

Risk of Technological Failure C6-1
6.4 Mitigation Measures Proposed for Each Alternative C6-1
6.5 Selection of Alternative C6-2
7.0 Additional Studies
7.1 Public Consultation C7-1

7.2 Occupational Health and Safety C7-1
7.3 Risk Assessment C7-4
7.4 Disaster Management Plan C7-9
8.0 Project Benefits
8.1 Improvements in the Physical Infrastructure C8-1

8.2 Corporate Social Responsibility C8-1
8.3 Employment Potential C8-15
9.0 Administrative Aspects
10.1 Institutional Arrangements for Environment Protection

and Conservation C9-1
10.0 Summary & Conclusions

10.2 Environmental Setting C10-2
10.3 Project Description C10-4
10.4 Project Features C10-5
10.5 Method of Mining C10-5
10.6 Land Use Pattern C10-5
10.7 Reclamation and Afforestation Programme C10-7
10.8 Baseline Environment Status C10-7
10.9 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation
Measures C10-9
10.10 Conclusions C10-12
11.0 Disclosure of Consultants

11.2 Vimta Labs Limited–Environment Consultant C11-1

Table of Contents

_______________________________________________________________
Annexures # Title Page #
_______________________________________________________________
List of Annexures
Annexure-I : Terms of Reference

Annexure-II : TOR Compliance
Annexure-III : Letter of Intent
Annexure-IV : Approved Mining Plan Letter
Annexure-V : EC of Existing Mine
Annexure-VI : Wild Life Clearance Letter
Annexure-VII : Applicable Environmental Standards
Annexure-VIII : FCA Application
Annexure- IX : Water Allocation Letter
Annexure- X : Methodology for Sampling and Analysis
Annwxure-XI : Landuse Pattern
Annexure-XII : Ambient Air Quality Levels
Annexure-XIII : Ecological Details
Annexure-XIV : Demographic Details
Annexure-XV : Occupational Health

Table of Contents
List of Figures
_______________________________________________________________
Figures # Title Page #
______________________________________________________________________
1.1 Index Map C1-6
1.2 Study Area Map–10 km Radius C1-7
1.3 Google Image C1-8
2.1 Drainage Map C2-7
2.2(A) Surface Plan of Baga Block C2-8
2.2(B) Surface Plan of Samtiyari Block C2-9
2.2(C) Surface Plan of Bhalag Block C2-10
2.3(A) Geological Plan of Baga Block C2-14
2.3(B) Geological Plan of Samtiyari Block C2-15
2.3(C) Geological Plan of Bhalag Block C2-16
2.4(A) Geological Sections of Baga Block C2-17
2.4(B) Geological Sections of Samtiyari Block C2-18
2.5(A) Flow Sheet Indicating Different Stages of
Mining Operations of Baga Block C2-34
2.6 Year Wise Working Plan Baga Block-1st Year C2-35
2.7 Year Wise Working Plan Baga Block-2nd Year C2-36
2.8 Year Wise Working Plan Baga Block-3rd Year C2-37
2.9 Year Wise Working Plan Baga Block-4th Year C2-38
2.10 Year Wise Working Plan Baga Block-5th Year C2-39
2.11 Year Wise Working Sections-Baga Block C2-40
2.12 Year Wise Working Plan Samtiyari Block-1st Year C2-41
2.13 Year Wise Working Plan Samtiyari Block-2nd Year C2-42
2.14 Year Wise Working Plan Samtiyari Block-3rd Year C2-43
2.15 Year Wise Working Plan Samtiyari Block-4th Year C2-44
2.16 Year Wise Working Plan Samtiyari Block-5th Year C2-45
2.17 Year Wise Working Sections-Samtiyari Block C2-46
2.18 Conceptual Plan of Baga Block C2-54
2.19 Conceptual Plan of Samtiyari Block C2-55
2.20 Conceptual Plan of Bhalag Block C2-56
2.21 Conceptual Section of Baga Block C2-57
2.22 Conceptual Section of Samtiyari Block C2-58
2.23 Progressive Mine Closure Plan of Baga Block C2-63
2.24 Progressive Mine Closure Plan of Samtiyari Block C2-64
3.2.1 Physiography and Drainage Map of the Solan District C3-4
3.2.2 Physiography and Drainage Map of the Bilaspur District C3-5
3.2.3 Hydrogeology Map of the Solan District C3-11
3.2.4 Hydrogeology Map of the Bilaspur District C3-12
3.2.5 Flood Zone Mapping C3-13
3.4.1 Soil Sampling Locations C3-17
3.5.1 Site Specific Post Monsoon Season Windrose (2015) C3-24
3.5.2 Pre Monsoon Season- IMD Sundarnagar C3-25
3.5.3 Monsoon Seasons– IMD Sundarnagar C3-26
3.5.4 Post Monsoon Seasons – IMD Sundarnagar C3-27
3.5.5 Winter Seasons – IMD Sundarnagar C3-28
3.5.6 Annaul Windroses - IMD Sundarnagar C3-29
3.6.1 Air Quality Sampling Locations C3-31
3.7.1 Water Sampling Locations C3-41
3.8.1 Noise Monitoring Locations C3-48
Table of Contents
List of Figures (Contd…)

_______________________________________________________________
Figures # Title Page #
______________________________________________________________________
3.9.1 Locations for Terrestrial and Aquatic Ecological C3-52

3.9.2 Habitats in the Study Area C3-65
3.10.1 Socio Economic Survey C3-74
4.1 Short Term GLCs of PM Due to Mining Operations C4-12
4.2 Cumulative Incremental Concentration of PM due to
Operating Industries C4-13
4.3 Physiography and Drainage Map of the Solan District C4-16
4.4 Hydrogeological Section C4-17
4.5 Water Balance Diagram C4-19
4.6 Photographs of Existing Check Dams and Retaining Walls C4-21
4.7 Recharge System for Administration Block C4-22
4.8 Recharge System for Workshop C4-23
4.9 Recharge System for Paved Road through Recharge Trench C4-23
4.10 Photographs of Existing Rain Water Structure C4-24
4.11 Noise Dispersion Trend around the Mine C4-29
4.12 Photographs of Existing Mine – Upgrading of PWD Road C4-36
5.1 Environmental Management Plan C5-10
7.1 Identification of Hazards in Open Cast Mine C7-6
7.2 Onsite Emergency Plan C7-15
7.3 Offsite Emergency Chart C7-20
9.1 Organizational Structure of Environment Cell C9-2

Table of Contents
List of Tables
_______________________________________________________________
Tables # Title Page #
_______________________________________________________________
1.1 Details of Environmental Setting (10-Km Radius) C1-4

1.2 Environmental Attributes and Frequency of Monitoring C1-10
2.1 Salient Features of Limestone Mine C2-2
2.2 Block Wise Area of Applied ML Area C2-2
2.3 Type of Mine Landuse before Mining C2-3
2.4 Forest Land Falling in Three Blocks C2-3
2.5 District wise Distribution of Land Falling Within Applied Area C2-4
2.6(A) Present Landuse Pattern C2-4
2.6(B) Land Use Pattern at the end of First Five Years C2-5
2.6(C) Land Use Pattern of Mine Lease at end of Mine Life C2-5
2.7 Stratigraphic Sequence C2-12
2.8 Succession of Rock Unit of Shali’s in ML Area C2-12
2.9(A) Summary of Total Geological Reserves/Resources of Both
Baga & Samtiyari Blocks C2-22
2.9(B) Summary of Total Mineable Reserves at Both
Baga & Samtiyari Blocks C2-22
2.10 Average Chemical Grade of Limestone & Shale at Applied Area C2-22
2.11(A) Limestone Reserves as Per UNFC at Both Blocks C2-23
2.11(B) Shale Reserves as Per UNFC at Baga Block C2-23
2.12(A) Production Program & Rom Grade during First Year C2-31
2.12(B) Production Program & Rom Grade during Second Year C2-31
2.12(C) Production Program & Rom Grade during Third Year C2-32
2.12(D) Production Program & Rom Grade during Fourth Year C2-32
2.12(E) Production Program & Rom Grade during Fifth Year C2-33
2.13 Details of Mining Machinery C2-47
2.14 Blasting Parameters C2-48
2.15 Proposal for Land to Be Effected During Conceptual Period C2-53
2.16 Proposal for Conceptual Period C2-53
2.17(A)Abandonment Cost Estimated During First Year C2-59
2.17(B)Abandonment Cost Estimated During Second Year C2-60
2.17(C)Abandonment Cost Estimated During Third Year C2-60
2.17(D)Abandonment Cost Estimated During First Five Years C2-61
2.17(E)Abandonment Cost Estimated During Fifth Year C2-62
2.18 Fuel Requirement C2-65
2.19 Water Requirement for ML Area C2-65
2.20 Point Sources in Mining Operations C2-67
2.21 Likely Noise Levels of the Major Mining Equipment C2-69
3.2.1 Generalized Geological Succession of the Solan District C3-6
3.2.2 Generalized Geological Succession of the Bilaspur District C3-7
3.3.1 Land Use Pattern in the Study Area C3-14
3.4.1 Details of Soil Sampling Locations C3-16
3.4.2(A) Soil Analysis Results C3-18
3.4.2(B) Soil Analysis Results C3-19
3.4.3 Standard Soil Classification C3-20
3.5.1 Summary of the Meteorological Data Generated at Site C3-21
3.5.2 Summary of Wind Pattern at the Study Area C3-21
3.5.3 Climatological Data–Station: IMD, Sundarnagar C3-22
Table of Contents
List of Tables (Contd…)

_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
3.5.4 Summary of wind Pattern -IMD Sundarnagar C3-23
3.6.1 Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring C3-32
3.6.2(A) Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results (Post Monsoon 2015) C3-33
3.6.2(B) Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results(Post Monsoon 2015) C3-34
3.6.2(C) Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results (Post Monsoon 2015) C3-34
3.6.2(D) RSPM Characterstics C3-35
3.6.2(E) RSPM Characterstics C3-36
3.6.2(F) RSPM Characterstics C3-38
3.7.1 Details of Water Sampling Locations C3-42
3.7.2 Ground Water quality C3-43
3.7.3 Surface Water Quality C3-45
3.8.1 Details of Noise Monitoring Locations C3-47
3.8.2 Noise Levels in the Study Area C3-49
3.9.1 Ecological Sampling Locations C3-51
3.9.2 Forest Types of the Region C3-53
3.9.3 List of Forests in the Study Area C3-58
3.9.4 Predominant Plant Species in Bandli Wildlife Sanctuary C3-60
3.9.5 Details of Recorded in Mammals in Bandli Wild Life C3-60
3.9.6 Details of Recorded Reptilian Fauna from Sanctuary C3-61
3.9.7 Details of Recorded Birds from Sanctuary C3-61
3.9.8 List of Birds Observed in the Study Area C3-66
3.9.9 List of Butterflies from the Study Area C3-66
3.9.10 List of Phytoplankton observed in the Study Area C3-68
3.9.11 List of Zooplankton Observed in the Area C3-68
3.10.1 Distribution of Population C3-71
3.10.2 Distribution of population by Social Structure C3-72
3.10.3 Distribution of Literate and Literacy rates C3-72
3.10.4 Occupational structure C3-73
3.11.1 Traffic Density (Vehicles/Day) C3-76
4.1 Present Land Use Pattern of Mine Lease C4-4
4.2 Land Use Pattern at End of First Five Years C4-4
4.3 Land Use Pattern of Mine Lease at End of Mine Life C4-4
4.4 Sources of Pollutants C4-7
4.5 Model Set-Up C4-9
4.6 Emission Factors Used for Modeling C4-10
4.7 Predicted 24-Hourly Short-Term Ground Level Incremental
Concentrations for Particulate Matter C4-10
4.8 List of Industries in 10KM Radius C4-10
4.9 Cumulative Incremental Concentrations due to the
Industries in study area (10 Km Radius) C4-11
4.10 Water Balance C4-18
4.11 Noise Generation Due to Drilling C4-25
4.12 Permissible Peak Particle Velocity C4-26
4.13 Noise Due to Excavation/Loading /Transportation C4-27
4.14(A)Abandonment Cost Estimated during first year C4-37
4.14(B)Abandonment Cost Estimated during Second year C4-38
4.14(C)Abandonment Cost Estimated during Third year C4-39
4.14(D)Abandonment Cost Estimated during fourth year C4-39
Table of Contents
List of Tables (Contd…)

_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
4.14(E)Abandonment Cost Estimated during fifth year C4-40

5.1 Plantation Programme C5-12
5.2 List of Local Species C5-13
5.3 Budget Provision for EMP Implementation and Monitoring C5-20
5(A).1 Recommended Implementation Schedule C5(A)-1
5(A).2 Monitoring Schedule for Environmental Parameters C5(A)-2
7.1 Emergency Responses C7-10
8.1 Budget for Corporate Social Responsibility till October 2015 C8-2
10.1 Details of Environmental Settings (10 km Radius) C10-2
10.2 Salient Features of Limestone Mine C10-4
10.3(A) Present Landuse Pattern C10-5
10.3(B) Land Use Pattern at end of First Five Years C10-6
10.3(C) Land Use Pattern of Mine Lease at end of Mine Life C10-6

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed Baga-Bhalag Limestone and Shale Deposit
for Production Capacity of 4.0 MTPA (3.60 MTPA Limestone Mine and 0.40 MTPA Shale) ML
Area of 172.7434 ha at Baga, Bhalag, Samtyari, Padiyar & Sehnali Villages, Arki Tehsil, Solan
District and Soldha & Mains Villages, Sadar Tehsil, Bilaspur District, Himachal Pradesh
Chapter-1
Introduction
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Jaypee Himachal Cement Plant-JHCP (a unit of Jaiprakash Associates Limited)

proposes for mining in the additional blocks adjacent to the existing Baga-Bhalag
limestone & shale mine to meet requirement of Unit-II proposed cement plant at
the existing location.
The deposit is in three blocks i.e; Baga block, Bhalaga block and Samtyari block
over an area of 172.7434 ha with a production capacity of 4.0 MTPA which are
located at Baga, Bhalag, Samtyari, Padiyar, Sehnali, Soldha & Mains Villages of
Arki & Sadar Tehsil, Solan & Bilaspur District, Himachal Pradesh state.
1.1 Purpose of the Report

As per the Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification dated
14th September 2006, subsequent circular dated 6th February 2007 of Ministry of
Environment and Forests (MoEF), New Delhi, the proposed project falls under
‘Category A Project’ under activity type ‘1(a)’ as the total area is ≥ 50 ha. This
EIA report addresses the environmental impacts of the proposed project and
proposes the mitigation measures for the same.
JHCP has presented the project details to MoEF&CC Expert Appraisal Committee
during its 35th meeting held during June 24th-26th, 2015 for production capacity of
4.0 MTPA (3.60 MTPA Limestone and 0.40 MTPA Shale) in ML area of 172.7434
ha seeking the Terms of Reference (TOR) for the preparation of EIA report.
During the meeting, MoEF’s Expert Appraisal Committee for mining projects has
deliberated in detail regarding the proposed location and also defined the TOR.
Subsequently issued letter No J-11015/182/2015-IA.II (M) dated 29th July, 2015
mentioning the discussed TORs. EIA/EMP has been prepared as per the approved
TOR in line with the above letter and will be made available to public for
comments and concerns. A copy of TOR and its compliance are given in
Annexure-I and Annexure-II.
The EIA report is prepared for obtaining Environmental Clearance (EC) from
MoEF&CC, New Delhi for the proposed project. The report covers the primary data
collected during 1st October 2015 to 31st December 2015 representing post
monsoon and partly winter season.
1.2 Identification of Project Proponent
M/s Jaypee Himachal Cement Plant (JHCP) a unit of Jaiprakash Associates

Ltd., (JAL) a Public Limited company registered under the Companies Act –
1956, one of the leading industrial house of the country has set up a modern dry
process cement plant of 2.05 Million Tonnes Per Annum (MTPA) capacity based on
Baga-Bhalag Limestone Mine in Solan district, Himachal Pradesh.
The company presently owns and operates state-of-the-art technology cement

plants & grinding/blending units producing 30.30 MTPA cement in different states
of India. These plants under the aegis of Jaypee Group comprising of Jaiprakash
Associates Limited, Jaypee Cement Corporation Limited & Bhilai Jaypee Cement
VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad C1-1

Chapter-1
Introduction
Limited are thus having substantial requisite experience in setting up and

operating cement plants besides the limestone mining expertise.
The Baga-Bhalag limestone deposit was identified by Geological Wing, Dept. of

Industries, Govt. of Himachal Pradesh for establishing of a large sized cement
plant. By growing demand in northern region, JAL has setup a large cement plant
in such an extremely rugged topography and poor infrastructure.
Government of Himachal Pradesh had granted mining lease for limestone and
shale over an area of 172.7434 ha covering Baga, Bhalag, Samtyari, Padiyar,
Sehnali Villages (Tehsil Arki, Distt. Solan) and Soldha and Mains villages (Tehsil
Sadar, Distt. Bilaspur), Himachal Predesh in favour of M/s Jaiprakash Associates
Ltd. vide letter No. Udyog-Bhu (Khani-4) Major-2662009-8669 dated 04.12.2013.
A Copy of letter of intent is attached as Annexure III.
Mining Plan including progressive mine closure plan for the area was approved by
IBM vide letter No. 614(2)/MP-A-251/14-DDN dated 19/08/2014. A copy of
approved modified mining plan letter from IBM is given in Annexure-IV.
1.3 Project Background and Justification
 Project Background
 JHCP has set up an integrated cement plant (Line-I) to produce 2.05 MTPA
clinker and 2.54 MTPA cement at Baga village, Arki tehsil, Solan district,
Himachal Pradesh, after receiving Environmental clearance from MoEF vide its
letter no: J-11011/26/2006-IA.II (I) dated 18th May 2006;
 Subsequently, the Environmental Clearance was amended for augmentation in

clinker production capacity from 2.05 MTPA to 2.97 MTPA vide letter Ref. No.
J-11011/1216/2007-IA (I) dated 24th December, 2013;
 To utilize the existing facilities installed at site, JHCP proposes to de-

bottleneck and rationalize capacity usage of certain plant sections of Line-I
cement plant to achieve the higher level of production of clinker from 2.97
MTPA to 3.5 MTPA. Expansion of clinker production by 17.85% capacity.
Received TOR from MoEF&CC, vide letter F.No.J-11011/1216/2007-IA II(I)
dated 15th July, 2015 for clinker expansion; and
 JHCP also proposed expansion of cement plant by installing additional plant

(Line-II) to produce 2.50 MTPA clinker and 1.50 MTPA cement, within existing
cement plant premises. MoEF&CC issued combined TOR for Line-I clinker
expansion and Line-II additional cement plant vide letter no: F.No.J-
11011/1216/2007-IA II(I) dated 29th September, 2015.
Both the cement plant (Line-I & Line-II) with combined clinker production
capacity of 6.0 MTPA will ultimately require about 9.25 MTPA limestone and
shale.

Chapter-1
Introduction
JHCP Captive Mines
 JHCP is operating limestone mine with a production capacity of 2.8 MTPA and
0.3 MTPA of limestone stone and shale in ML area of 331.424 ha.
Environmental clearance obtained from MOEF&CC vide letter NO: J-
11015/11/2006-IA-II(M) dated 7th September, 2006. Existing mine EC letter
is enclosed as Annexure-V; and
 JHCP proposes production enhancement from 3.10 MTPA to 5.25 MTPA of

captive Baga-Bhalag lime stone and shale within existing mining lease area of
331.424 ha to meet limestone requirement of Line-I clinker expansion. The
project has been recommended for Environmental Clearance by MoEF&CC vide
MOM of the EAC meeting held during 21st -22nd March, 2016.
 Project Justification
Now, to meet the raw material requirement of cement plant (Line-II), the
company applied for an additional mining lease area adjoining the existing ML
area in the three blocks i.e. Baga block, Bhalag block and Samtyari block over an
area of 172.7434 ha with a production capacity of 4.0 MTPA.
The Govt. of Himachal Pradesh has issued a letter of Intent (LOI) for Lime stone
and Shale Mine (172.7434 ha) in favour of M/s Jaiprakash Associates Limited vide
letter, no. Udyog-Bhu (khani-4) Major – 2662009-8669 dated 04.12.2013.
1.4 Project Details
1.4.1 Nature of the Project
The proposed Baga & Bhalag limestone mine is captive source of raw material to
meet the limestone requirement of proposed Line-II of Jaypee Himachal Cement
Plant.
1.4.2 Size of the Project
The deposit is in three blocks i.e; Baga block, Bhalag block and Samtyari block
over an area of 172.7434 ha with a production capacity of 4.0 MTPA (3.60 MTPA
limestone and 0.40 MTPA shale). The life of mine at the proposed production rate
for lime stone and shale is up to 30 years. The life of the mine shall increase
considerable based on future expansion programme.
1.4.3 Cost of the Project
The total cost for the proposed expansion mining project is about Rs. 222 Crores.
This includes the EMP cost of Rs 35 lakhs.
1.5 Environmental Setting
The environmental setting within 10 km of the project site given in Table-1.1.

The index map is shown in Figure-1.1. Topo sheet representing location map of
Chapter-1
Introduction
1:50,000 scale covering land use/land cover, reserve forests, wildlife sanctuaries,
national parks, within 10 km of the project site is shown in Figure-1.2 and
google image given in Figure-1.3.
TABLE-1.1
DETAILS OF ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING (10 KM RADIUS)
Sr. Description Baga Block Bhalag Block Samtyari Block

No
1 Location
a Village Baga, Bhalag, Samtyari, Padiyar, Sehnali villages, Arki
Tehsil, Soldha and Mains villages, Sadar Tehsil.
b Tehsil Arki & Sadar
c District Solan & Bilaspur
d State Himachal Pradesh
e Geographical co-ordinates N 310 18’ 59.0” – N 310 19’ 25.3” – N 310 20’ 16.7” –
31 19’ 21.1”
0 310 20’ 01.3” 310 21’ 24.1”
E 760 53’ 16.4” – E 760 54’ 08.1” – E 760 53’ 21.6” –
760 53’ 42.0” 760 54’ 44.6” 760 54’ 44.8”
2 Elevation (MSL) 1540-1645 m 945-1340 m 675-1410 m
3 Area 9.1204 ha 36.8243 ha 126.7987 ha
4 Climatic conditions As per IMD, Sundarnagar (Annual)
Minimum Temp : 3.0°C
Maximum Temp : 34.3°C
Average rainfall : 1497.8 mm
5 Nearest NH-88 6.4 km, S 6.8 km, S 8.3 km, NW
highway
6 Nearest Kiratpur 35.0 km, SW 37.0 km, SW 36.0 km, SW
railhead
/Railway
station
7 Nearest Simla 30.0 km, SE 30.0 km, SE 32.0 km, SE
airport
8 Defense installations Nil Nil Nil
9 Archaeological important places Nil Nil Nil
10 Ecological Sensitive Areas (National Parks, Wildlife sanctuaries)
1 Bandli WLS 11.3 km, N 9.9 km, N 7.5 km, N
2 Majathal WLS 4.7 km, ESE 3.7 km, SE 6.1 km, SE
Status of wildlife clearance:- An application for obtaining recommendations and NOC from the
National Board of Wild Life for additional ML area of 172.7434 has been submitted to Divisional
Forest Office (wildlife) Shimla & Kullu vide letter no: JAL/JHCP/Mines/WL/2015/N0. 18676
dated 23rd June, 2015. Letter attached as an Annexure-VI.
11 Reserved/Protected forests within 10 km radius
1 Baga PF 2.3 km, N 1.5 km, NNW Within block
2 Mungrani PF 3.8 km, W 5.1 km, W 4.6 km WSW
3 Chhabiawar PF 7.9 km, N 7.4 km, NNW 4.8 km, NNW
4 Bunga PF 10.0 km, NE 7.9 km, NE 6.8 km, NE
5 Badi PF 8.0 km, N 7.0 km, N 4.6 km, N
6 Gaiharu PF 8.8 km, NE 6.5 km, NE 5.5 km, NE
7 Ujra PF 7.2 km, NE 4.9 km, NE 4.2 km, ENE
8 Bajarali PF 3.9 km, NE 1.6 km, NE 0.5 km, E
9 Ghamru PF 9.2 km, ENE 7.4 km, E 7.9 km, E
10 Trohar PF 5.3 km, E 3.4 km, E 4.5 km, E
11 Suin Morora PF 4.0 km, NE 1.7 km, NE 2.0 km, E
Chapter-1
Introduction

No
12 Siarli PF 1.6 km, E 0.2 km, SE 2.4 km, SSE
13 Khatrul PF 1.3 km, E 0.6 km, SE 3.1 km, E
14 Matrech PF 2.7 km, ESE 2.0 km, SE 4.5 km, SE
15 Skor PF 5.7 km. E 4.3 km, ESE 6.6 km, SE
16 Mandlidhar PF 11.3 km, NE 8.9 km, NE 7.7 km, ENE
17 Sangan PF 3.4 km, NNW 3.9 km, NW 1.7 km, W
18 Kuftha PF 9.9 km, ENE 7.8 km, ENE 8.1 km, E
19 Bana PF 3.5 km,, ESE 2.7 km, SE 5.2 km, SE
20 Gate PF 9.0 km, S 10.2 km, SSW 11.7 km, S
21 Bahadurpur PF 9.7 km, S 10.9 km, S 12.4 km, S
22 Buryans PF 9.8 km, NW 10.6 km, NW 8.5 km, WNE
12 Other Industries in 10 km radius
1 Ambuja Cement 6.7 km, SSE 6.9 km, S 9.2 km, SSE
2 Dharlaghat 9.0 km, SE 8.7 km, SSE 11.1 km, SSE
Limestone Mines
(Ambuja)
3 ACC Cement 9.6 km, NNW 9.4 km, NW 6.9 km, NW
Plant
4 ACC Mine 9.2 km, NNW 8.9 km, NW 6.5 km, NW
13 Nearest Bilaspur 12.0 km, W 13.2 km, W 12.3 km, W
major city
14 Nearest settlement Thar Village, 0.1 Bhalag Village, Karyard Village,
km, SW Adjacent, NW 0.2 km , E
15 Water bodies
1 Satluj River 3.2 km, N 2.9 km, E 0.7 km, N
2 Alikhand River 3.7 km, S 4.2 km, S 6.3 km, S
3 Bahairari Khad 10.1 km, N 9.3 km, N 6.9 km, N
16 R & R issues Acquisition of land under process

17 Seismic zone Zone Zone-V as per IS 1893 (part-1) 2002

Chapter-1
Introduction
Project Site
FIGURE-1.1
INDEX MAP

Chapter-1
Introduction
76° 50' 76° 55' 77° 00'
10 KM
Kandar BANDLI WILDLIFE
SANCTUARY
Dugal Ba Kharni
Khanahal ha
ira
ri K
ha
Bhatehr Ropri
Barpat d Mangal
Sia Dharli
31° Talwand
Dhar 31°
25' Badi 25'
Barmanan Badi P.F Duka
Chhabiawan Kathla
8
P.F
-8
Beri Dhawahal Nagri Bahi

H
Gaihar P.F
N
Gagal Dhara Lalag

Panjgain
Buryans Dal
P.F Ropa
Kudi
Harnora Gaiharu Bunga Mundlidhar
Kalsua
Samdhar Ropa P.F P.F
Balag
Kian Rawa Majhali
Ghagas Chouri
Deoli Sanihan Ujra P.F
Dhar
Kasol Keri
Jartu Pata
SA
Bagra
Sangan Bohi
TL
Magrot Halogda
P.F Kufthu
U
Aina Padyar
Bajarial P.F
J
Juras Samal
RI
Daudi Badnu Bandli
Kol Huwani
VE
Suin Pati
Ban Kuphar Ku
Nyu Balog Samtiari CKaryad R ft
Hawoni B Marora Ghamru hu
P.F Suin Marora Cheori
Chanalag Torti P.
Kutal
Daroba Jajar Kandar P.F Ghamru F
Panali 1 Barech
Badsour
A Chida P.F
31° 5
31°
Changar D Ghawrai
20' Sandauli Baga Bhalag Beri 20'
Mungrani 4 2 Bartha
Bandla Jabal
P.F Pauri Dharsi
Mohlar 3 Trohat
Gari Siarli P.F
F Sahnali Sabar P.F Baadu
Dades Samlehu Daret
Thar E Khatrul P.F
Kharoti Dabar Kharsi
Sohra Bhyan Matrech Jhadowi Mandno Harah
Kathpur
Thach Matrech Skor P.F
Bamla Loongari MalokharSiarli
P.F
Parnali Cholog Kolthi
Soldha Bana
Cheran Charahu
Niholog
Ratheh P.F
Kirfa Malothi Tansi Sahrah
Sargohri
Barnun Pasaya
Aslu MAJHATAL WILDLIFE
Behli Chakoh Chamrol SANCTUARY
Bhanda
AL Janed Pardhot Kagri Pariah
Basla IK
HA Panjeli Naugaon
D Chamba
Ghiyana Panjel Matianj Khurd
Parnu
Sagithi Bag Silha
Panjag Dunglu
Rajghat Sulang
Samana Matianj Kalan
Dagsech Ghanna
31° NH- 31°

88 Matianj Kalan
15' 15'
Mamau Daseran Suli Chakru
10 KM
Tepra SCALE
Gate P.F Shyari Dehti
Bahadurpur
1 0 1 2 Km
Topo Sheet No. 53 A/15, A/16 & E/3 P.F
76° 50' 76° 55' 77° 00'

LEGEND
Additional Area (Baga-Block) Existing ML Area Coordinates Plant Site Coordinates
ML Area-Existing Forest Boundary Lat : 31°18'59.0" to 31°19'21.1" N A : 31°19'49" N; 76°53'40" E 1 : 31°20'17.0" N, 76°53'1.9" E
Long : 76°53'16.4" to 76°53'42.0" E B : 31°20'25" N; 76°53'38" E 2 : 31°19'47.8" N, 76°54'4.5" E
Plant Site Wildlife Sanctuary Area Additional Area (Bhalag-Block) C : 31°20'43" N; 76°53'51" E 3 : 31°19'26.2" N, 76°53'10.4" E
Lat : 31°19'25.3" to 31°20'01.3" N D : 31°20'11" N; 76°54'47" E 4 : 31°19'41.2" N, 76°53'4.0" E
Baga Block Road Long : 76°54'08.1" to 76°54'44.6" E E : 31°19'01" N; 76°54'31" E 5 : 31°19'57.4" N, 76°53'25.0" E
F : 31°18'58" N; 76°54'06" E
Bhalag Block River / Nala Additional Area (Samtyari-Block)
Lat : 31°20'16.7" to 31°21'24.1" N
Samtiyari Block Village Long : 76°53'21.6" to 76°54'44.8" E
FIGURE-1.2
STUDY AREA MAP (10 KM RADIUS)

Chapter-1
Introduction
Bandli Wildlife
Sanctuary
Samtiari Block
Existing ML Area
Cement Plant
10KM
Bhalag Block
Baga Block
Majhatal Wildlife
Sanctuary
FIGURE-1.3
GOOGLE IMAGE

Chapter-1
Introduction
1.6 Scope of the Study
Based on the TOR, the Environmental Impact Assessment report is prepared

covering study area of 10 km radial area around the mine lease area. The scope
of study broadly includes:
 To conduct literature review and to collect data relevant to the study area;
 To undertake environmental monitoring so as to establish the baseline
environmental status of the study area;
 To identify the ambient air quality levels in the mine area;
 To predict incremental levels of pollutants in the study area due to the mining
activities;
 To evaluate the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes in
the study area by using scientifically developed and widely accepted
environmental impact assessment methodologies;
 To prepare an Environment Management Plan (EMP) outlining the measures
for improving the environmental quality and scope for future expansion for
environmentally sustainable development; and
 To identify critical environmental attributes required to be monitored.
The literature review includes identification of relevant articles from various

publications, collection of data from various government agencies and other
sources.
1.7 Methodology of the Study
Vimta Labs Limited, Hyderabad had conducted a reconnaissance survey along

with the officials of JHCP and sampling locations were identified on the basis of:
 Predominant wind directions in the study area as recorded by India

Meteorological Department (IMD), Sundarnagar;
 Existing topography, location of surface water bodies like ponds, canals and
rivers;
 Location of villages/towns/sensitive areas;
 Accessibility, power availability and security of monitoring equipment, pollution
pockets in the area;
 Areas which represent baseline conditions; and
 Collection, collation and analysis of baseline data for various environmental
attributes.
Field studies have been conducted for a period of three months (October to
December 2015) representing post-monsoon and partly winter season to
determine existing conditions of various environmental attributes as outlined in
Table-1.2. The applicable environmental standards for the project are given in
Annexure-VII.

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed Baga-Bhalag Limestone and Shale Deposit for Production Capacity of 4.0 MTPA (3.60 MTPA Limestone
Mine and 0.40 MTPA Shale) ML Area of 172.7434 ha at Baga, Bhalag, Samtyari, Padiyar & Sehnali Villages, Arki Tehsil, Solan District and Soldha & Mains
Villages, Sadar Tehsil, Bilaspur District, Himachal Pradesh
Chapter-1
Introduction
TABLE-1.2
ENVIRONMENTAL ATTRIBUTES AND FREQUENCY OF MONITORING
Sr. No. Environmental Sampling Sampling Total Sampling Sampling Detection Limit Methodology
Component Locations Parameters Period Frequency
1 Meteorology One central Temperature, Wind 3 months Hourly WS: +/-0.02 m/sec The meteorology parameters were recorded using
location Speed, Wind WD: +/- 3 degrees automatic micro-meteorological equipment consisting
Direction Temp: +/- 0.2 oC of Anemometer, Wind wane and thermometer. Review
of secondary data collected from IMD station at
Sundarnagar
Rainfall 3 months Daily Rainfall: 0.2 mm Rainfall was recorded every morning at 0830 hours
Relative Humidity, 3 months Hourly RH: +/- 3% Humidity recorded using wet and dry thermometer
Cloud Cover and psycometric charts on hourly basis.
2 Ambient Air 15 locations As per NAAQS 2009 Two days per 24 hourly PM10: 5 µg/m3 Gravimetric method for PM10 and PM2.5. Modified West
Quality week for 13 PM2.5: 5 µg/m3 & Gaeke method for SO2 (IS-5182 part-II 1969) using
weeks SO2: 4 µg/m3 Tetrachloro mercurate 0.01 N absorbing solution.
NOx: 9 µg/m3 Jacob-Hochheiser method (IS-5182 part-IV 1975) for
CO: 12.5 µg/m3 NOX using Sodium Arsenate absorbing solution of
O3 : 2 µg/m3 0.01 N absorbing solution. CO was measured by GC
Pb : 12.5 µg/m3 method.
NH3: 20 µg/m3
Pb 0.05 ng/m3
Ni : 0.10 ng/m3
As:0.2 ng/m3
BAP :1.0 ng/m3
Benzene: 1.0 ng/m3
3 Water Quality 14 locations As per IS:10500- Grab sampling Once in study EC:+/-0.1 us/cm As per APHA methods. The conductivity, temperature
2012 period TSS/TDS: 0.5 mg/l were analyzed at site laboratory and rest of the
(4 Surface O&G: 0.1 mg/l parameters were analyzed at VIMTA's Central
water DO: 0.5 mg/l Laboratory at Hyderabad.
10- Ground BOD: 2 mg/l
water) COD: 0.5 mg/l
Ca, Mg, Na, K: 0.1 mg/l
Alkalinity, PO4, SO4, Cl,
NO3:
0.1 mg/l
Coliform: 1 MPN

Chapter-1
Introduction
Sr. No. Environmental Sampling Sampling Total Sampling Sampling Detection Limit Methodology
Component Locations Parameters Period Frequency
Heavy metals (As, Grab sampling Once in study 0.001 mg/l
Hg, Pb, Cd, Cr-6, period
Total Cr, Cu, Zn, Se,
Fe)
4 Noise 13 locations Leq Hourly readings Once in study SPL: 0.1 dB(A) Integrated on hourly basis
for 24 hours period
5 Soil 13 locations Soil profile, Chemical Composite Once during EC: ± 0.1 µs/cm Analysis was carried out as per soil chemical analysis
constituents, sample up to study period N, P, K: 0.1 mg/kg by ML Jackson
Suitability for 100- m depth
agricultural growth
6 Terrestrial Total study Flora and fauna Field Once in study - Through field visits and collected secondary data.
Ecology area observations period Count and quadrate method
7 Demography Total study Demographic profile - - - Through field visits and secondary information
and Socio- area sources like National Informatic Center, Delhi and
economic Census operation division
aspects
8 Land Use Total study Trend of land use - - - District Census Hand Book –2011
area change for different
categories
9 Geology Total study Geological history - - - Secondary information sources (Geological survey of
area India and Central Ground Water Board, Delhi)
10 Hydrogeology Total study Drainage pattern, - - - Secondary information sources like (Geological survey
(Surface and area nature of streams, of India and Central Ground Water Board)
ground) aquifer
characteristics,
recharge and
discharge areas

Chapter-2
Project Description and Sources of Pollution
2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND SOURCES OF POLLUTION
This chapter addresses the details of the proposed limestone and shale mine in
context with the basic resource requirement, processes and capacities, utilities
and services, infra-structural facilities, machinery and pollution control equipment
and their performance for production capacity, sources of pollution and proposed
mitigation measures.
2.1 Type of the Project
The proposed limestone and shale mine project is a 100% mechanized opencast
mining project. Conventional mining system with shovel dumper combination of
mining technology will be adopted. The sequences of operations are dozing,
drilling, blasting, loading and transportation of ore.
2.2 Need of the Project
JHCP proposes to set up 2nd cement plant (Line-II) with an additional capacity of
2.50 MTPA Clinker and 1.50 MTPA cement, within the existing cement plant area
under its expansion plan. Both the Cement Plant (Line-I & Line-II) with combined
clinker production capacity of 6.0 MTPA will require about 9.25 MTPA Limestone
and Shale.
Now, to meet the raw material requirement of Cement Plant (Unit-II), the
area in three blocks i.e. Baga Block, Bhalag Block and Samtyari Block over an
area of 172.7434 ha. The Govt. of Himachal Pradesh has issued a letter of Intent
(LOI) for Lime stone and Shale Mine (172.7434 Ha) in favour of Jaiprakash
Associates Limited vide letter no. Udyog-Bhu (khani-4) Major – 2662009-8669
dated 04.12.2013
2.3 Details of Mine Operations
This section deals with the salient features of mining project, landuse in mine
lease area, proposed exploration details, evaluation of the deposit, estimation of
limestone reserves, proposed method of mining, machinery, phase wise limestone
extraction details, details on infrastructure, various sources of pollution and the
measures to control pollution.
2.3.1 Salient Features of Limestone Mine
Mine development and extraction of limestone at the desired capacity will

commence after getting Environmental Clearance (EC) from MoEF&CC, New Delhi
and Consent to Establish and Consent to Operate from Himachal State Pollution
Control Board (HSPCB). The salient features of the mine lease area are presented
in Table-2.1.

Chapter-2
TABLE-2.1
SALIENT FEATURES OF LIMESTONE MINE
Sr. No. Description Details
Baga Block Bhalag Block Samtyari Block
1 Name of the mine lease Baga & Bhalag limestone and shale mine
2 Mine lease (ML) area 172.7434 ha
3 Location & co-ordinates Arki & Sadar tehsils, Solan & Bilaspur districts, Himachal Pradesh
4 Latitude Latitude Latitude
31018’59.0”– 31019’21.1”N 31019’25.3”–31020’01.3”N 31020’16.7”–31021’24.1”N
Longitude Longitude Longitude
76053’16.4”–76053’42.0” E 76054’08.1”–76054’44.6” E 76053’21.6”–76054’44.8” E
5 Elevation MSL 1540-1645 MSL 945-1340 MSL 675-1410 MSL
6 Type of ML area Forest & private land
7 Capacity of mine 4.0 MTPA
3.60 MTPA - limestone production
0.40 MTPA - shale
8 Expected life of mine 30 years
9 Method of mining Open cast mechanized mining by shovel dumper combination

10 Mineable reserves Lime stone-65.731 million tonnes
Shale- 7.021 million tonnes
11 Geological reserves Lime stone-244.436 million tonnes
12 Over burden thickness Nil
13 Average stripping ratio 1:0.0 (No OB Generation)
(Limestone : OB)
14 Maximum depth of mining 105 m 345 m 560 m
15 Safety zone 7.5 m around ML boundary

16 Working hours 2 shift per day of 8 hrs in 330 days of operation in a year
17 Maximum bench height 10 m
18 Bench Width 10-15 m at least
19 Working bench angle 15o with vertical
20 Overall final pit slope 45o to the horizontal
21 Water requirement 150 m3 per day
22 Water source From existing allocation of 3500 m3/day water from Treda & Padiyar nalla near the
confluence of Sutluj river
23 Power requirement 100-150 KV
24 Source of power State Electricity Board
25 Manpower requirement 137 nos.
26 Transport of OB Dumpers of capacity 35 T
Source: Mine Plan, * No reserve estimation of Bhalag block is done
2.3.2 Details of Land Use in ML Area
The total area acquired for mining of limestone is about 172.7434 ha for which
approval have been obtained from Himachal Pradesh government. The block wise
area of applied mine land is given in Table-2.2, type of mine land is given in
Table- 2.3 and landuse pattern of mine lease is given in Table-2.4.
TABLE-2.2
BLOCK WISE AREA OF APPLIED ML AREA
Sr.No Name of Block Area Covered in ha

1 Baga 9.1204
2 Samtyari 126.7987
3 Bhalag 36.8243
Total 172.7437
Source: Mine Plan

Chapter-2
TABLE-2.3
TYPE OF MINE LANDUSE BEFORE MINING
Sr.No Type of Land Area in ha

1 Forest land 62.8989
2 Government Land - Barren 6.3098
3 Govt. Pasture Land 66.3755
4 Habitated Land 0.6660
5 Private Land 36.4932
Total 172.7434
Source: Mine Plan
The additional mine lease area of 172.7434 ha involve 135.5843 ha of govt./

forest land, out of which 9.1582 ha is already diverted and for balance 126.4261
ha, an online proposal vide ref. No. FP/HP/MIN/14832/2015 dated 20.08.2015
seeking prior approval of the Central Government under Forest (Conservation)
Act, 1980 for diversion of 126.4261 Ha of Govt./forest land has been submitted to
MoEF&CC, Govt. of India. FCA application is attached as an Annexure-VIII. As
per Notification of 1952, all the govt. land has been classified as forest land in the
State of Himachal Pradesh.
The private land shall be acquired under the provision of Section-118 of HP

Tenancy & Land Reforms Act 1972.
TABLE-2.4
FOREST LAND FALLING IN THREE BLOCKS
Sr. District & Tehsil Village Khasra Forest Area Forest Area Legal Status of Forest
No proposed for proposed for Area
diversion diversion
(bigha- (ha)
biswa)
Baga Block
1 Bilaspur & Sardar Soldha 1/1 68-8 5.1472 UF
28 1-9 0.1091 UF
Mains 61/1 15-12 1.1739 UF
2 Solan & Arki Sehnali 388/320 18-9 1.3884 Pasture
Total Kita 4 103-18 7.8186 UF & Pasture
Bhalag Block
1 Solan & Arki Bhalag 20 0-3 0.0113 Banjar Kadim
230/62 8-17 0.666 Gair Mumkin Nali/Khad
98 20-8 1.5351 Gair Mumkin Nala
140 1-9 0.1091 Charand bila drakhtan
160 0-16 0.0602 Gair Mumkin Rasta
16 32-3 2.4193 Ghaseni/Gair mumkin
pathar
221/1 74-9 5.6025 Charand bila drakhtan
Total Kita 11 150-15 11.3442
Samtyari Block
1 Solan & Arki Samtyari 82 32-0 2.4080 Gair Mumkin Khad
90 3-9 0.2596 Gair Mumkin gohar
95/2 179-17 13.534 Charand bila drakhtan
104 0-6 0.0226 Gair Mumkin Kuhal

Chapter-2
Sr. District & Tehsil Village Khasra Forest Area Forest Area Legal Status of Forest
No proposed for proposed for Area
diversion diversion
(bigha- (ha)
biswa)
233/3 25-3 1.9001 Jangal Mehdude
233/4 59-13 4.4887 Jangal Mehdude
233/2 121-14 9.1581 Gair Mumkin Nala
Sub Total Kita (A) 8 549-19 41.3619
2 Solan & Arki Padiyar 136 289-14 2.4080 Charand bila drakhtan
199/162/4 629-5 47.352 Charand drakhtan
198/162/3 4-14 0.3537 Charand
Sub Total Kita (B) 4 925-0 69.6076
3 Solan & Arki Baga 1/1 4-5 0.3198 Charand bila drakhtan
2/2 68-4 5.1321 Ghasani
Sub Total Kita (C) 2 72-9 5.4520 Charand bila drakhtan &
Ghasani
Total Kita (A+B+C) 14 1425-08 116.4215
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-2.5
DISRICT WISE DISTRIBUTION OF LAND FALLING WITHIN APPLIED AREA
Name of Forest Open Pasture Waste Cultivated Built Up Village

Village Land Forest Land wise Total
A) District Solan
Samtiyari 15.5469 Nil 26.9137 3.8829 3.7438 0.1430 50.2303
Padiyar Nil 47.3520 22.2368 0.1806 1.2492 0.0978 71.1164
Bhalag Nil Nil 13.0035 4.9591 18.4592 0.4026 36.8244
Baga Nil Nil 5.4520 Nil Nil Nil 5.4520
Sehnali Nil Nil 1.4637 Nil Nil 0.0225 1.4862
Sub Total 15.5469 47.3520 69.0697 9.0226 23.4522 0.6660 165.1092
(A)
B) District Bilaspur
Soldha Nil Nil 5.1472 0.4327 0.8804 Nil 6.4603
Mains Nil Nil 1.1739 Nil Nil Nil 1.1739
Sub Total Nil Nil 6.3211 0.4327 0.8804 Nil 7.6342
(B)
Grand 15.5469 47.3520 75.3908 9.4553 24.3326 0.6660 172.7434
Total
(A+B)
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-2.6(A)
PRESENT LANDUSE PATTERN
Particulars Forest Private Inhabited Others Total

Land Land Land
(a) Pits & Quarries - - - - Nil
(b) Dumps of ore, waste & - - - - Nil
O.B.
(c) Tar road, foot track, 2.50 - - - 2.50*
structures
(d) Habitation - - 0.6660 - 0.6660
(e) Others (intact)
(i) Forest land 133.0842 - - - 133.0842
(ii) Private/Ag. land - 36.4932 - - 36.4932
(iii) Inhabitated land - - - - Nil
Total occupied area 135.5842 36.4932 0.6660 - 172.7434
(g) Area backfilled by applicant – Nil
(h) Area afforested by applied – Nil (* PDW Road)
Source: Mine Plan

Chapter-2
TABLE-2.6(B)
LANDUSE PATTERN AT THE END OF FIRST FIVE YEARS

Land Land Land
(a) Pits & Quarries 14.00 - - - 14.00
(b) Dumps of ore, waste & O.B. - - - - Nil
(c) Infrastructure including of 5.00 - - - 5.00*
office, Tar Road, Haulage, Foot
Track
(d) Habitation - - 0.6660 - 0.6660
(e) Others (intact)
(i) Forest land 116.5842 - - - 116.5842
Total applied area 135.5842 36.4932 0.6660 - 172.7434
(f) Area backfilled by applicant – Nil
(g) Area afforested by applied – 2.50 ha (*includes PDW Road)
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-2.6(C)
LAND USE PATTERN OF MINE LEASE AT END OF MINE LIFE

Land Land Land
(a) Pits & Quarries 109.0 - - - 109.0
(b) Dumps of ore, waste & O.B. - - - - Nil
(c) Infrastructure including of office, 7.50 - - - 7.50
Tar Road, Haulage, Foot Track
(d) Habitation - - - - Nil
(e) Others (intact)
(i) Forest land 19.0842 - - - 19.0842
(iii) Inhabitated land - - 0.6660 - 0.6660
(f) Area to be backfilled by mine owner: – Nil,
(g) Area to be afforested by mine owner: – 20.0 ha
Source: Mine Plan
2.3.3 Topography and Drainage
The area applied for mining lease forms part of the lesser Himalayan Ranges,
which are characterized by extremely rugged topography comprising of high
peaks, steep slopes and deep incised valleys. No flat plain except on the top of
the Baga block is seen in and around the applied area. The mountain that hosts
the limestone deposit gains its elevation from the banks of river Satluj that
meanders between inter mountainous valleys and the recorded elevation at river
Satluj is 610 mRL. The river Satluj is about 1000 m away from the applied area.
The highest elevation in the applied area is 1645 mRL (in central NE part of Baga
block) and lowest is 675 mRL (in NW part of Samtiyari block). As compared to
Baga, the Samtiyari block and Bhalag block is marked by the presence of conical
elongated ‘tongues’ that have greater width at the base as compared to the top
which have less width and are steeper. The Baga block on the other hand occurs
in the form of a single large elongated platform having steep slopes. The area
between (approximate crow fly distance nearly 1268 m between the closest
extremities of Baga block and Samtiyari block, 2178 m between the closest
Chapter-2
extremities of Baga block and Samtiyari block and 2041 m between the closest
extremities of Baga block and Samtiyari block) is the area of existing ML area of
the same company of which part is characterized by undulating mountain peaks
that are composed of dolomite.
River Satluj, which flows at a nearest distance of about 1000 m from the applied
area, controls the drainage of the area and its surroundings. A few seasonal nala
particularly the Bhalag nala (running parallel to the applied boundary and a small
part flows within applied area at 977 mRL to 945 m RL in Bhalag block and at 811
m RL to 750 mRL in Samtiyari block) and Baga block one seasonal nala
(originating from applied area at 1570 m RL) flows from the higher reaches of the
mountains, drain the areas along their way before finally merging into river
Satluj. Several seasonal nalas of first order and second order flow within the
applied area and present dendritic pattern of drainage in the area during rainy
season.
The drainage map is shown in Figure-2.1. The surface plan showing all the
surface features of ML area has been prepared and is shown in Figure-2.2.

Chapter-2
76° 50' 76° 55' 77° 00'
10 KM
Kandar
Dugal Ba Kharni
Khanahal ha
ira
ri K
ha
Bhatehr Ropri
Barpat d Mangal
Sia Dharli
31° Talwand
Dhar 31°
25' Badi 25'
Barmanan Duka
Kathla
Gagal Dhara Lalag
Panjgain Dal
Ropa
Harnora Gaiharu
Kudi Kalsua
Samdhar Ropa
Balag
Kian Rawa Majhali
Ghagas Chouri
Deoli Dhar Sanihan
Kasol Keri
Jartu Pata
Bohi SA Bagra
Magrot TL Halogda Kufthu
Aina Padyar U
Juras J Samal
Daudi R Badnu Bandli
Kol Huwani IV Pati
Ban Suin ER Kuphar
Nyu Balog Samtiari
Hawoni Karyad Marora Ghamru
Cheori
Chanalag Torti
Kutal Daroba Jajar Kandar
Badsour Panali Barech
Chida
31° Ghawrai 31°
Changar 20'
20' Sandauli Baga Bhalag Beri
Bartha
Bandla Jabal
Pauri Dharsi
Gari Mohlar
Baadu
Dades Samlehu Sahnali Sabar Daret
Thar
Kathpur
Bamla Thach Malokhar Siarli
Loongari
Soldha
Cheran Charahu
Niholog
Ratheh Kirfa Malothi Sahrah
Sargohri Tansi
Aslu
Barnun Pasaya
Chakoh Chamrol
Bhanda Behli
Basla IK
HA Panjeli Naugaon
D Chamba
Parnu
Sagithi Bag Silha
Panjag Dunglu
Rajghat Sulang
Dagsech Ghanna
31° 31°
Matianj Kalan 15'
15'
10 KM
Tepra SCALE
Shyari Dehti
Bahadurpur
1 0 1 2 Km
Topo Sheet No. 53 A/15, A/16 & E/3
76° 50' 76° 55' 77° 00'

LEGEND
ML Area-Existing Bhalag Block River / Nala
Plant Site Samtiyari Block Village
Baga Block
FIGURE-2.1
DRAINAGE MAP
Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.2 (A)
SURFACE PLAN OF BAGA BLOCK

Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.2 (B)
SURFACE PLAN OF SAMTIYARI BLOCK

Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.2 (C)
SURFACE PLAN OF BHALAG BLOCK

Chapter-2
2.4 Geology
2.4.1 Regional Geology
In the area the rocks comprising of quartzite, shales, dolomite and limestone of
Shali Formation which were traced by the earlier workers from Slapper in
southward to Alsindi along the right bank of River Satluj. This forms the main
northern Digitation of Shali and joints the open end of west shali window (1939).
The southern Degitation of the Shali is referred as Tattapani Digitation, which
terminates at Tattapani. These two Digitation meet in the Betwara area from
where it form a single unit and it referred to as Mandi-Sundergarh belt by Singh
and Srikantia.
The Shali belt is bounded to the west by Mandi-Sundernagar thrust, with the
Shalis over riding the Lower Tertiary and to the north and north-east by a thrust
along which the crystalline and metamorphics have over ridden the Shalis.
There is another belt which extend from Bhind Tibba in the north to Khadli on
south is referred as Shali Subsidiary Belt, resting over the Tertiaries.
The regional geological set up as per Geological Survey of India is as under: -
(8) Bandla Member Basic dykes and sills (intrusive)

Red shale, sandstone, white quartzite and
green brecciated rocks
(7) Parnali Member Cherty dolomite, quartzite and thin bedded
limestone
(6) Makri Member Shale and slate with or without cherty

dolomite
(5) Tattapani Member Cherty dolomite, pink and grey in color with
phyllitized shale and buff colored bedded
limestone
(4) Sorghawari Member Pink and grey limestone with shale bands
(3) Khatpul Member Massive grey limestone
(2) Khaira Member Pink and white quartzite, maroon and grey
shale and a thin bands of dolomite, a thin
bands of red shale along the upper contact
with dolomite
(1) Roopri Member Red and maroon shale and siltstones with an
impresistent band of dolomite. Local
development of salt, salt grit and marly litho-
complex ‘Lokhan’
_____________Contact conformable with local disconformities______________

Mandi Darla volcanic within Sundernagar Formations
_______________________Base not exposed___________________________

Chapter-2
2.4.2 Local Geology
In the applied area mapped geologically, the following units of Shali Formations
have been identified. In order to record their superimposition there is repetition of
different units along the section due to folding into anticlines and synclines. At
Baga the pink limestone of Sorgharwari Member are exposed as SW part of
syncline. Beyond Rugughati the Sorgharwari Member is again repeated and is
exposed in the form of anticline and syncline and extend upto village Kandhar. At
Kandhar this limestone is overlained by dolomite of Tattapani Member. The
geological sequence met from Kharsi to Kandhar is as under in order to interpret
their superimposition:
The rocks of the Shali formation are seen exposed in and around the applied
area. A number of units of the Shali formation have been identified and
depending upon their stratigraphic sequence is described in Table-2.7.
TABLE-2.7
STRATIGRAPHIC SEQUENCE
Angular to sub angular boulders of dolomites, pink and grey

Overburden
limestone and quartzite admixed with soil (scree)
Cherty dolomite, pink in color with phyllitized shale and buff
Tattapani Member
colored thin bedded limestone
Sorgharwari Member Pink and grey limestone with shale bands
Kharpul Member Massive Grey dolomite with algal stromatolites
Pink and white quartzite with thin band of red shale along the
Khaira Member
upper contact with dolomite
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Murree Thrust _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Khari Tertiaries
The succession of rock unit of Shali’s has been worked out in the ML area is given
in Table-2.8.
TABLE-2.8
SUCCESSION OF ROCK UNIT OF SHALI’S IN ML AREA
Overburden Overburden thin layer soil as scree

Bandla Member Basic dykes and sills (intrusive)
Sorgharwari Pink and grey limestone, purple pink and grey limestone
Member with thin shale partings
Hard grey siliceous limestone with black shale
Kharpul Member Massive Grey dolomite with algal stromatolites
The description of local geological members are as under:

Chapter-2
Basic Rock Intrusive
It belongs to Bandla member of Shali formation and forming the youngest unit in
the area. It generally occurs on the south-eastern part of the area spread over a
very small extent.
It is found along the south-eastern small part of the area in block Samtiyari and
from a part of the overturned. It is ash coloured hard and compact in the form of
sill & dykes.
Dolomites (Khatpul/Tattapani Member)
It belongs to Khatpur/Tattapani member of Shali formation and forming the

oldest unit in the area. It generally occurs along higher and lower ridges on the
western flank due to its structural control.
It is found along the southern fringe of the area in block Samtiyari and froms a
part of the overturned limb of syncline. It is hard and compact massive and grey
and greenish in color and is characterized by elephant skin weathering on the
surface.
Shale
At certain places a band of ash colored shale is seen exposed of Shali formation in
Baga block only.
Grey Limestone (Sorgharwari Member)
It is again exposed along the SW and northern flanks of Samtiyari block in the
area and lay in-between the so-called pink limestone of Sorgharwari member. It
is generally attained higher elevation due to over-turning of west limb of syncline
because of its structural control. It mainly comprises of grey well bedded, hard,
fine-grained limestone with yellow laminate at some places. The black
carbonaceous shale with thin black limestone partings was also noticed in the
grey limestone at places. The grey limestone is rich in silica. The rock sequence
shows general trends NW-SE direction with south westerly dips of 25O to 60O. The
limestone is highly pointed and fragmented in nature.
Pink Limestone
The cement grade limestone is exposed all along its strike length in central part
of Baga block and from SE NW part Samtiyari block.
The limestone is mostly pink in colour with very thin bands of purple shale
partings. The pink limestone exposed in the area is fine grained, well bedded,
jointed, hard at places and laminated with streaks and bands of purple shale. The
three blocks geological plan and geological section is shown in Figure-2.3 and
Figure-2.4.

Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.3 (A)
GEOLOGICAL PLAN OF BAGA BLOCK

Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.3 (B)
GEOLOGICAL PLAN OF SAMTIYARI BLOCK
Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.3 (C)
GEOLOGICAL PLAN OF BHALAG BLOCK

Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.4 (A)
GEOLOGICAL SECTIONS OF BAGA BLOCK

Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.4 (B)
GEOLOGICAL SECTIONS OF SAMTIYARI BLOCK
Chapter-2
2.4.3 Regional and Local Geological Structure
The applied area and its surroundings present a complex structural setup. The
major structural feature that is observed in the area is the fold. In Baga area the
Sorghawari member of the Shali formation is thrown into an asymmetrical
synclinal fold. The axis of the syncline has an N10 0W-S100E trend and the two
limbs that are exposed in the eastern and western side of the deposit have dip of
the order to 300 to 400 towards the southwesterly direction and 400 to 700
towards the northeasterly direction respectively. In Baga area both the pink
limestone is refolded tightly into anticline and corresponding syncline which is
exposed in the nallah bed running west of Baga village. The anticlinal trend
follows almost the same trend as that of the main syncline. This folding
disappears in the upper beds of the limestone exposed in the area. A minor fault
has also affected the limestone in the area. This fault is noticed in the northern
part of the area. The fault has resulted in cutting of grey limestone along the
eastern limb of the syncline down below the roadside by which the dolomite
limestone of the Khatpul member has come in contact with the younger pink
limestone horizon of Sorgharwari member.
The Shali Formation forms part of a major anticline that has been mapped on a
regional scale. Along the western part the anticline limb is folded into major
syncline whose axis runs in a NW-SE direction. Minor fold of NW-SE axis that
probably represent the last generation of folds has also been observed in the pink
limestone. This folding is feeble in nature but has affected the NW-SE folds.
The pink and grey limestone has trends in a NNW-SSE to NW-SE direction with
southwesterly dip. The amount of dip varies from 30 0 to 600 and at certain places
is almost vertical. The variation in the amount of dip is mainly due to tight folding
and overturning of different rock units in the area.
The limestone is highly jointed and the prominent set of joint seen in the area has
a NW-SE strike and has steeply dips towards NE. Another set of joint that is
observed, has a strike of NE-SW and has steep dip on either side.
2.5 Details of Exploration
The geological mapping in the region was carried in past by Medlicott (1864),
Hayden (1918-19), Palmer (1920), Auden (1928-33), West (1939). Hazra (1939-
40), Srivastava (1949-50), Boilean, Kohli (1951-53), Das & Nautial SP (1962),
Singh & Kantia (1962). Medlicot was followed by a number of workers from the
GSI who were involved in assigning the geological succession and ascertaining
the structure of the region.
The initial exploration was taken up by Geological Wing, H.P. State Government
in the Baga and Bhalag area in 1986-87 and 1995-96. The activities undertaken
comprised of geological mapping, channel sampling, core and DTH drilling,
logging, sampling and analysis of the drill hole samples.
Out of the 48 DTH holes drilled by Geological Wing with the total meterage of
1381 m, 43 DTH holes falls within adjoining ML area of the same company and
outside the applied area and 05 DTH holes fall within the applied area with the
total drill length of 150 m.

Chapter-2
Exploration carried out by M/s JAL
A total of 84 core drill holes (71 core drill holes, admeasuring 7175.5 m in Bhalag
Block and 13 core drill holes, admeasuring 1261.50 m in Baga Block) were drilled
to confirm the lateral and horizontal expansion of limestone and shale deposit.
Out of these 03 core bore holes falling within the range of 40 m from boundary of
Baga block of the applied area and 09 core boreholes falling within the range of
175 m from boundary of Samtiyari block of the applied area.
No bore hole influence can be taken for Bhalag block except surface geological
mapping. However in Bhalag block, no mining is proposed during first five years
of mining.
Before commencing systematic geological mapping in the area, several

reconnaissance geological traverses were made within the applied area. This
concern the occurrence of major litho units namely grey colored dolomite and
pink/gray limestone/intrusive. At places the litho units are covered by a thin
veneer of overburden soil/scree. However, in the area outcrops provided very
good guide for geological mapping. With this background, geological mapping
aided by surface sampling was carried out in Samtiyari block. The lithological
contacts between various litho units were identified and mapped. The dip and
strike were recorded at these contacts to decipher the trend of the limestone and
the structure/discontinuities. All the data thus collected were transferred to the
geological plan and sections.
From the geological mapping, it can be seen that there are two distinct limestone
bands and one shale band occurring within the applied area. These are referred
as Baga, Samtiyari and Bhalag block for all future discussion in this report.
Further, it can also be seen from geological plans and sections that the limestone/
shale have not undergone any major structural disturbances. However, a fault of
local nature has been observed in Samtiyari block.
2.5.1 Estimation of Reserve
The limestone reserves have been estimated separately for the Baga block,
Samtiyari block and Bhalag blocks. The reserves of the grey limestone, pink
limestone and shale have also been estimated separately. The volume of both the
varieties of limestone has been calculated on the basis of the sections drawn
along the direction of dip for the entire length of the limestone deposit within the
area boundary. The area of influence of each section line has been considered
100 m multiplied by the area covered by mineralized zone in each section. The
reserves were arrived at by multiplying the volume with the bulk density, which
has been taken as 2.5 tonnes/cum and 2.2 tonnes/cum for the both the grads of
limestone and shale respectively.
In the Baga block, the limestone and upto a level of 1525 m RL is considered
under proved reserves category limit which is lowest drilled level based on
influence of drilling carried out in nearby ML area. Below that, a 50 m zone of
probable reserves is considered and 25 m zone of limestone band is considered
under possible category. The ultimate mining limit at depth is considered of the
lowest accessible limit by making systematic benches in limestone and shale. This
Chapter-2
has been taken upto 1500 m RL and is considered under the mineable reserves.
Refer section line A-A’ to E-E’ is respect of Baga block.
In Samtiyari block, the reserves bounded within the area of influence of bore hole
drilling in nearby ML area upto 200 m laterally is considered under proved
reserves.
Probable limit of mineralized zone is considered beyond 100 m of proved reserves

limit. Half of the length of line surface sampling (S-S’ & S1-S1’) is also considered
while depicting line of probable category.
Remaining mineralized zone is taken under possible category laterally. Core bore
maximum drilled upto level of 850 m in nearby working mines is taken as
influence for proved reserves beyond this taken is probably reserves is taken upto
level 800 m. No possible category is awarded as no mineral reserves are to be
assessed below this as no mining is feasible beyond this level as it is below water
table.
Reserves estimation of Bhalag block will be done after completion of proposed

exploration.
All allowance on volume of limestone assessed has been given on account of

cavities, voids, estimation errors etc i.e. the overall volume of limestone has been
reduced by 10%, 30% and 50% for proved, probable and possible category of
reserves.
2.5.1.1 Basis for Awarding UNFC Code
 All the reserves under category Mineable proved are placed in the E1, F2 &
G1 category (211) of reserves based on the influence taken of exploration
carried out in the nearby ML area and pre-feasibility study carried out for the
applied area. Economical axis is placed at E1 as the experienced gained from
adjoining working mine of the same company. Feasibility axis if kept at F2 as
few clearance are yet to be obtained. And geological axis is under G1 as
detailed exploration carried out in adjoining mine and influence of 200 m is
considered for the applied area in focus.
 All the reserves under category Mineable probable are placed under E1, F2 &
G2 category (122) of reserves as influence of 100 m is granted beyond from
proved reserves boundary.
 The reserves under E2, F2 & G1 and E2, F2 & G2 category, the reserves
which cannot to mined at present due to the statutory boundary barriers,
working restriction upto 850 m AMSL, mineral blocked in bench formation etc
are placed under Feasibility Mineral Resources and are classified under code
221 and 222.
Note: No tar road barrier is taken into consideration as applicant is going for
diversion of tar road (in Samtiyari Block) from competent authority till than
necessary permission will be taken from DGMS for 15 m tar road barrier.

Chapter-2
 Rest of the reserves under the probable and possible reserves categories
which fall in govt. land as well as in private land are placed under 331 & 333.
The total summary of geological & mineable reserves/resources of all categories

in both the Baga and Samtiyari blocks of applied area are given in Table-2.9 and
the average chemical grade of the limestone from the two blocks is given in
Table-2.10.
TABLE-2.9 (A)
SUMMARY OF TOTAL GEOLOGICAL RESERVES/RESOURCES OF BOTH BAGA
& SAMTIYARI BLOCKS
Category Baga Block Samtiyari Block Total (MT)

Shale Pink Pink Gray Shale Pink Gray
LST LST LST LST LST
121 6.776 0.807 22.636 1.208 6.776 23.443 1.208
122 0.245 - 39.375 1.705 0.245 39.375 1.705
221 3.443 2.366 29.425 0.232 3.443 31.791 0.232
222 7.939 1.831 15.135 0.28 7.939 16.966 0.28
331 - - 81.794 1.875 - 81.794 1.875
333 1.538 0.915 43.225 1.627 1.538 44.14 1.627
Total 19.941 5.919 231.59 6.937 19.941 237.509 6.927
Block Total 25.86 238.527 264.377
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-2.9 (B)
SUMMARY OF TOTAL MINEABLE RESERVES AT BOTH BAGA & SAMTIYARI
BLOCKS
Category Baga Block Samtiyari Block Total (MT)

Shale Pink Pink Gray Shale Pink Gray
LST LST LST LST LST
121 6.776 0.807 22.636 1.208 6.776 23.443 1.208
122 0.245 - 39.375 1.705 0.245 39.375 1.705
Total 7.021 0.807 62.011 2.913 7.021 62.818 2.913
Block Total 7.828 64.924 72.752
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-2.10
AVERAGE CHEMICAL GRADE OF LIMESTONE & SHALE AT APPLIED AREA
Constituents Baga Block Baga Block Samtiyari Block

Shale Pink LST Gray LST Pink LST
SiO2 45.6 20.00 14.97 8.69
Al2O3 10.13 2.30 2.10 2.0
Fe2O3 10.54 1.20 0.94 0.54
CaO 17.44 40.00 45.08 47.47
MgO 3.46 1.75 0.56 1.09
LOI 8.23 33.00 35.17 39.14
Source: Mine Plan

Chapter-2
 Estimation of Limestone Reserves/Resources of Bhalag Block
No reserves estimation of Bhalag block is done and also no influence is available.

The reserves estimation in Bhalag block will take place after completion of
exploration proposed during first five years of working.
If the occurrence of limestone has been reported from levels even below upto the
level measured so far from the two blocks the change in ultimate pit limit shall be
governed by further proving of limestone by drilling. And also reserves will be
governed by after complete exploration in Bhalag block.
The reserves to be blocked for formation of benches has also been taken into
account for arriving at the mineable reserves which are summarized as per UNFC
(United Nations framework Classification). The lime stone and shale reserves are
given in Table-2.11.
TABLE-2.11 (A)
LIMESTONE RESERVES AS PER UNFC AT BOTH BLOCKS
Classification Code Quantity Grade

(Million Tonnes)
Total Mineral Resources (A+B) 244.436
A. Mineral Reserve: -
1. Proved Mineral Resources 111 - Cement
2. Probable Mineral Resources 121 & 122 24.651+41.08 Grade
B. Remaining Resources: -
1. Feasibility Mineral Resources 211 -
2. Pre-feasibility Mineral Resources 221 & 222 32.023+17.246
3. Measured Mineral Resources 331 83.669
4. Indicated Mineral Resources 332 -
5. Inferred Mineral Resources 333 45.767
6. Reconnaissance Mineral Resources 334 --
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-2.11 (B)
SHALE RESERVES AS PER UNFC AT BAGA BLOCK
Classification Code Quantity (Million Grade

Tonnes)
Total Mineral Resources (A+B) 19.941
A. Mineral Reserve: -
1. Proved Mineral Resources 111 -
2. Probable Mineral Resources 121 & 122 6.776+0.245
B. Remaining Resources: -
corrective
1. Feasibility Mineral Resources 211 -
material
2. Pre-feasibility Mineral Resources 221 &222 3.443+7.939
3. Measured Mineral Resources 331 -
4. Indicated Mineral Resources 332 -
5. Inferred Mineral Resources 333 1.538
6. Reconnaissance Mineral Resources 334 -
Source-Mine Plan

Chapter-2
2.5.2 Anticipated Life of Mine
The proposed rate of production of limestone from the mine when fully developed
to require production is based on the following parameters:
* Rated clinker production per annum 2.50 MT

* Clinkerization factor 1.45
* Raw Material Requirement per annum for clinker production- 4.0 MT
(Total limestone and shale required shall be 4.0 million tonnes per annum out of
which 3.6 million tonnes - Limestone & 0.4 million tonnes - Shale considering
moisture and wind loss)
For Limestone and Shale - 30 Years
The life of mine would increase further when the indicated and inferred category
of reserve is converted under the measured category based on future exploration
programme.
2.6 Method of Mining
The geological investigations suggest that the limestone & shale deposit is hard
and exposed so opencast mechanized mining by forming systematic benches of
10.0 m height with width of 15 m minimum. Shovel-dumper combination is
proposed at Baga-Bhalag-Samtiyari Limestone & Shale ML area same practice is
being followed in applicants nearby ML area. The outcropping limestone is hard.
Haul roads and other development will be carried out in accordance with the
terrain. Drilling and blasting of mining blocks are proposed. The limestone and
shale will be loaded by shovel into the dumpers/tippers and dispatched directly to
the crusher proposed near village Patha in nearby the ML area.
The limestone and shale deposit outcrops in Baga, Samtiyari and Bhalag blocks
with none of covering of topsoil. There is no other overburden in these blocks. No
topsoil and overburden is to be removed for exposing limestone and shale.
Samtiyari and Bhalag block is limestone rich block whereas Block Baga is rich of
shale.
The applied area is located in an extremely rugged lesser Himalayan terrain. The
main semi metalled village road that passes along the Periphery of the deposit at
lower altitude. Development of access road to the proposed mining area would be
the initial task of development.
The mining for mineral Limestone & Shale shall be for captive use at the cement
plant in the vicinity located at village Baga which is approximately 0.6 km (crow
fly distance) to the nearest boundary i.e. Baga block of applied area.
It is proposed to initiate mining operation for limestone from Samtiyari block

during the initial 5 years mine plan period since the Samtiyari block has been
proved to a greater extant. The shale from the Baga block shall be mined
subsequently which have to be blended in a fixed proportion which limestone of
the Samtiyari block.
Chapter-2
The entire limestone deposit on the top and along the gentle slope of the hill lies
concealed beneath a thin layer of soil that also contains fragments of calcareous
material referred to as scree. It has already been started that there is no
overburden in the applied area. Once the access road reaches the proposed
mining area, the next development activity is proposed to be taken place by
scrapping the scree with the help of Dozer.
Once exposed the under lying limestone horizons would be ready for production.
It is proposed to develop 10 m high benches within limestone that shall descend
down upto the ultimate pit limit.
In order to supply limestone and shall be mined at 90% and 10% respectively of
the total ROM requirement. For this purpose two working sites selected i.e. Baga
block for shale and Samtiyari block for limestone.
No working is proposed in Bhalag block during first five years of mining plan.
Limestone and shall is proposed to be mined from Samtiyari and Baga block
respectively which shall be named as Baga pit in Baga block and Samtiyari pit in
Samtiyari block.
The upper most bench proposed shall be at 1630 m RL in Baga pit. Samtiyari
block is comparatively at low level. The length of the benches shall be kept quite
enough to get required production and width 20 m minimum.
i. Working Face Design
Mining operations is proposed to be carried out by fully mechanized opencast

method utilizing Heavy Earth Moving Equipment (HEMM) in conjunction with
deep-hole drilling by crawler mounted DTH drills and blasting. Necessary
permission shall be obtained for deep hole blasting from competent authority.
Development activities includes preparation of access roads, haul roads etc.
Somewhere benches may be kept narrow in view of restricted availability of
ground and then gradually widened. To the extent possible, benches shall be kept
along dip and advanced along the strike to give a fairly well blended material in
each bench. The direction may be varied in due course based on experience
gained, to give wider benches, longer faces and proper alignment along haul
roads/ ramps.
ii. Working Face Development
If limestone deposit occurs with a thin mantle of soil then it cannot be separate
out and also the shale mixed along with limestone. There shall be no other pre-
production development as such to expose the deposit. However, provision of
new haul roads/ ramps and development of benches/ faces which are essential
for production stage shall be the only development activity involved.
Road development is required for Samtiyari block only upto crusher proposed
near village Patha in nearby ML area of M/s JAL. No major work towards road/
ramp development is required for Baga block upto crusher as it is already
prepared and in use in the adjoining mining lease.

Chapter-2
As a pre-production activity, roads to proposed crusher from proposed working

site in the Samtiyari block will be developed during very first year. Connectivity
with the mines office complex and to the garage/ workshop (in adjoining lease)
will be developed.
Access roads/ haul roads from topmost bench to the benches at lower levels will
be developed. As mining operations advance to lower levels, larger face lengths
and width shall be available. Face management, which is a continuous process,
shall be taken into account to secure shortest (average) lead distance up to
crusher as also to prevent clustering of dumpers.
iii.Working Face Operation
Only one pit is proposed at Samtiyari block. The upper most bench in this block
shall be developed at level 1150 m RL whereas lower most at elevation 1040 m
RL. The length of the benches shall vary depending on available same contours of
proposed level for working.
In the same manner one pit is also proposed in the Baga block. The upper most
bench formed in Baga block is proposed at 1620 m RL whereas lower most at
1540 m RL. The length of the benches shall very as per the topography.
The topmost bench in Samtiyari block shall be formed with 1150 m RL as floor
level and the same in Baga block is proposed 1620 m RL. Subsequently, benches
of 10 m height shall be continued in descending order up to 1040 m RL in
Samtiyari block and 1540 m RL in Baga block during the period next five years.
Adequate face length shall be maintained to ensure un-interrupted supply of
required quality and quantity of limestone to the proposed cluster in nearby ML of
the same company.
2.6.1 Appropriate Major Techniques
There are four types of equipment systems available for opencast mining:
 Bucket-wheel excavator mining;

 Dragline mining;
 Shovel-dumper combination; and
 Surface miners.
2.6.2 Sequence of Mining
The fully mechanized opencast method of mining will be adopted. Conventional

mining using drilling, blasting and/ or rock breaking and material handling by
excavator/ dumper combination. The flow sheet indicating the different stages of
mining operations of Baga block and Samtiyari block are shown in Figure-2.5.

Chapter-2
2.6.3 Yearly wise Lime Stone & Shale Production
 First Year Production Programme
During this year, no production of limestone and shale is proposed. Only road
development is proposed in both the blocks from top level of proposed working
sites. The road will connect to already prepared access route in adjoining working
mine. The width of road shall be kept 10-15 m as per the available terrain.
Approach roads are proposed for gradient of 1 in 16 maximum.
 Second Year Production Programme
During this year, working shall be carried out in both the blocks i.e. Samtiyari
block and Baga block. Total two locations have been demarcated by one in the
each block. This will be done in view of conservation of mineral and of required
quality of limestone and shale to meet out cement plant requirement. The area
earmarked for working are:-
A. Samtiyari Block
During this year, no development will be carried out as no topsoil and overburden
exists in area. Production will be carried out by opening new area at one location
extending towards northwest.
Four limestone benches i.e floor level 1150 m RL to 1120 m RL is proposed by

forming systematic benches of 10 m high. Bench width will be same as that of
height. Somewhere width of bench may be slightly shorter than the height in tune
of natural topography. Layout of faces will be towards northwest direction. The
bench slope is proposed to keep 700 with horizontal. Face length would be 700 m.
Approach to the benches shall be made by making haul roads/ramps with
gradient of 1 in 16 maximum.
No waste generation shall be there in this year hence no dumping is required for
this block.
Total 1.80 million tonnes of pink limestone and grey limestone will be produced
from this block in this year out of which grey limestone will account to 0.15
million tonnes. This will be the best suitable combination in respect of required
quality.
B. Baga Block
Three shale benches i.e. floor level 1620 m RL to 1600 m RL is proposed by

height. Somewhere width of bench may be slightly shorter than the height in tune
of natural topography. Layout of faces will be towards southwest direction. The
bench slope is proposed to keep 700 with horizontal. Approach to the benches
shall be made by making haul roads/ramps with gradient of 1 in 16 maximum.

Chapter-2
this block.
Total 0.20 million tonnes of shale will be produced from this block in this year.
Total limestone and shale production proposed to be taken from these two blocks
shall be 2.0 million tonnes.
For protection of rolling boulders on top of the hills, Q-Deck sheet with the rows is
proposed to be made.
 Third Year Production Programme
During this year, working shall be continued both the blocks i.e. Samtiyari block
and Baga block. The area earmarked for working are:-
A. Samtiyari Block
exists in area. Production will be carried out by forming more benches in
continuation of last bench towards northwest.
Two limestone benches i.e floor level 1110 m RL to 1100 m RL is proposed by

height. Layout of faces will be towards northwest direction. The bench slope is
proposed to keep 700 with horizontal. Approach to the benches shall be made by
making haul roads/ramps with gradient of 1 in 16 maximum.
this block.
million tonnes.
B. Baga Block
Three shale benches i.e. floor level 1590 m RL to 1570 m RL is proposed by

height. Layout of faces will be towards southwest direction. The bench slope is
this block.

Chapter-2
 Fourth Year Production Programme
During this year, working shall be continued both the blocks i.e. Samtiyari block
and Baga block. The area earmarked for working are:-
A. Samtiyari Block
Two limestone benches i.e floor level 1090 m RL to 1080 m RL is proposed by

this block.
million tonnes.
B. Baga Block
Two shale benches i.e. floor level 1570 m RL to 1560 m RL is proposed by

this block.
 Fifth Year Production Programme
During this year, working shall be continued in both the blocks i.e. Samtiyari
block and Baga block. The area earmarked for working are:-
A. Samtiyari Block

Chapter-2
Four limestone benches i.e floor level 1080 m RL to 1050 m RL is proposed by

this block.
million tonnes.
B. Baga Block
Two shale benches i.e. floor level 1560 m RL to 1550 m RL is proposed by

this block.
In the present scenario, the total working depth is envisaged about 80 m from bgl
which shall be finalized after exploration which is proposed during first year.
Details on yearly wise production plan and section of limestone is given in Table-
2.12. Year wise production of Baga block is shown from Figure-2.6 to Figure-
2.11 and Year wise production of Samtiyari block is shown from Figure-2.12 to
Figure-2.17.

Chapter-2
TABLE-2.12 (A)
PRODUCTION PROGRAM & ROM GRADE DURING FIRST YEAR
(Development of approach road is proposed in this year)
Block Level MRL Approx. length

From to m
Samtiyari 1615 1640 1500
Baga 1550 1550 180
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-2.12 (B)
PRODUCTION PROGRAM & ROM GRADE DURING SECOND YEAR
Block Bench MRL Avg. Bench ht Area Volume Soil Waste LST/ Shale
From To Mts Sq. Mts. Cum Cum Cum Tones
Samtiyari +1150 1150 5 5684 28420 0 0 71050
1150 1140 8 15285 122280 0 0 305700
1140 1130 8 24662 197296 0 0 493240
1130 1120 9 41361 372249 0 0 930623
Block Total 86992 720245 0 0 1800613
Baga +1625 1625 10 1465 14650 0 0 32230
1620 1610 10 3650 36500 0 0 80300
1610 1600 10 3982 39820 0 0 87604
Block Total 7632 76320 0 0 200134
Year Total 94624 796565 0 0 2000747
Source: Mine Plan

Chapter-2
TABLE-2.12 (C)
PRODUCTION PROGRAM & ROM GRADE DURING THIRD YEAR
Samtiyari 1120 1110 9.5 57925 550288 0 0 1375719
1110 1100 9.5 74812 710714 0 0 1776785
Block Total 132737 1261002 0 0 3152504
Baga 1600 1590 10 5302 53020 0 0 116644
1590 1580 10 6027 60270 0 0 132594
1580 1570 10 4620 46200 0 0 101640
Block Total 10647 106470 0 0 350878
Year Total 143384 1367472 0 0 3503382
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-2.12 (D)
PRODUCTION PROGRAM & ROM GRADE DURING FOURTH YEAR
Samtiyari 1100 1090 9.5 75762 719739 0 0 1799348
1090 1080 9.5 75893 720984 0 0 1802459
Block Total 151655 1440723 0 0 3601806
Baga 1580 1570 10 5898 58980 0 0 129756
1570 1560 10 12365 123650 0 0 272030
Block Total 12365 123650 0 0 401786
Year Total 164020 1564373 0 0 4003592
Source: Mine Plan

Chapter-2
TABLE-2.12 (E)
PRODUCTION PROGRAM & ROM GRADE DURING FIFTH YEAR
Samtiyari 1080 1070 10 52800 528000 0 0 1320000
1070 1060 10 41840 418400 0 0 1046000
1060 1050 10 33344 333440 0 0 833600
1050 1040 10 16058 160580 0 0 401450
Block Total 144042 1440420 0 0 3601050
Baga 1560 1550 10 10665 106650 0 0 234630
1550 1540 10 7522 75220 0 0 165484
Block Total 7522 75220 0 0 400114
Year Total 151564 1515640 0 0 4001164
Source: Mine Plan

Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.5
FLOW SHEET INDICATING DIFFERENT STAGES OF MINING OPERATIONS

Chapter-2
R.F. - 1 : 2000
0 20 40 60 80 100 150 200 250 500 M
BM(RL.1632.990Mtr.)
N14400 4
LAT. - N 31°19'19.47"
LONG. - E 76°53'20.42" SAMTIYARI BLOCK INDEX
25 221
TO
16
BE
AREA BOUNDARY
RI
SA
TL
BAGA
UJ
RI
BHALAG
V
STATUTORY BARRIER
ER
25 BLOCK
16
KHARSI
BAGA
121
TO
BIL BLOCK CONTOUR (INTERVAL OF 5 M & 25M)
MAGNETIC MERIDIAN
AS
PU
00
R
16 DARLA MORE
INDEX
(Dt. 10.10.2013) N14100 LOCAL GRID
APPLIED BOUNDARY
ROAD
TO RIVER
SH
IM
LA KEY PLAN HOUSE
N14300 DARLAGHAT
82
75 25
BORE HOLE (BY STATE GOVT.) WITH DEPTH
15 16
LAT. - N 31°18'14.48" 221 BORE HOLE (BY JAYPEE) IN NEARBY ML
LONG. - E 76°53'20.81"
0 121 121
BGRS-02
5
1583 PROPOSED BORE HORE
LAT. - N 31°19'12.15"
LONG. - E 76°54'17.58" SEASONAL WATER PIT
TO CRUSHER SURVEY STATION

5
N14200 50
15 25
BM
BENCH MARK
16 0
0
121 16 CLIFF
75
15 WATER PIPE
LAT. - N 31°19'10.69"
121 15
75
ELECTRIC LINE
LONG. - E 76°53'22.70"
WATER TANK
121 FOOT- PATH
E12500
LA
84 LO T.
00
NG -
.- N3 SEASONAL DRAIN
16
85 E 1°1
N14100
76 9'
°53 8.1
'36 4" 83 BOUNDARY PILLAR
.02
LAT. - N 31°19'09.38"
LONG. - E 76°53'25.13"
86 221 121 221 "
PINK LIMESTONE WITH
87 PURPLE SHALE PARTING
121
E12600
SHALE
00 JOINT
16 88 50
89 15
DIP & STRIKE
LAT. - N 31°19'07.40"
LONG. - E 76°53'29.94" 121
N16000 121 RESERVES UNDER 121
221 222 RESERVES UNDER 222
E12700
121 125
LA
LO T.
NG -
221 RESERVES UNDER 221
.- N3 ULTIMATE PIT LIMIT
IT IS CERTIFIED THAT THIS E 1°1
76 9'
PLAN IS CORRECT TO THE BEST OF
OUR KNOWLEDGE
221 91
°53 05
'33 .27"
.37 PROPOSED PLANTATION
90 00
"
16 123
100 221 PROPOSED HAULAGE
E12800
LAT. - N 31°19'04.51"
(RAKESH PUROHIT) (S.K. SONI) LONG. - E 76°53'29.69" PROP. CHECK DAM
M/s R. K. CONSULTANTS
119
RQP/UDP/349/2009-B N13900
101
PLATE No.-5A-1 221
YEARWISE WORKING PLAN 1035
16
2 115
BAGA-BHALAG LIMESTONE & SHALE AREA
112
222
APPLICANT:-
M/s JAIPRAKASH ASSOCIATES LTD.
104 LAT. - N 31°18'59.66"
(UNIT JAYPEE HIMACHAL CEMENT PLANT) LAT. - N 31°19'0.74"
LONG. - E 76°53'36.23" 222 LONG. - E 76°53'41.36"
E12900
BLOCK: BAGA BLOCK AREA-9.1204 Ha YEAR - FIRST

SCALE-1:2000 SURVEY DATE:- 10.10.2013 APPLIED AREA-172.7434 Ha N13800 109
E13000
LAT. - N 31°18'59.37" 106

LONG. - E 76°53'39.23"
17E/403, C. H. B., JODHPUR-08 (RAJ.)
FIGURE-2.6
YEAR WISE WORKING PLAN BAGA BLOCK-1ST YEAR

Chapter-2
R.F. - 1 : 2000
0 20 40 60 80 100 150 200 250 500 M
BM(RL.1632.990Mtr.)
N14400 4
221
LAT. - N 31°19'19.47"
LONG. - E 76°53'20.42"
SH
IF
TE SAMTIYARI BLOCK INDEX
D
25
W
AT
TO
16
ER
BER
LI AREA BOUNDARY
25
NE
SA
I
TL
16
BAGA
UJ
RI
BHALAG
V
STATUTORY BARRIER
ER
KHARSI BLOCK
BAGA
121
TO
BIL BLOCK CONTOUR (INTERVAL OF 5 M & 25M)
MAGNETIC MERIDIAN
AS
PU
00
R
16 DARLA MORE
INDEX
(Dt. 10.10.2013) N14100 LOCAL GRID
APPLIED BOUNDARY
ROAD
TO RIVER
SH
IM
LA KEY PLAN HOUSE
N14300 DARLAGHAT
82
75 25
15 16
LAT. - N 31°18'14.48" 221 BORE HOLE (BY JAYPEE) IN NEARBY ML
LONG. - E 76°53'20.81"
0 121 121
BGRS-02
5
1583 PROPOSED BORE HORE
LAT. - N 31°19'12.15"
LONG. - E 76°54'17.58" SEASONAL WATER PIT
TO CRUSHER SURVEY STATION

5
N14200
50
15 25
BM
BENCH MARK
16 0
0
121 16 CLIFF
75
15 WATER PIPE
LAT. - N 31°19'10.69"
121 15
75
ELECTRIC LINE
LONG. - E 76°53'22.70"
WATER TANK
121 FOOT- PATH
E12500
LA
84
00
LO T.
NG -
16
.- N3 SEASONAL DRAIN
85 E 1°1
N14100
76 9'
°53 8.1
'36 4" 83 BOUNDARY PILLAR
.02
LAT. - N 31°19'09.38"
LONG. - E 76°53'25.13"
86 221 121 221 "
PINK LIMESTONE WITH
87 PURPLE SHALE PARTING
121
E12600
SHALE
00 JOINT
16 88 50
89 15
DIP & STRIKE
LAT. - N 31°19'07.40"
LONG. - E 76°53'29.94" 121
N16000 121 RESERVES UNDER 121
E12700
121 125
LA
LO T.
NG -
.- N3 ULTIMATE PIT LIMIT
76 9'
OUR KNOWLEDGE
221 91
°53 05
'33 .27"
.37 PROPOSED BENCH
90 00
" FLOOR RL
16 123
100 221 PROPOSED PRODUCTION
AREA
E12800
LAT. - N 31°19'04.51"
(RAKESH PUROHIT) (S.K. SONI) LONG. - E 76°53'29.69"
119 PROPOSED PLANTATION
RQP/UDP/349/2009-B N13900
101 HAULAGE
PLATE No.-5A-2 221 PROP. CHECK DAM

16
2 115
112
222
APPLICANT:-
104 LAT. - N 31°18'59.66"
LONG. - E 76°53'36.23" 222 LONG. - E 76°53'41.36"
E12900
BLOCK: BAGA BLOCK AREA-9.1204 Ha YEAR - SECOND

E13000
LAT. - N 31°18'59.37" 106

17E/403, C. H. B., JODHPUR-08 (RAJ.)
LONG. - E 76°53'39.23"
FIGURE-2.7
YEAR WISE WORKING PLAN BAGA BLOCK-2ND YEAR

Chapter-2
R.F. - 1 : 2000
0 20 40 60 80 100 150 200 250 500 M
BM(RL.1632.990Mtr.)
4
N14400
221 INDEX
LAT. - N 31°19'19.47" SH
LONG. - E 76°53'20.42"
IF
TE SAMTIYARI BLOCK
D
AREA BOUNDARY
25
W
AT
TO
16
ER
BER
LI
25
NE
STATUTORY BARRIER
SA
I
TL
16
BAGA
UJ
RI
BHALAG
VER
KHARSI BLOCK CONTOUR (INTERVAL OF 5 M & 25M)
BAGA
TO
BIL BLOCK
MAGNETIC MERIDIAN
AS
PU
N14100 LOCAL GRID
00
R
16 INDEX
(Dt. 10.10.2013)
HOUSE
DARLA MORE
APPLIED BOUNDARY
ROAD
TO RIVER
SH
IM
LA KEY PLAN
N14300 DARLAGHAT

82
75 25
15 16 BGRS-02
BORE HOLE (BY JAYPEE) IN NEARBY ML
LAT. - N 31°18'14.48"
LONG. - E 76°53'20.81" PROPOSED BORE HORE
50
1583 SEASONAL WATER PIT
LAT. - N 31°19'12.15"
LONG. - E 76°54'17.58"
SURVEY STATION
TO CRUSHER
BM
BENCH MARK
5
50
15 25
16 0
N14200
CLIFF
0
121 16
WATER PIPE
75
15 ELECTRIC LINE
75
15
LAT. - N 31°19'10.69"
LONG. - E 76°53'22.70" FOOT- PATH
WATER TANK
121
E12500
LA
84
00
LO T. SEASONAL DRAIN
NG -
16
.- N3
85 E 1°1 83 BOUNDARY PILLAR
N14100
76 9'
°53 8.1
'36 4"
.02 PINK LIMESTONE WITH
LAT. - N 31°19'09.38"
LONG. - E 76°53'25.13"
86 221 121 221 "
PURPLE SHALE PARTING
87 SHALE
121
E12600
JOINT
00
16 88 DIP & STRIKE
50
89 15
LAT. - N 31°19'07.40"
LONG. - E 76°53'29.94" 121 121 RESERVES UNDER 121
N16000
E12700
LA
121 125
LO T.
NG -
ULTIMATE PIT LIMIT
.- N3
E 1°1 PROPOSED BENCH
76 9'
221
IT IS CERTIFIED THAT THIS
PLAN IS CORRECT TO THE BEST OF °53 05 FLOOR RL
'33 .27"
OUR KNOWLEDGE 91 .37 PROPOSED PRODUCTION
90 00
"
16 123 AREA
100 221 PROPOSED PLANTATION
E12800
LAT. - N 31°19'04.51"
119 HAULAGE / MINE ROAD
RQP/UDP/349/2009-B N13900
101 BENCH
PLATE No.-5A-3 221
PROP. CHECK DAM
16
2 115
112
222
APPLICANT:-
104 LAT. - N 31°18'59.66"
LONG. - E 76°53'36.23" 222 LONG. - E 76°53'41.36"
E12900
BLOCK: BAGA BLOCK AREA-9.1204 Ha YEAR - THIRD

E13000
LAT. - N 31°18'59.37" 106

LONG. - E 76°53'39.23"
17E/403, C. H. B., JODHPUR-08 (RAJ.)
FIGURE-2.8
YEAR WISE WORKING PLAN BAGA BLOCK-3RD YEAR

Chapter-2
R.F. - 1 : 2000
0 20 40 60 80 100 150 200 250 500 M
BM(RL.1632.990Mtr.)
4
N14400
221 INDEX
LAT. - N 31°19'19.47" SH
LONG. - E 76°53'20.42"
IF
TE SAMTIYARI BLOCK
D
AREA BOUNDARY
25
W
AT
TO
16
ER
BER
LI
25
NE
STATUTORY BARRIER
SA
I
TL
16
BAGA
UJ
RI
BHALAG
VER
BAGA
TO
BIL BLOCK
MAGNETIC MERIDIAN
AS
PU
N14100 LOCAL GRID
00
R
16 INDEX
(Dt. 10.10.2013)
HOUSE
DARLA MORE
APPLIED BOUNDARY
ROAD
TO RIVER
SH
IM
LA KEY PLAN
N14300 DARLAGHAT

82
75 25
15 16 BGRS-02
LAT. - N 31°18'14.48"
50
LAT. - N 31°19'12.15"
LONG. - E 76°54'17.58"
SURVEY STATION
TO CRUSHER
BM
BENCH MARK
5
50
15 25
16 0
N14200
CLIFF
0
121 16
WATER PIPE
75
15 ELECTRIC LINE
75
15
LAT. - N 31°19'10.69"
LONG. - E 76°53'22.70" FOOT- PATH
WATER TANK
121
E12500
LA
84
00
NG -
16
.- N3
N14100
76 9'
°53 8.1
'36 4"
LAT. - N 31°19'09.38"
LONG. - E 76°53'25.13"
86 221 121 221 "
87 SHALE
121
E12600
JOINT
00
16 88 DIP & STRIKE
50
89 15
LAT. - N 31°19'07.40"
N16000
E12700
LA
121 125
LO T.
NG -
ULTIMATE PIT LIMIT
.- N3
76 9'
221
'33 .27"
90 0 "
1 60 123 AREA
E12800
LAT. - N 31°19'04.51"
RQP/UDP/349/2009-B N13900
101 BENCH
PLATE No.-5A-4 221
PROP. CHECK DAM
16
2 115
112
222
APPLICANT:-
104 LAT. - N 31°18'59.66"
LONG. - E 76°53'36.23" 222 LONG. - E 76°53'41.36"
E12900
BLOCK: BAGA BLOCK AREA-9.1204 Ha YEAR - FOURTH

E13000
LAT. - N 31°18'59.37" 106

LONG. - E 76°53'39.23"
17E/403, C. H. B., JODHPUR-08 (RAJ.)
FIGURE-2.9
YEAR WISE WORKING PLAN BAGA BLOCK-4TH YEAR

Chapter-2
R.F. - 1 : 2000
0 20 40 60 80 100 150 200 250 500 M
BM(RL.1632.990Mtr.)
4
N14400
221 INDEX
LAT. - N 31°19'19.47" SH
LONG. - E 76°53'20.42"
IF
TE SAMTIYARI BLOCK
D
AREA BOUNDARY
25
W
AT
TO
16
ER
BE
LI
25
RI
NE
STATUTORY BARRIER
SA
TL
16
BAGA
UJ
RI
BHALAG
VER
BAGA
TO
BIL BLOCK
MAGNETIC MERIDIAN
AS
PU
N14100 LOCAL GRID
00
R
16 INDEX
(Dt. 10.10.2013)
HOUSE
DARLA MORE
APPLIED BOUNDARY
ROAD
TO RIVER
SH
IM
LA KEY PLAN
N14300 DARLAGHAT

82
75 25
15 16 BGRS-02
LAT. - N 31°18'14.48"
50
LAT. - N 31°19'12.15"
LONG. - E 76°54'17.58"
SURVEY STATION
TO CRUSHER
BM
BENCH MARK
5
50
15 25
16 0
N14200
CLIFF
0
121 16
WATER PIPE
75
15 ELECTRIC LINE
75
15
LAT. - N 31°19'10.69"
LONG. - E 76°53'22.70" FOOT- PATH
WATER TANK
121
E12500
LA
84
00
NG -
16
.- N3
N14100
76 9'
°53 8.1
'36 4"
LAT. - N 31°19'09.38"
LONG. - E 76°53'25.13"
86 221 121 221 "
87 SHALE
121
E12600
JOINT
00
16 88 DIP & STRIKE
50
89 15
LAT. - N 31°19'07.40"
N16000
E12700
LA
121 125
LO T.
NG -
ULTIMATE PIT LIMIT
.- N3
76 9'
221
'33 .27"
90 00
"
16 123 AREA
E12800
LAT. - N 31°19'04.51"
N13900
RQP/UDP/349/2009-B
101 BENCH
PLATE No.-5A-5
221
PROP. CHECK DAM
16
2 115
112
APPLICANT:-
104
222 LAT. - N 31°18'59.66"
LONG. - E 76°53'36.23" 222 LONG. - E 76°53'41.36"
E12900
BLOCK: BAGA BLOCK AREA-9.1204 Ha YEAR - FIFTH

E13000
LAT. - N 31°18'59.37" 106

LONG. - E 76°53'39.23"
17E/403, C. H. B., JODHPUR-08 (RAJ.)
FIGURE-2.10
YEAR WISE WORKING PLAN BAGA BLOCK-5TH YEAR

R.F. - 1 : 2000
0 20 40 60 80 100 150 200 250 500 M INDEX
VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

PINK LIMESTONE WITH
SHALE
(M) (M) (M) (M) (M) (M) PROJECTED BOREHOLE

DRILLED WITH DEPTH
HAULAGE
1640 1640 1640 1640 1640 1640
(1624.0)
(D-30M) (M) (M)
1620 AREA BOUNDARY
1620 1620 1620 1620 1620 1620 1620 1620
1610 1610
1600 1600 1600 ULTIMATE PIT LIMIT
1600 1600 1600 121 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
121 1590 DTH-29 221
121 DTH-26 DTH-32 (1599.0)
1580
121 1580 1580 1580 1580 (1570.0) 1580 1580 1580 (D-30M) 1580
(D-30M)
(1553.60) BOREHOLE COLLAR MRL
221 1570 221
221 221 221
1560 1560 1560 221 1560 1560 1560 1560 1560 1560 RESERVES UNDER 121
121 121 121
1550
1540 1540 1540 1540 1540 1540 1540 1540 1540 221 RESERVES UNDER 221
221 121 221 221
221 221 221 221 122 RESERVES UNDER 122
1520 1520 1520 1520 1520 122 1520 1520 1520
1500 1500 1500 222 222 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
222 222 222 222 222 333 RESERVES UNDER 333
1480 1480 1480 1480 1480 1480 1480 1480
PROVED RESERVES LIMIT
1460 333 1460 1460 333 1460 1460 333 1460 1460 333 1460
PROBABLE RESERVES LIMIT
1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440
FIGURE-2.11
1420 1420 1420 1420 1420 1420 1420 1420 POSSIBLE RESERVES LIMIT
1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400

HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M)
HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG B-B' HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG C-C' HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG D-D' CROSS SECTION ALONG E-E'
PLATE No.-5S(A)
WORKING SECTIONS
PROPOSED WORKING 2nd YEAR IT IS CERTIFIED THAT THIS
PLAN IS CORRECT TO THE BEST OF APPLICANT:-
OUR KNOWLEDGE
PROPOSED WORKING 3rd YEAR (UNIT JAYPEE HIMACHAL CEMENT PLANT)
BLOCK: BAGA BLOCK AREA-9.1204 Ha
PROPOSED WORKING 4th YEAR SCALE-1:2000 SURVEY DATE:- 10.10.2013 APPLIED AREA-172.7434 Ha
(RAKESH PUROHIT) (S.K. SONI)
PROPOSED WORKING 5th YEAR RQP/UDP/349/2009-B
17E/403, C. H. B., JODHPUR-08 (RAJ.)
YEAR WISE WORKING SECTIONS-BAGA BLOCK


Chapter-2
C2-40
Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.12
YEAR WISE WORKING PLAN SAMTIYARI BLOCK-1ST YEAR

Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.13
YEAR WISE WORKING PLAN SAMTIYARI BLOCK-2ND YEAR

Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.14
YEAR WISE WORKING PLAN SAMTIYARI BLOCK-3RD YEAR

Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.15
YEAR WISE WORKING PLAN SAMTIYARI BLOCK-4TH YEAR

Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.16
YEAR WISE WORKING PLAN SAMTIYARI BLOCK-5TH YEAR

Chapter-2
(M) (MLB) (MLB) (M)

1340
122 1340
1320 1320
1300 1300
1280 1280
(M) (MLB) (M)
1260 1260 1260 1260
1240 1240
121
1240 1240
1220 1220 1220

122 1220
1200 1200 222
ROAD
1200 1200
ROAD
ROAD
1180 1180 1180 1180
1160 1160 1160 1160
1140
221 1140
222 1140
1140 1140
222 222
1130 1130
NALA
1120 1120 1120 221 1120 1120
1120
1100 1100
1110
1100
122
1110
1100
1110
1100 1100
1100 1100
NALA
1090 1090
1080 1080 1080 1080
1080 1080
1070 1070
1060 1060 1060 1060
1060 1060
1050
1040 1040 1040 1040
122
1020 1020 1020 1020
1000 1000
122
221 1000 1000
980 980 980 980

OTHER ML AREA OF THE SAME COMAPNY
960 960 960 960
940 940 940 940
920 920 920

222 222 920
900 121 900 900 900

222
880
221 880 880 880
860 860 860 860
840 840
333
840 840
333 333 333 333 333

820
333 333 820 820 333 820
800 800 800 800

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
1000 1100 1200 1000 1100 1200
HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG A-A' HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG B-B'
(M) (MLB)
(M)
1200 1200
ROAD
1180 1180
1160 1160
1150 (M) (MLB)
(M)
1140
1140 1140
NALA
1140 1140
333
1130 1130
NALA
1120 1120 1120 1120

1120 1120
NALA
1110 1110 1110 1120 1120

1110 1100
NALA
1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1000

NALA
1100 1100 1100 1100

1090
NALA
1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090
NALA
NALA
1080 1080 1080 1080 1080 1080 1080

122
1080 1080 1080 1080
1070 1070 1070 1070
1060 1060 1060
1060 1060
NALA
1050 1050 1060 1060
1050
NALA
1040
NALA
NALA
1040
NALA
1040 1040
NALA
1040 1040
122 122
NALA
NALA
1020 1020 1020 1020
NALA
1000 1000 1000 1000
333
980 980 980 980
960 960 960 960
940 940 940 331 122 331 940

122 331
331
920 920 920 920
900 900 900 900
880 880 880

331 880
860 333 860 860 860
840 840 840 840
820
333 333 820 820
333 333 820
800 800 800 800

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
1000 1100 1200 1000 1100 1200
HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG C-C' HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG D-D'
(M) (M) (MLB) (M)

(M) (MLB)
1080 1080 1080 1080
1060 1060 1060 1060
1040 1040 1040 1040
1020 1020 1020 1020

NALA
1000 1000
NALA
1000 1000
NALA
980 980 980 980

NALA
960 960
NALA
960 960
NALA
940 940
NALA
940 940
NALA
920 920 920 920
331 331
NALA
900
331 331 900 900 900
880
331 331 331 880
NALA
880 880
331
860 860 860 860
NALA
333 333
840 840
840
333
840
333
820 820 820 820
800 800 800

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
1000 1100 1000 1100
HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG E-E' HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG F-F'
(M) (MLB) (M)
1080 1080
1060 1060
1040 1040
1020 1020
1000 1000
980 980
(M) (MLB) (M)
960 960 940 940
940 940 920 920

NALA
920 920 900 900
900 900 880

331 880
880
331 331 331 880 860 860
860 860 840 840

333
NALA
NALA
840
333
840 820 333 820
NALA
NALA
820 820 800 800
800 333 800 780 780
780 780 760 760
760 760 740 740

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
740 740
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
1000 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG H-H'
HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG G-G'
GEOLOGICAL INDEX
BASIC ROCK 121 RESERVES UNDER 111

PLATE No.-5S(B)
GREY DOLOMITIC LIMESTONE
122 RESERVES UNDER 122 WORKING SECTIONS
PINK LIMESTONE WITH BAGA-BHALAG LIMESTONE & SHALE AREA
PURPLE SHALE PARTING 221 RESERVES UNDER 221
GREY LIMESTONE WITH
YELLOW & BLACK SHALE PARTING
APPLICANT:-
MASSIVE GREY DOLOMITE (UNIT JAYPEE HIMACHAL CEMENT PLANT)
(NON MINRALISED ZONE)
PROPOSED WORKING 2nd YEAR 331 RESERVES UNDER 331 BLOCK: SAMTIYARI BLOCK AREA- 126.7987 Ha
AREA BOUNDARY
SCALE-1:2000 SURVEY DATE:- 10.10.2013 APPLIED AREA-172.7434 Ha
PROPOSED WORKING 3rd YEAR
PROVED RESERVES LIMIT
PROPOSED WORKING 4th YEAR STATUTORY BOUNDARY BARRIER
17E/403, C. H. B., JODHPUR-08 (RAJ.)
PROBABLE RESERVES LIMIT M/s R. K. CONSULTANTS
PROPOSED WORKING 5th YEAR ULTIMATE PIT LIMIT
RQP/UDP/349/2009-B
FIGURE-2.17
YEAR WISE WORKING SECTIONS-SAMTIYARI BLOCK

Chapter-2
2.7 Extent of Mechanization
Mechanized mining operation will be practiced for production of limestone and

shale. There is no overburden or top soil in the proposed mine.
2.7.1 Details of Mining Equipment
The mine will be fully developed using following machines and the same will be
deployed also during the mine operation. The details of mining machinery are
TABLE-2.13
DETAILS OF MINING MACHINERY
Sr. Type Nos. Size / Capacity Make Motive H.P.

No. Power
1 Bull Dozers 02 13.7 cum Komatsu/ Diesel 410
catterpillar
2 Hydraulic Rock 01 Mounted on 18-21 Komatsu Diesel 110
Breaker tonne Class-
hydraulic excavator
3 Explosives Van 01 5 Tonnes Tata Chassis Diesel 110
(common)
4 Jeeps 02 Double axle drive Mahindra Diesel 40
5 Water Sprinkler 02 10 KL Leyland Diesel 110
Chassis
6 Diesel Tanker with 01 5-10 KL Tata Chassis Diesel 110
metered pumping
arrangements
(common)
7 Mobile Maintenance 02 - Mounted on Diesel 110
Van (common) Tata chassis
8 Buses (common) 02 - Tata Chassis Diesel 110
9 Pickup Van 02 - Mahindra Diesel 40
(common)
10 Crawl Mounted DTH 02 165 mm Dia Atlas Copco Comp- -
drills ressed Air
11 Crawl mounted 06 3.5 cum Komatsu Diesel 380
Hydraulic Excavator
12 Off highway Rear 21 35 tones Volvo Diesel 400
Dumper
13 Rock Breaker 01 Mounted on 18-21 Komatsu Diesel 200
attachment tone chassis
Source: Mine plan
2.7.2 Drilling and Blasting
The Limestone & Shale rock being hard category requires drilling and blasting for
excavation. To maintain a bench height of 10 m, drilling by 150-165 mm dia DTH
drill machine, is recommended as a guide line to start with. Powder factor on an
average is taken 9 tones per kg. of explosive as the same is being average out in
the nearby working mine. However in future effort will be made to improve upon
it. Benches shall be kept sloped at an angle of 150 from the vertical (i.e. 750
from the horizontal). Same angle of slope shall be maintained for drill blast holes
also. With 10 m high benches, sloped at an angle of 150 to vertical, the bench

Chapter-2
slope height shall be 10.3 m and with sub–grade drilling of 1.0 m. the depth of
shot holes to be drilled shall be 11.3 m.
Various type of explosives such as ANFO, slurry, emulsion etc. will be used for
blasting. Since ANFO is cheaper and economical, it will be used as much as
possible except in rainy season. Delay detonators or NONEL detonating fuse will
be used since multi row system of firing will be carried out to as to reduce the
ground vibration, noise, fly rock etc. due to blasting. In order to avoid fly rocks
and other blasting hazards the secondary blasting is not recommended. However
for secondary breakage of oversized boulders hydraulic rock breaker shall be
utilized.
Only one time blasting shall be practiced in a day in Baga–Bhalag limestone and
shale area. Total no. of holes to be drilled is envisaged 35-40 in 2-3 no. of rows
for fragmentation of limestone and shale per day.
Blasting parameters for minerals as well as waste having 10 m average height

are given in Table-2.14.
TABLE-2.14
BLASTING PARAMETERS
Sr.No Limestone Bench

Item
(10 m Height)
1 Bench height (m) 10
2 Hole depth (m)
11
(including sub-grade drilling)
3 Burden (m) 3.5 to 4
4 Spacing (m) 4 to 4.5
5 Volume (m3) 3.5x4.0x10= 140
6 Tonnage yield (t) 140x2.5=350
7 Powder Factor 9t/kg of explosive
8 Charge per hole (kg) 350/9 = 38.88
9 Total quantity of rock to be
12120
Broken per day (tonnes)
10 Explosive required for blasting in each
72720/9=8080 kg
week (6 days)
11 No. of holes to be drilled for
Blasting in each week (6 days avg.) 72720/350 = 207 holes/week
blasting
Source: Mine Plan
It is recommended to carry out detailed ground vibration studies to study the

effect of deep hole blasting operation to suggest the measures to mitigate the
adverse effect, if any and to carry out safe and smooth blasting operation.
The explosive charge per hole shall, there, be 39 kg with about 25% (20% to
30%) of the charge being booster charge and the balance 75% (80% to 70%)
consisting of column charge (ANFO is proposed).

Chapter-2
The pattern of initiation adopted affects the standard of fragmentation, muck

profile after blast, ground vibration caused, noise generated, fly rock, air blast
etc. At this mine, square/ rectangular / staggered grid, multi row pattern or
extended V pattern shall be adopted and later on based on experience gained the
pattern to be adopted in future shall be standardized. Long/short (ms) delays
shall be used. This will help in reduction of ground vibration, back break, fly-rock,
air blast etc.
The charge per delay shall be kept around 39 kg to start with. This shall be
modified in due course, based on experience gained and after conducting
scientific studies for determining.
Peak particle velocity and other related parameters to keep ground vibrations, air
blast, fly rock etc. within optimum limits.
The maximum number of holes to be blasted in a round shall be kept at 35-40.

This shall however depend on the length of face that can be made available and
modified in future depending on result of scientific studies to be done as referred
above. Each round shall yield about 14000 tonnes of mineral.
Considering the nature of strata / deposit and height of the benches, no decking
shall be resorted to. The booster charge shall be kept at the bottom of the hole
followed by column charge. However, in future, decking may be adopted if
considered necessary to improve powder factor, blasting efficiency and reduce
vibrations/ fly-rock.
b. Type of Explosives to be used
Presently we are using explosive of the following type:
 Nitrate mixture (Slurry explosive) –cl. II div. 0;

 Emual boost, cl-II div. 0;
 Amm. Nitrate Fuel Oil (ANFO); and
 NONEL/ Long delay.
The most common type of explosives available in India and used in opencast
mines is.:
 Nitrate Mixtures – Slurry Explosives (Class 2) based on Ammonium Nitrate;

and
 Ammonium Nitrate Fuel Oil (ANFO) mixture (Field mixed).
Being cheapest and hence cost effective and economical, besides being safe to
handle and store, and non-cap sensitive, ANFO is most popular. For this purpose,
free flowing granulated (prilled) ammonium nitrate is mixed intimately with about
6% by weight of Diesel Oil No. 2 (Flash point not less than 380 C) Keeping in
view the quantity of AN to be mixed with FO mechanical mixing and loading
arrangements at nearby working mines of the same company shall be used. Such
arrangements shall in addition give a more homogeneous mixture of AN with FO.

Chapter-2
The most modern and ecofriendly blasting technology i.e. NONEL shall be used.
ANFO however, is hygroscopic and cannot be used in watery holes. In such cases,
the shot holes should be dewatered or alternatively ANFO will be used duly
packed in plastic tube bags. Such ANFO filled plastic tube bags can be lowered in
the holes in conjunction with additional weight such as sand etc. (due to low
density of ANFO as compared to water, it may otherwise result in the bags
floating in the holes).
c. Secondary Blasting
No secondary blasting is envisaged as the use of rock breaker is proposed.
d. Storage of Explosives (Capacity and Type of Magazine)
The explosive magazine of adjoining ML area of the same company shall be used
for the proposed working in the area.
The company already has established two Explosive Magazines of capacity 9

tonnes each. Jaiprakash Associates Limited has already entered into a contract on
renewal basis with CIMFR (Central Institute of Mining and Fuel Research,
Dhanbad) for day to day monitoring of blasting operations.
Precautionary measure shall be adopted during the blasting of rock mass are :-
 Controlled and Scientific blasting;

 Blasting shall be carried out by competent person;
 Blasting shall be done by latest and eco friendly technique i.e. NONEL;
 Blasting shall be done in presence of CIMFR representative; and
 Vibration of each blast shall be monitored on day to day basis.
2.7.3 Loading & Transport
The blasted mass is loaded by 6 hydraulic excavator each of 3.5 cum bucket
capacity and it is proposed to transport limestone from the faces to the proposed
crusher by 35 Tonnes Class (31750 kg payload capacity) off-highway rear
dumpers.
2.8 Mine Drainage
The area exhibits a typically rugged undulating topography. The proposed mining
area forms a plateau in some parts with the flanks dipping steeply forming
practically vertical scarps.
The drainage of the area is influenced by the perennial Satluj river, which has a
meandering flow from the SE to NW approximately 3.5 km away from the applied
area. There are has a number of several seasonal nalas are seen within. All the
nalas recharge during the rainy season and ultimately merge with the Satluj river.

Chapter-2
2.8.1 Depth of Water Table
No wells or water bodies exists in and around the area except a small size
seasonal water pit. Seepage of rainwater along the bedding planes and joints give
rise to nala. These nalas dry up over a period of time after monsoon to be
recharged only with a fresh spell of rainwater from these nala flows down along
the nala to river Satluj. None of springs is seen within the area of applied for
mining lease. A few tube wells exist alongside the road near village Baga. Water
in these tube wells has been encountered at the depth of nearly 50 m below the
surface. The surface level at these points is nearly 1100 m above MSL.
The mining operations shall commence from an elevation of 1620 m above MSL in
Baga block and from 1360 m above MSL in Samtiyari block. The ultimate pit limit
at depth for the mining operations at present is envisaged at 1050 m above MSL,
which is well above the existing water table in the area. Thus, the water table is
not likely to be encountered in the course of mining operations. Hence, no
adverse impact on the water table is envisaged while mining during the ensuing
mine plan period and at the abandonment of mine.
The sub-surface/ ground water shall not be encountered in the present and
conceptual mine plan period because the workings would always remain above
the ground. There is no mine water discharge from the said area as there is no
use of water for the purpose of washing etc. of mining machines at site. The
maintenance of mining machinery shall be carried out at plant site work shop.
There is no spring/ or perennial nallah within the area. The nallah adjoining the
mining area is seasonal one. However, regular monitoring of ground water source
in the vicinity shall be done and seasonal monitoring reports shall regularly be
submitted to the CGWB, Dharamshala.
The only water to be encountered in the course of mining operations is the

rainwater. The rainwater would flow down the slope of the hills and also along the
natural streams. Thus, no water is likely to accumulate in the course of mining
operations hence no pumping arrangements are envisaged.
2.9 Stacking of Mineral Rejects and Disposal of Waste
The limestone is out cropping so no topsoil exists over the limestone also no
overburden so there will not be any soil and waste to be generated.
2.10 Use of Mineral
The mineral “Limestone” excavated from this applied area is suitable for
manufacture of quality clinker/ cement and shall be used solely for captive
consumption only i.e. for manufacture of clinker/ cement at the upcoming cement
plant proposed by JHCP in the near vicinity at almost 0.50 km distance from
crusher establishment. The mineral shall not be sold to any other party. There is
no proposal to export limestone produced from this mine.

Chapter-2
2.10.1 Mineral Preparation and Dispatch
The blasted mass is loaded by 6 hydraulic excavators each of 3.5 cum bucket
capacity will be transported from mine to crusher and covered and pipe conveyor
belt from crusher to cement plant, which is located only 0.5 km away and in
between the mine & the plant.
2.10.2 Mineral Beneficiation
The mineral “Limestone” proposed to be raised from this applied area, belongs
Shali formations and is high in CaO and low in MgO and is quite suitable for
manufacture of quality clinker/cement. The quality of ROM limestone did not
cause any problem in this regard. Some corrective material (e.g. shale, clay, iron
ore, bauxite, laterite etc.) shall be required to depress CaO contents and reaching
a perfect raw mix.
No up-gradation/ beneficiation of limestone is required other than crushing and

sizing which are normal functions carried out at crushing plants attached to
cement plant is envisaged adjacent to the extraction area.
The capacity of proposed limestone crusher will be approx. 900 TPH which is
proposed in existing mine lease area of the company. The feeding of
limestone/shale boulder will be 1m*1m*0.8 m and output size be 60-80 mm and
anticipated that this will meet the requirement of raw mill. The crusher will be
common for the both cement units i.e. existing cement unit and upcoming second
unit in the vicinity.
2.11 Conceptual Plan
No pit shall be formed below the ground level on conceptual mine plan period
only relief shall be changed to make it flat ground and high plateau in the Baga
and Samtiyari mining blocks. Hence, there is no proposal for backfilling of mined
out area except reclamation and rehabilitation of abandoned mining benches.
JHCP planned to spread some part of the scree material on the abandoned mining
benches. Planting trees shall then rehabilitate the reclaimed benches. The entire
area shall be in the form of a vast flat plain. No pit shall be developed on
abandonment. The plain so formed shall be developed into grassland or for
community development. No abandoned quarries/ pit proposed to be used as a
reservoir in this mining plan period. Conceptual Plan of Baga, Samtiyari and
Balang blocks are given in Figure-2.18 to Figure-2.20 and sections of Baga and
Samtiyari blocks are given in Figure-2.21 to Figure-2.22. The proposal for land
to be effected during conceptual period is given in Table-2.15. The proposal for
conceptual plan is given in Table-2.16.

Chapter-2
TABLE-2.15
PROPOSAL FOR LAND TO BE AFFECTED DURING CONCEPTUAL PERIOD
Proposal for Mine Plan Period

Sr.No Activities Area (ha)
1 Area to be disturbed for excavation and allied activities 17.166
2 Area to reclaimed Nil
3 Area to be rehabilitated by greenbelt 2.50
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-2.16
PROPOSAL FOR CONCEPTUAL PERIOD
Proposal for Conceptual Plan Period

Sr.No Activities Area (ha)
1 Area to be excavated 109
2 Storage for topsoil Nil
3 Overburden dump Nil
4 Mineral storage Nil
5 Infrastructure (mine office etc) Nil
6 Roads including haul roads 5
7 Railways Nil
8 Greenbelt 20
9 Tailing pond Nil
Source: Mine Plan

Chapter-2
R.F. - 1 : 2000
0 20 40 60 80 100 150 200 250 500 M
BM(RL.1632.990Mtr.)
N14400 4
LAT. - N 31°19'19.47"
LONG. - E 76°53'20.42" SAMTIYARI BLOCK INDEX
25
TO
16
BE
AREA BOUNDARY
RI
SA
TL
BAGA
UJ
1610
RI
BHALAG
VE
STATUTORY BARRIER
R
KHARSI BLOCK
BAGA
TO
BIL
AS
BLOCK CONTOUR (INTERVAL OF 5 M & 25M)
PU
MAGNETIC MERIDIAN
00
R
16 DARLA MORE
INDEX
(Dt. 10.10.2013) N14100 LOCAL GRID
APPLIED BOUNDARY
ROAD
TO RIVER
SH
IM
KEY PLAN HOUSE
N14300 DARLAGHAT LA
82
75 25
15 16
LAT. - N 31°18'14.48" 1520
LONG. - E 76°53'20.81" SURVEY STATION
50
1583
BM
BENCH MARK
LAT. - N 31°19'12.15"
LONG. - E 76°54'17.58" CLIFF
WATER PIPE
5
N14200 50
15 1540 25 ELECTRIC LINE
16 0
0
16 FOOT- PATH
75
15 SEASONAL DRAIN
75
LAT. - N 31°19'10.69"
15 83 BOUNDARY PILLAR
LONG. - E 76°53'22.70" 1540
WORKED OUT AREA
E12500
LA
84 LO T.
00
NG - RAINWATER STORAGE
.- N3
16
85 E 1°1
N14100
76 9'
°53 8.1
'36 4"
.02 PROP. WORKING - 1st YR.
"
LAT. - N 31°19'09.38" 86
LONG. - E 76°53'25.13" PROP. WORKING - 2nd YR.
87
1500
E12600
PROP. WORKING - 3rd YR.
PROPO. WORKING - 4th YR.

00
16 88 50
89 15 PROP. WORKING - 5th YR.
LAT. - N 31°19'07.40"
LONG. - E 76°53'29.94" PROP. PLANTATION 1st TO 5th
N14000
PROP. PLANTATION TILL MINE LIFE
00
E12700
16 LA
LO T.
125 NG -
.- N3
76 9'
PLAN IS CORRECT TO THE BEST OF °53 05
'33 .27"
OUR KNOWLEDGE 91 .37
90 00
"
16 123
100
E12800
LAT. - N 31°19'04.51"
119
RQP/UDP/349/2009-B N13900
101
PLATE No.- 7 (A)
CONCEPTUAL PLAN 1035
2 115
16
112
APPLICANT:-
104 LAT. - N 31°18'59.66"
(UNIT JAYPEE HIMACHAL CEMENT PLANT) LAT. - N 31°19'0.74" LONG. - E 76°53'41.36"
LONG. - E 76°53'36.23"
E12900

E13000
LAT. - N 31°18'59.37" 106

LONG. - E 76°53'39.23"
17E/403, C. H. B., JODHPUR-08 (RAJ.)
FIGURE-2.18
CONCEPTUAL PLAN OF BAGA BLOCK

Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.19
CONCEPTUAL PLAN OF SAMTIYARI BLOCK

Chapter-2
INDEX
N16000
AREA BOUNDARY
POWER LINE MAGNETIC MERIDIAN

(Dt. 10.10.2013)
N15900
CONTOUR LINE KANDAR
NALA SAMTIYARI BLOCK

LA
TO
LO T.
BE
RI
SA
NG -
TL
BAGA
U
J
.- N3
RI
BHALAG
VE
R
E 1°2 KHARSI BLOCK
HOUSES 76 0'0
°54 .5 N15800 TO
BI
BAGA
BLOCK
'33 0"
LA
SP
UR
.89
" INDEX
DARLA MORE
APPLIED BOUNDARY
ROAD
FOOTPATH
TO RIVER
SH
IM
DARLAGHAT LA KEY PLAN
PWD ROAD
N15700
BM BENCH MARK 360 359
(RL.1227.381m) LAT. - N 31°19'59.98"

LONG. - E 76°54'39.628"
37
358
N14100 LOCAL GRID
36
357
N15600
SURVEY STATION
35
34
356
CLIFF
33
32
20 BOUNDARY PILLAR 31
354 N15500
30 LAT. - N 31°19'53.02"
LONG. - E 76°54'31.27"
353
WORKED OUT AREA 29
28 352
PROP. PLANTATION TILL MINE LIFE LAT. - N 31°19'50.45"

LONG. - E 76°54'40.29"
27
N15400
351
26
ULTIMATE PIT LIMIT
25
24
23 N15300
22
350
N15200
LAT. - N 31°19'44.72"
LONG. - E 76°54'41.50"
21
N15100
276
273
272 285
291 280
297 PLAN IS CORRECT TO THE BEST OF
309
OUR KNOWLEDGE
LA 299
271
LO T. 300 312
NG - 314
.- N3 20
E 1°1 N15000
76 9'3 270
°54 8 318
'11 .67" (RAKESH PUROHIT) (S.K. SONI)
.77 254 M/s R. K. CONSULTANTS
"
ST-1 RQP/UDP/349/2009-B
269
BM 349
251 253
LAT. - N 31°19'36.20"
255
LONG. - E 76°54'41.97"
252 265
321
264 N14900
259
E13800
LAT. - N 31°19'35.71"
LONG. - E 76°54'12.08" 323
327
261 262
330
337
328
LAT. - N 31°19'33.49"
PLATE No.-7 (C)
E13900
LONG. - E 76°54'15.10"
CONCEPTUAL PLAN
341 N14800
342 BAGA-BHALAG LIMESTONE & SHALE AREA
E14000
343
339 APPLICANT:-
(UNIT JAYPEE HIMACHAL CEMENT PLANT)
E14100
344
340 345 BLOCK: BHALAG BLOCK AREA-36.8243 Ha
LAT. - N 31°19'29.49"
E14200
LONG. - E 76°54'26.37" SCALE-1:2000 SURVEY DATE:- 10.10.2013 APPLIED AREA-172.7434 Ha

346
N14700
R.F. - 1 : 2000
E14700
E14300
347
E14400
E14500
E14600
17E/403, C. H. B., JODHPUR-08 (RAJ.)

0 20 40 60 80 100 150 200 250 500 M LAT. - N 31°19'27.63" 348 LAT. - N 31°19'26.96"
LONG. - E 76°54'33.33" LONG. - E 76°54'43.45"
FIGURE-2.20
CONCEPTUAL PLAN OF BHALAG BLOCK

(M) (M) (M) (M) (M) (M)
1640 1640 1640 1640 1640 1640
(1624.0)
(D-30M) (M) (M)
1620 1620 1620 1620 1620 1620 1620 1620
DTH-29
(M) (M) (1599.0)
(D-30M)
1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad

DTH-26 DTH-32
1580 1580 1580 1580 1580 1580 1580 (1570.0) 1580 1580 1580
(D-30M)
1560 1560 1560 1560 1560 1560 1560 1560 1560 1560
1540 1540 1540 1540 1540 1540 1540 1540 1540 1540
1520 1520 1520 1520 1520 1520 1520 1520 1520 1520
1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
1480 1480 1480 1480 1480 1480 1480 1480 1480 1480
1460 1460 1460 1460 1460 1460 1460 1460 1460 1460
1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440 1440
1420 1420 1420 1420 1420 1420 1420 1420 1420 1420
1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400
HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M)
HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG A-A' HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG B-B' HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG C-C' HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (M) CROSS SECTION ALONG D-D' CROSS SECTION ALONG E-E'
INDEX
AREA BOUNDARY
FIGURE-2.21
ULTIMATE PIT LIMIT
PROJECTED BOREHOLE
DRILLED WITH DEPTH
PLATE No.-7S (A)
CONCEPTUAL SECTIONS
WORKED OUT AREA
IT IS CERTIFIED THAT THIS BAGA-BHALAG LIMESTONE & SHALE AREA
OUR KNOWLEDGE
R.F. - 1 : 2000 PROPOSED PLANTATION APPLICANT:-
(UNIT JAYPEE HIMACHAL CEMENT PLANT)
PROP. RAINWATER STORAGE BLOCK: BAGA BLOCK AREA-9.1204 Ha
0 20 40 60 80 100 150 200 250 500 M
SCALE-1:2000 SURVEY DATE:- 10.10.2013 APPLIED AREA-172.7434 Ha
17E/403, C. H. B., JODHPUR-08 (RAJ.)
CONCEPTUAL SECTION OF BAGA BLOCK

RQP/UDP/349/2009-B

Chapter-2
C2-57
Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.22
CONCEPTUAL SECTION OF SAMTIYARI BLOCK

Chapter-2
2.12 Progressive Mine Closure Plan

The progressive mine closure plan for Baga, Samtiyari and Bhalag blocks was
prepared and got approved by IBM, under which simultaneous reclamation
measures of the land disturbed due to mining and allied activities are proposed.
During plan period total ML area of 172.7434 ha, out of the ML area of 19.0 ha will
be utilized by the end of first five years of Progressive Mine Closure Plan.
No temporary discontinuance and abandonment is anticipated during the
progressive mine closure period. Therefore, no protective and rehabilitation
measures are proposed during this period. But during this period of PMCP a certain
amount shall be spend for protection of environment that is plantation, topsoil etc
management & other environment aspects including monitoring of air, water,
noise quality etc. The abandonment cost estimated during the plan period is given
in Table-2.17 and progressive mine closure plan of Baga and Samtiyari Blocks are
given in Figure-2.23 and Figure-2.24.
TABLE-2.17 (A)
ABANDONMENT COST ESTIMATED DURING FIRST YEAR
Items Details Proposed Remarks
Area ha Quality Expenditure
Rs.
1 2 3 4 5 6
(a). Reclamation & i). Back Filling - - - -
Rehabilitation of ii). Afforestation on the back filled area - - - -
mined out iii). Others (please specify eg. - - - -
land/area Afforestation on exhausted benches)
iv). Pisciculture - - - -
v). Converting into water reservoir - - - -
vi). Picnic spot - - - -
(b). Stabilisation & i). Terracing - - - -
Rehabilitation of ii). Pitching - - - -
dumps (within iii). Construction of parapet - - - -
lease) walls/Retaining wall at toe of dumps
iv). Construction of check dams along - - - -
slope of vallies
v). Construction of settling ponds - - - -
(Garland drains etc)
vi). Desiliting of settling ponds, channels - - - -
vii). Afforestation on dumps - - - -
viii). Others (please specify) - - - -
(c). Rehabilitation i). Afforestation (green belt building) 0.50 500 nos 75,000/- 500
of Barren area sampling
within lease ii). Others (Care & Maint) 500 nos 75,000/- 500
sampling
iii). Wire fence - - - -
(d). Environmental i). Ambient Air Quality - - 1,50,000/- -
Monitoring (Core &
Buffer zone ii). Water Quality - - 80,000/- -
separately) iii). Noise Level Survey - - 10,000/- -
iv). Ground Vibration - - 1,50,000 -
v). Others (gully plugs, stone masonry - - 10,00,000/- -
Gabion Structures, check dams,
retaining walls)
Total 0.50 1000 15,40,000/- -
Source: Mine Plan

Chapter-2
TABLE-2.17 (B)
ABANDONMENT COST ESTIMATED DURING SECOND YEAR
Rs.
1 2 3 4 5 6
slope of vallies
vi). Desilting of settling ponds, channels - - - -
sampling
Monitoring (Core &
retaining walls)
Total 0.50 1000 15,40,000/- -
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-2.17 (C)
ABANDONMENT COST ESTIMATED DURING THIRD YEAR
Rs.
1 2 3 4 5 6

Chapter-2

Rs.
slope of vallies
sampling
Monitoring (Core &
retaining walls)
Total 0.50 1000 15,40,000/- -
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-2.17 (D)
ABANDONMENT COST ESTIMATED DURING FOURTH YEAR
Rs.
1 2 3 4 5 6
slope of vallies
sampling
Monitoring (Core &
Chapter-2

Rs.
retaining walls)
Total 0.50 1000 15,40,000/- -
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-2.17 (E)
ABANDONMENT COST ESTIMATED DURING FIFTH YEAR
Rs.
1 2 3 4 5 6
slope of vallies
sampling
Monitoring (Core &
retaining walls)
Total 0.50 1000 15,40,000/- -
Source: Mine Plan

Chapter-2
R.F. - 1 : 2000
0 20 40 60 80 100 150 200 250 500 M
BM(RL.1632.990Mtr.)
N14400 4
LAT. - N 31°19'19.47" SH
IF
TE SAMTIYARI BLOCK
INDEX
LONG. - E 76°53'20.42" D
W
25
AT
TO
16
ER
LI AREA BOUNDARY
BE
N
RI
E
SA
TL
BAGA
UJ
STATUTORY BARRIER
RI
BHALAG
VE
R
KHARSI BLOCK
BAGA
TO
BI
LA
BLOCK CONTOUR (INTERVAL OF 5 M & 25M)
MAGNETIC MERIDIAN
SP
UR
00
16 DARLA MORE
INDEX
(Dt. 10.10.2013) N14100 LOCAL GRID
APPLIED BOUNDARY
ROAD
TO RIVER
SH
IM
KEY PLAN
HOUSE
N14300 DARLAGHAT LA
82
BORE HOLE (BY STATE GOVT.)
75 25
15 16
LAT. - N 31°18'14.48" BGRS-02
BORE HOLE (BY JAYPEE)
LONG. - E 76°53'20.81"
50
1st Y
LAT. - N 31°19'12.15"
LONG. - E 76°54'17.58"
SURVEY STATION
R.
BM
BENCH MARK
5
N14200
50
15 25
16 0
CLIFF
0
16 WATER PIPE
75
15 ELECTRIC LINE
75
15
LAT. - N 31°19'10.69" FOOT- PATH
LONG. - E 76°53'22.70"
WATER TANK
E12500
LA SEASONAL DRAIN
84 GCP-1 LO T.
00
NG -
.- N3 BOUNDARY PILLAR
83
16
85 E 1°1
76 9'
N14100 °53 8.1
'36 4"
.02 GOVT. LAND
SEASONAL WATER PIT "
LAT. - N 31°19'09.38" 86
LONG. - E 76°53'25.13" 2n
d PRIVATE LAND
87 YR GCP-2
.
E12600
GCP-1 GROUND CONTROL POINT
0 PROPOSED HAULAGE - 1st YEAR

1 60
88 50
89 15
LAT. - N 31°19'07.40" PROPOSED WORKING 2nd YEAR
LONG. - E 76°53'29.94"
GCP-1 (WATER TANK ) TO PILLAR No. 87
3rd YR.
N14000 PROPOSED WORKING 3rd YEAR

BEARING 178°, DISTANCE 61 Mts
GCP-2 (WEST SIDE OF WATER PIT) TO PILLAR No. 87

E12700
BEARING 268°, DISTANCE 84 Mts LA PROPOSED WORKING 4th YEAR

LO T.
125 NG -
3rd YR.
.- N3
E 1°1 PROPOSED WORKING 5th YEAR
IT IS CERTIFIED THAT THIS 76 9'
PLAN IS CORRECT TO THE BEST OF °53 05
4t '33 .27"
OUR KNOWLEDGE 91 h .37
90 00 YR " YEARWISE PROPOSED PLANTATION
16 . 123
100
PROP. CHECK DAM
E12800
LAT. - N 31°19'04.51"
4t 119
M/s R. K. CONSULTANTS h
RQP/UDP/349/2009-B N13900 YR
101 .
5t
PLATE No.-8 (A) h
YR
PROGRESSIVE MINE CLOSURE PLAN 1035 .
16
2 115
5t 112
h
APPLICANT:-
YR
M/s JAIPRAKASH ASSOCIATES LTD. .
104 LAT. - N 31°18'59.66"
(UNIT JAYPEE HIMACHAL CEMENT PLANT) LAT. - N 31°19'0.74" LONG. - E 76°53'41.36"
LONG. - E 76°53'36.23"
E12900

E13000
LAT. - N 31°18'59.37" 106

LONG. - E 76°53'39.23"
17E/403, C. H. B., JODHPUR-08 (RAJ.)
FIGURE-2.23
PROGRESSIVE MINE CLOSURE PLAN OF BAGA BLOCK

Chapter-2
FIGURE-2.24
PROGRESSIVE MINE CLOSURE PLAN OF SAMTIYARI BLOCK

Chapter-2
2.13 Resource Requirement
2.13.1 Power Requirement
Power requirement for mining operations which includes operation of lime stone
crusher, closed and pipe conveyor belt and maintenance of mining machinery.
Power requirement will be 100-150 KV met from State Electricity Board. In
accordance with the statutory requirements, the mine haul roads, excavation
faces, crusher and other working sites will be illuminated.
2.13.2 Fuel Requirement
Drilling and mining operations, 5 KLD of diesel is expected to be used to operate

the drills, shovels, dumpers and other transport vehicles in mine lease to
transport the lime stone, over burden, sprinkling of water and other mining
operation and no additional requirement of fuel is envisaged. Fuel requirement is
TABLE-2.18
FUEL REQUIREMENT
Sr. Fuel Daily Consumption Calorific Value % Ash % Sulphur

No. (Kcals/kg)
1 HSD 5 KLPD 10.8 to 11 0.01 0.22
Source: Mine Plan
2.13.3 Water Requirement
The water requirement for the mine machinery operations, dust suppression and
afforestation shall be 150 m3/day. The source of water shall be from existing
allocation of 3500 m3/day of water from Treda & Padiyar nalla near the
confluence with Satluj river that flows at a distance of about 2.5 km from the ML
area. Water allocation letter from IPH Division, Arki is given in Annexure-IX. The
break-up of water requirement for different units in the proposed mine project is
ABLE-2.19
WATER REQUIREMENT FOR ML AREA
Sr. No Particulars Quantity (m3/day)

1 Domestic for prinking purpose 05
2 Dust Suppression 100
3 Mine Operations (wet drilling) 02
4 Greenbelt Development 20
5 Misc. & utilities 19
6 Mechanical workshop 04
Total 150
Source: Mine Plan

Chapter-2
2.13.4 Site Services
The area under reference have a captive source of supply of the chief raw
material, limestone to the upcoming plant for manufacture of clinker/cement and
thus be an integral part of the cement plant. Considering very rugged terrain and
the distance between the applied area and the plant 0.50 km, most of the
services and facilities are already provided in the nearby mining area. The site
services provide in the nearby mining area shall be utilized for the applied mining
lease area is given below:
Within nearby ML Area
 First Aid Station

 Rest Shelter
 ANFO Shed
 Drinking Water Room
 Lavatories/Urinals
 Fire Fighting Equipment
 Phones/Communication
 VT Centre
 Explosive Van
Common with the Plant (under Plant Control)
 Mine Administration Building

 Time Office
 General Store
 Canteen
 Quality Control Office, Laboratory, Horticulturist Office
 Transport
 Fire Fighting Station
 Power Supply
 Water Supply
 Communication
 Hospital/Health Center
 Welfare Centre/Library/Club/Staff Colony
 Bank and Post Office
 Nursery
 Security
2.14 Sources of Pollution
Virtually, all surface mining methods for any ore/mineral produce some
irreversible impacts. These produce dramatic changes in the landscape due to
large-scale excavation. The environmental pollution due to the opencast mining,
in general, could be broadly classified into the following categories:
 Air pollution;
 Hydrogeological conditions;
 Water resources and quality;

Chapter-2
 Top soil preservation and utilization;

 Overburden dump and stacking
 Noise levels and vibration;
 Land reclamation and rehabilitation; and
 Afforestation program.
2.14.1 Air Pollution
Mining operations contribute towards air pollution in two ways: addition of

gaseous pollutants to the atmosphere and the dust particles. The gaseous
pollutants include NOx, SO2 and CO. The sources of pollutants from the mining
activity include:
 Operation of Heavy Earth Moving Machinery (HEMM) which mostly run on

diesel;
 Loading /unloading Operations;
 Transportation of ore in dumpers; and
 Ripping, Drilling, Blasting and Crushing Operations.
The above points can be classified as follows:
 Point Source/Single Source
These are stationary sources, which emit air pollutants into the atmosphere from
a certain fixed point. In the proposed mine the following sources or activities form
the point sources, which emit Particulate Matter (PM). The following are the point
sources in mining process which are provided in Table-2.20.
TABLE-2.20
POINT SOURCES IN MINING OPERATIONS
Source Process Machine

Drilling Mining process DTH drilling machine
Loading Mining process Shovel
Unloading Unloading or limestone, topsoil and Dumper
Overburden
Crushing Ore Processing Crusher
 Line Sources
These are normally mobile sources, which emit atmospheric pollutants in the area
through which they pass. The following are the sources of air pollution falling
under this category.
 Transportation
The limestone from the mine will transported to the limestone crusher.
Transportation of ore and other materials is done by using dumpers, belt
conveyors etc. Transportation also includes movement of other vehicles in the
mine lease area. The heavy traffic on the haul roads is likely to contribute

Chapter-2
towards increase in dust concentration in the area. However, this is more of a

localized phenomenon within the mining areas that have limited human exposure.
 Ripping and Dozing
This activity is carried out with help of the dozers.
 Area Sources/Multiple Sources
These constitute pollution from various sources and activities situated in the mine
lease area. The total mine area with all its mining activities constitute the area
source. These include all the mining operation activities and equipment, which
contribute to atmospheric pollution from the various units/activities.
 Instantaneous Sources
The instantaneous sources consist of air pollution due to sudden/instantaneous

activities like blasting in the mine area.
Blasting process involves dislodgement of big blocks of rocks/ore from the mines.
This operation generates maximum dust, which results in the increase of PM
concentration. It also contributes to emissions of certain gases (Oxides of
Nitrogen and Ammonia) due to the use of explosives like ANFO.
The size of the dust particles emitted into the atmosphere play a major role in
deciding the distance to which they may be transported. Particles of larger size
fall fairly rapidly and closer to their source, because of gravitational settling.
However, the aerosols because of their small size may be held in suspension for
years in the atmosphere and may be transported on a global scale. Eventually,
these smaller particles are collected in raindrops and fall on earth. The
composition of these particles largely depends on the composition of the ore
being processed.
2.14.2 Topsoil Preservation and Utilization
As the lime stone is out crop, top soil generation will be very minimum or
negligible. The top soil so generated will be used for green belt development at
the periphery of the ML area.
2.14.3 Waste Water Generation
No, water will be generated as a result of mining activities. The machinery will be
maintained and washed in plant workshop so no generation of waste water is
envisaged from the ML area.
2.14.4 Solid Waste Generation
No overburden is generated; a very small quantity of top soil will be generated

will be used for green belt development and construction of haulage roads.

Chapter-2
2.14.5 Noise Levels and Vibration
 Noise Levels
The mining activity uses heavy earth moving equipment. The noise levels of the
major equipment are in the range of 88 to 90 dB (A). The likely noise levels of
the equipment are presented in Table-2.21.
TABLE-2.21
LIKELY NOISE LEVELS OF THE MAJOR MINING EQUIPMENT
Machines Expected Noise Levels dB(A)

Dumpers 87.5
Hydraulic Excavator 88.0
DTH Drills 89.0
Dozer 89.0
Rock Breaker 89.0
Noise levels of the mining equipment will be in the range between 87.5-89.0 dB
(A). The workers at work zone operating the mining machines will be provided
with earmuffs.
 Ground Vibration
Ground vibration, fly rock, air blast, noise, dust and fumes are the deleterious
effects of blasting on environment. The explosive energy sets up a seismic wave
in the ground, which can cause significant damage to structures and disturbance
to human occupants. It causes major damages to the pit configuration too.
By adopting well designed blasting, the above said problems will be greatly
minimized at the mine. The impact will be minimized by choosing proper
detonating system and optimizing total charge and charge/delay. Regular
monitoring of magnitude of ground vibrations and air blast by “Minimate” will be
carried out.
2.14.6 Land Reclamation

Reclamation and rehabilitation work will be taken up along with mining. Plantation
scheme will be taken up systematically with soil binding grasses and shrubs and
followed by trees plantation at magazine section, below the mines road (slopes),
along the mines road, mines office premises, crusher and adjoining areas.

Chapter-3
Baseline Environmental Status
3.0 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS
3.1 Introduction
This chapter illustrates the description of the existing environmental status of the
study area with reference to the prominent environmental attributes. The study
area covers 10 km radius from the mine lease boundary of three mine blocks.
The existing environmental setting is considered to adjudge the baseline
environmental conditions, which are described with respect to climate,
hydrogeological aspects, atmospheric conditions, water quality, soil quality,
ecology, land use and socio-economic profiles of people. The baseline studies are
carried out for three months, representing post monsoon and part of winter
seasons-2015 in the various domains of environment.
EIA notification requires that 10 km radius area surrounding the project site shall
be covered under the study and the same is denoted as study area. As part of the
study, description of biological environment and human environment such as
environmental settings, demography & socio-economics, land-use/land cover,
ecology & biodiversity have been carried out for entire 10 km radius. However, as
a universally accepted methodology of EIA studies, physical environmental
attributes such as ambient air quality, water quality, soil quality, noise levels,
physiography, hydrology, ecology, solid waste generation have been studied at
selective locations representing various land uses such as industrial,
rural/residential, commercial and sensitive locations including the densely
populated areas, agricultural lands, forest lands and other ecologically sensitive
areas, if any falling within 10 km radius study area.
This report incorporates the baseline data monitored for three months (1st
October 2015 to 31st December 2015) representing post monsoon and part of
winter season and secondary data collected from various Government and Semi-
Government organizations. The methodology for sampling and analysis has been
detailed in Annexure-X.
3.2 Geology and Hydrogeology
3.2.1 Physiography of the Solan and Bilaspur Districts
 Solan District
Solan district presents an intricate mosaic of high mountain ranges, hills and
valleyswith altitude ranging from 300 to 3000 m above msl. The altitude of the
hill ranges is higher in northern parts, whereas south-western part of the district
is represented by low denuded hill ranges of Siwalik. In the areas underlain by
high hill ranges of Himalayas, the valleys are narrow and deep with steep slopes
trending in NW-SE direction. The terrain is moderate to highly dissected with
steep slopes.

Chapter-3
 Bilaspur District
Bilaspur district is located on Siwalik ranges and forms part of the lesser
Himalayas. It has a diverse landscape of hills, valleys with piedmont zone. There
are seven main hill ranges i.e. Naina Devi, Kot, jhanjiar, Tiun, Bandla, Bahaurpur
and Ratanpur constituting the hill system. The elevation of the lowest point is
about 290 m amsl and of the highest peak i.e. Bhadurpur hill is 1980 m amsl.
 Physiography of the Project Site
the Baga block is seen in and around the applied area. The mountain that hosts
the limestone deposit gains its elevation from the banks of river Satluj that
meanders between inter mountainous valleys and the recorded elevation at river
Satluj is 610 mRL.
The highest elevation in the applied area is 1645 mRL (in central NE part of Baga
block) and lowest is 675 mRL (in NW part of Samtiyari block). As compared to
Baga, the Samtiyari block and Bhalag block is marked by the presence of conical
elongated ‘tongues’ that have greater width at the base as compared to the top
which have less width and are steeper. The Baga block on the other hand occurs
in the form of a single large elongated platform having steep slopes. The area
between (approximate crow fly distance nearly 1268 mts between the closest
extremities of Baga block and Samtiyari block, 2178 mts between the closest
extremities of Baga block and Samtiyari block and 2041 mts between the closest
extremities of Baga block and Samtiyari block) is the area of existing ML area of
the same company of which part is characterized by undulating mountain peaks
that are composed of dolomite.
3.2.2 Drainage of the Solan and Bilaspur Districts
 Solan District
Solan district is drained by streams/rivers forming part of the drainage basins of

the Sutlej, the Yamuna and the Ghaggar rivers. However, major part of the
district is drained by tributaries of Sutlej river viz., Ghambar River and Sirsa nadi.
Ghambar River flows almost from the central part of the district towards north-
east to join the Sutlej River in Gobind Sagar Lake. Another important-tributary of
the Sutlej River is the Sirsa Nadi, flowing towards north-west in the Nalagarh
valley. The Giri River and its tributary, Assan flows towards south in the eastern
part over a small area and are part of Yamuna river basin. Ghaggar River flows
towards south-west and marks the south-eastern boundary of the district. Most
of the rivers/streams/khads maintain base flow for major part of the year. In hilly
terrain, the drainage density is high and fine, but it become coarse in foothills,
kandi areas and valleys. Physiography and Drainage map of the Solan district is
given in Figure-3.2.1.

Chapter-3
The major river that passes through the middle of the district from east to west is
Sutlej. It enters the district near a place known as Kasol in the north-west and
after traversing a course of 90 km, it leaves near Naila and enters the territory of
Punjab in the south-west. The Sutlej is joined by several tributaries from both
sides. The main three tributaries are Ali Khad, Gamrola Khad and Seer Khad. The
length of Ali khad is about 26 km. It arises in Shimla district and after passing
through Bahadurpur Dhar joins the river Sutlej at Bilaspur. Gamrola khad also
arises in Shimla district and after draining the Rattanpur Dhar joins the river
about 5 km downwards from Bilaspur town. Seer Khad which is the third tributary
of Sutlej originates at Wah Devi which is 10 km from Sarkaghat in Mandi district.
After draining Kot-Ki-Dhar and a greater portion of Ghumarwin tehsil, it joins
Sutlej River at village Serimatla which is about 15 kms downwards from Bilaspur
town. Physiography and Drainage map of the Bilaspur district is given in Figure-
3.2.2.
 Drainage Pattern in the Project Site
River Satluj, which flows at a nearest distance of about 1000 mts from the
applied area, controls the drainage of the area and its surroundings. A few
seasonal nala particularly the Bhalag nala (running parallel to the applied
boundary and a small part flows within applied area at 977 mRL to 945 m RL in
Bhalag block and at 811 m RL to 750 mRL in Samtiyari block) and Baga block one
seasonal nala (originating from applied area at 1570 m RL) flows from the higher
reaches of the mountains, drain the areas along their way before finally merging
into river Satluj. Several seasonal nalas of first order and second order flow
within the applied area and present dendritic pattern of drainage in the area
during rainy season.

Chapter-3
ML Area
FIGURE-3.2.1
PHYSIOGRAPHY AND DRAINAGE MAP OF THE SOLAN DISTRICT

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.2.2
PHYSIOGRAPHY AND DRAINAGE MAP OF THE BILASPUR DISTRICT

Chapter-3
3.2.3 Geology of the Solan and Bilaspur districts
 Solan District
Geologically, the rock formations occupying the district range in age from pre-
Cambrian to Quaternary period. The generalized geological succession in the
district is given Table-3.2.1.
TABLE-3.2.1
GENERALIZED GEOLOGICAL SUCCESSION OF THE SOLAN DISTRICT
Era Period Formation Lithology

Quaternary Recent to Pleistocene Alluvium /valley fills/ Sand with pebble and
Older alluvium clay, medium to coarse
grained sand with pebble
of sandstone and lenses
of clay
Tertiary Pliocene – Siwalik Sand stone,
M-Miocene Group conglometate, clay,
gravel beds, shale,
mudstone
L-Miocene - Oligocene Subathu Sand stone, shale.,
nodular clay, L.St.
Proterozoic Upper-III Krols Sandstone, red &

Carbo.shale., slate,
greywacke, , dolomitic
limestone.
Lower-III Simla / Jaunsar Siltstone, greywacke,
sandstone, quartzite,
conglomerate, Shale,
slate, phyllite, dolomite
and meta-volcanics
Proterozoic-II Shali/ Cherty dolomite,
Sundernagar quartzite, limestone,
shale, slate, phylitised/
sporadic shale, meta-
volcanics etc.,
Un- Juthog Group Shale, phyllite, schist,
differentiated staurolite quartzite,
dolomite, Limestone, and
amphibolite.
Source: CGWB Report-2013 of the Soaln District
Geologically, the rock formations occupying the district range in age from pre-
Cambrian to Quaternary period. The generalized geological succession in the
district is given in Table-3.2.2.

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.2.2
GENERALIZED GEOLOGICAL SUCCESSION OF THE BILASPUR DISTRICT
EON ERA Period Group Description

Formation
Quaternary Alluvium; fluvial, Sand, silt, clay, gravel,
terrace, piedmont pebble and cobble etc.
(Recent to
sub-Recent)
Undifferentiated Sand, clay, gravel,
pebble,
cobble and boulders
Upper Siwalik Soft sandstone,
brownish
clay, shale, poorly
sorted
Tertiary and crudely bedded
Phanerozoic Cenozoic conglomerate. Boulder
(Pliocene to Mid. beds.
Miocene) Middle Siwalik Grey sandstone, and
brownish clay/ shale
Lower Siwalik Red and purple
sandstone
and shale
Subathu Group Grey sandstone, shale,
Clay
Kasauli Formation Greenish to grayish
Oligocene- hard
Lower Miocene sandstones
Daghshai Formation Dark-red and purple
coloured shale
Subathu Formation Dark nodular clays
Proterozoic Upper Krol Formation Greyish massive
Proterozoic III dolomites
Proterozoic II and Limestone
Cherty Dolomite,
Shali Formation Quartzite
and Lime stone
Source: CGWB Report-2013 of the Bilaspur District
3.2.4 Geology of the Project Site
In the area the rocks comprising of quartzite, shales, dolomite and limestone of
Shali Formation which were traced by the earlier workers from Slapper in
southward to Alsindi along the right bank of River Satluj. This forms the main
northern Digitation of Shali and joints the open end of west shali window (1939).
The southern Degitation of the Shali is referred as Tattapani Digitation, which
terminates at Tattapani. These two Digitation meet in the Betwara area from
where it form a single unit and it referred to as Mandi-Sundergarh belt by Singh
and Srikantia.
The Shali belt is bounded to the west by Mandi-Sundernagar thrust, with the
Shalis over riding the Lower Tertiary and to the north and north-east by a thrust
along which the crystalline and metamorphics have over ridden the Shalis.

Chapter-3
There is another belt which extend from Bhind Tibba in the north to Khadli on
south is referred as Shali Subsidiary Belt, resting over the Tertiaries. The geology
details of proposed project are already presented in section-2.4 of Chapter-2.
3.2.5 Hydrogeology of the Solan and Bilaspur Districts
 Solan District
Hydro-geologically, the unconsolidated valley fill or alluvial formation occurring in

the valley area, semi-consolidated formations belonging to Siwalik Group and
older consolidated hard rocks forms the aquifer in the district. Intergarnular
pore spaces in the sedimentary formations and secondary fissured porosity in
hard rocks, topographical set up coupled with precipitation in the form of rain and
snow, mainly govern the occurrence and movement of ground water. Porous
alluvial formation occurring in the valley area, forms the most prolific aquifer
system, where as the sedimentary semi-consolidated formations and hard rocks,
form aquifer of low yield prospect.
Major parts of the district are hilly and mountainous with highly dissected and
undulating terrain. These areas are underlain by semi-consolidated and
consolidated hard rocks of Tertiary and Proterozoic age. Ground water potential in
such areas is very low, due to its hydro-geomorphic set up. Springs are the main
ground water structures that provide water for domestic and irrigation in major
rural and urban centers.
Springs in the district are mainly gravity, contact or fracture type and springs
located along major thrust/faults or structurally weak planes are high yielding.
The springs are locally called as Chasma and the discharge varies from seepages
to as high as nine litres per second. Bowries, a type of dug well, are another
structure constructed on the hill slopes to tap the seepages. Such Bowries are
very common and found all over the district. Recently, state department have
drilled shallow bore wells fitted with hand-pumps to provide domestic water. The
hand pumps have an average depth of 50-60m with low discharges upto 1 lps.
In valley area of Nalagarh, the ground water occurs in porous unconsolidated

alluvial formation (valley fills), comprising of sand, silt, gravel, cobbles/pebbles
etc. Ground water occurs under phreatic and confined conditions. Wells and
tube wells are the main ground water abstraction structures. Ground water is
being developed in the area by medium to deep tube wells, dug wells, dug-cum
bored wells. Depth of open dug wells and dug-cum bored well in the area ranges
from 4.00 to 60.00 m bgl, wherein depth to water level varies from near ground
surface to more than 35 m bgl. Yield of shallow aquifer is moderate, with well
discharges upto 10 lps.
Deeper semi-confined aquifers are being developed by tube wells, ranging in

depth from 65 to 120 m, tapping 25-35 m granular zones. The well discharges
vary from about 10 to 30 lps. Out of the 16 exploratory wells, CGWB has
drilled/constructed 14 exploratory wells in the valley area, in the depth range of
65.00 to 300.00 m bgl. Static water level ranges from 2.2 to 43.20 mbgl,
discharge ranges from 1.44 to 1968 lpm, for a draw-down of 2.48 to 24.10 m.

Chapter-3
 Depth to Water Levels
As per the CGWB Report-September 2013 of the District. In Nalagarh valley area,
there are 12-hydrograph network stations, where depth to water level is
monitored four times a year, during pre-monsoon period. Depth to water table
shows wide variation. During pre-monsoon period (May 2012), it ranged between
5.01 and 28.76 m bgl, while during the post-monsoon period (November 2012),
depth to water level ranged from 3.02 to 27.57 m bgl. Deeper water levels are
observed mainly in northwestern part and along the foothills. In major parts of
the valley, the depth to water level is less than 15.00 m bgl.
Hydrogeologically, both the unconsolidated valley fill and alluvial formation are
occurring in the valley area and semi-consolidated sediments belonging to Siwalik
Group form aquifer system in the district. Porous alluvial formation forms the
most prolific aquifer system in the valley area where as the sedimentary semi-
consolidated formation forms the aquifer of low yield prospect.
The ground water in the Siwalik group of rocks occur under unconfined to semi
confined conditions mainly in the arenaceous rocks viz., sandstone, siltstone,
gravel & boulder beds etc. The occurrence and movement of ground water is
controlled by inter-granular pore spaces and also the secondary fracture porosity.
Siwalik sediments underlying hilly/undulating areas where springs (mostly
gravity/contact type) and bowries are the main ground water structures apart
from the hand pumps. The discharges of the springs, varies from seepages to
0.50 lps. Bowries are dug well type structures constructed on the hill slopes for
tapping the seepages. In the low lying areas underlain by Siwalik rocks, dug wells
and hand pumps are the main ground water structures that range in depth from
3.00 to 25.00 m bgl, where in depth to water level ranges from 2.50 to 15.00 m
bgl. In upland/plateau areas the water level is generally deep. In Beet area,
water level more than 60 m below land surface is observed.
In valley areas, the ground water occurs in porous unconsolidated/alluvial

formations (valley fills) comprising sand, silt, gravel, cobbles / pebbles etc., and
forms prolific aquifers. Ground water occurs both under phreatic and confined
artesian conditions. Water logging areas are observed in northern part of Jukhola
valley. Ground water is being extensively developed in the area by medium tube
wells and dug wells, and also by hand pumps. Depth of dug wells ranges from
4.00 to 15.00 m bgl whereas depth to water level ranges from near surface to 6
m bgl in pre monsoon. Yield of shallow aquifer is moderate with well discharges
up to 10 lps.
 Depth to Water Levels
As per the CGWB Report-2013 of the District. CGWB has drilled 6 exploratory
wells in the district in the depth range of 31.8 to 115 m bgl. Static water level
ranges from 3.35 to 36.55 m bgl and discharge ranges from 7.7 to 20.75 lps
with a drawdown of 2.6 m to 11.11 m.

Chapter-3
 Depth to Water Levels of the Project Site
As per the mining plan. No wells or water bodies exists in and around the area
except a small size seasonal water pit. Seepage of rainwater along the bedding
plans and joints give rise to nala. These nalas dry up over a period of time after
monsoon to be recharged only with a fresh spell of rainwater from these nala
flows down along the nala to rive Satluj. None of springs is seen within the area
of applied for mining lease. A few tube wells exist alongside the road near village
Baga. Water in these tube wells has been encountered at the depth of nearly 50
m below the surface. The surface level at these points is nearly 1100 m amsl.
3.2.6 Ground Water Resources of the Solan and Bilaspur Districts
 Solan District
Rainfall is the major source of recharge to the groundwater body, apart from the
influent seepage from the rivers, irrigated fields and inflow from upland areas.
The discharge from ground water, mainly takes place from wells and tube wells;
effluent seepages of ground water in the form of springs and base flow in
streams. Ground water resources and irrigation potential for Nalagarh valley area
of the district, have been computed as per the GEC-97 methodology and the
resources for the year 2011 are presented below.
1. Area of Nalagarh valley considered for GW Assessment (ha) 23,849
2. Net Annual Ground Water Availability (ha) 8,331.6
3. Annual Ground Water Draft (ha) 4,332.31
4. Stage of Ground Water Development (%) 52
The stage of ground water development is 52%, as on March 2011 in Nalagarh

valley area and falls under “safe category”. This suggests, that further ground
water development can take place.
As per the CGWB Report-2013 of the District. The district has hilly terrain having
very high slopes. The valley areas are narrow and isolated. The areas therefore
not considered for estimation of the ground water resources being discontinuous
aquifers.
Hydrogeology map of the Solan and Bilaspur districts are shown in Figure-3.2.3
and Figure-3.2.4. The study area falls under Zone-II which comes under least
to moderately seismic category as per IS-1893 (Part-I) 2002. The map indicating
flood prone zones in India is shown in Figure-3.2.5.

Chapter-3
ML Area
FIGURE-3.2.3
HYDROGEOLOGY MAP OF THE SOLAN DISTRICT
Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.2.4
HYDROGEOLOGY MAP OF THE BILASPUR DISTRICT

Chapter-3
Project
Site
FIGURE-3.2.5
FLOOD ZONE MAPPING

Chapter-3
3.3 Land Use Studies
Studies on land use aspects of eco-system play important roles for identifying
sensitive issues, if any, and taking appropriate actions for maintaining the
ecological balance in the development of the region.
3.3.1 Objectives
The objectives of land use studies are:

 To determine the present land use pattern;
 To analyze the impacts on land use due to plant activities in the study area;
and
 To give recommendations for optimizing the future land use pattern vis-a-vis
growth of plant activities in the study area and its associated impacts.
3.3.2 Methodology
For the study of land use, literature review of various secondary sources such as
District Census Handbooks, regional maps regarding topography, zoning
settlement, industry, forest etc., were taken. The data was collected from various
sources like District Census Handbook, Revenue records, state and central
government offices and Survey of India (SOI) Topo-sheets and also through
primary field surveys.
3.3.3 Land use Based on Secondary Data
Based on the census report, 10 km radial distance around this mine lease
boundary has been considered in the study. These areas were studied in detail to
get the idea of land use pattern in the study area. The land use census data 2011
is presented in Table-3.3.1. The village wise land use data is presented in
Annexure-XI.
TABLE-3.3.1
LAND USE PATTERN IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr. No Particulars of Land use (in Hectares) 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0-10 km (%)
1 Forest Area 1242.41 5257.40 5623.08 12122.89 30.74
2 Land under Cultivation
a) Irrigation Land 222.51 916.51 462.12 1601.14 4.06
b) Un Irrigated Land 767.83 2310.78 3184.06 6262.67 15.88
c) Land Under Miscellaneous Tree Crops
etc. Area 4.00 74.23 195.13 273.36 0.69
3 Area not Available for Cultivation
a)Area under Non-Agricultural Uses 430.05 1175.23 1240.80 2846.08 7.22
b)Barren & Un-cultivable Land Area 9.97 196.28 668.26 874.51 2.22
c)Permanent Pastures and Other Grazing
Land Area 2581.60 4636.66 5173.38 12391.64 31.40
Fallows Land other than Current Fallows
4 Area 189.37 49.06 199.48 437.91 1.11
5 Current Fallows Area 43.44 235.43 260.38 539.25 1.37
6 Culturable Waste Land Area 408.90 723.21 961.34 2093.45 5.31
Total Geographical Area 5900.08 15574.79 17968.03 39442.90 100.00
Source: Census of India–2011
Chapter-3
 Forest
The revenue forest land under the study area consists 12122.89 ha (30.74%) of
the total geographic area.
 Land under Cultivation
Altogether 8137.17 ha cultivable land (irrigated, un-irrigated and Land Under

miscellaneous tree crops etc.) was observed in the study area. The irrigated land
admeasures to about 1601.14 ha in the study area which works out to be 4.06%
of total study area. The un-irrigated land admeasures about 6262.67 ha and
works out to about 15.88% of the total study area. Land under miscellaneous
tree crops area admeasures to about 273.36 ha and works out 0.69% of the
total study area.
 Land not available for Cultivation
The land not available for cultivation is 40.85% of the total study area, which
includes area of land with scrub, land without scrub, Permanent Pastures, quarry,
mining area, rocky/ stony and barren area.
 Fallow Land other than Current Fallow Land
This includes all land which was taken up for cultivation but is temporarily out of
Cultivation for a period of not less than one year and not more than five years.
The fallows land is 1.11% in the study area.
 Current Fallow Land
This represents cropped area which is kept fallow during the current year. The
current fallows land is 1.37% in the total study area.
 Cultivable Waste
This land includes that land, which was cultivated sometime back and left vacant
during the past 5 years in succession. Such lands may either be fallows or
covered with shrubs, which are not put to any use. Lands under thatching grass,
bamboo bushes, other grooves useful for fuel etc., and all grazing lands and
village common lands are also included in this category. The study area
comprises about 5.31 % cultivable wastelands.

Chapter-3
3.4 Soil Characteristics
It is essential to determine the potentiality of soil in the area and to identify the
impacts of urbanization on soil quality. Accordingly, the soil quality assessment
has been carried out.
3.4.1 Data Generation
The sampling locations have been identified with the following objectives:
 To determine the baseline soil characteristics of the study area;

 To determine the impact of proposed expansion project on soil characteristics;
and
 To determine the impact on soils more importantly from agricultural
productivity point of view.
For studying soil characteristics of the region, soil sampling locations were
selected to assess the existing soil conditions in and around the project area
representing various land use types. The physical, chemical and heavy metal
concentrations were determined. The samples were collected using ramming a
core cutter into the soil up to a depth of 90 cm.
The present study on the soil profile establishes the baseline characteristics.
Thirteen soil samples were collected from the study area. At each location, soil
samples were collected from three different depths viz. 30 cm, 60 cm and 90 cm
below the surface and homogenized. The homogenized samples were analyzed for
physical and chemical characteristics.
The details of the soil sampling locations are given in Table-3.4.1 and shown in
Figure-3.4.1.
TABLE-3.4.1
DETAILS OF SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Code No. Location Distance (km) Direction

S1 Samtyari ML Block - -
S2 Existing ML area 0.3 N
S3 Bhalag ML block - -
S4 Baga ML block - -
S5 Cement Plant 0.8 W
S6 Changar village 2.9 W
S7 Kasol village 3.3 NW
S8 Padyar village 0.5 NNW
S9 Kandar village 0.9 ENE
S10 Beri village 2.8 E
S11 Siarli village 2.7 SE
S12 Sulang town 6.7 S
S13 Janed village 4.4 SW

Chapter-3
76° 50' 76° 55' 77° 00'
10 KM
SANCTUARY
Dugal Ba Kharni
Khanahal ha
ira
ri Kh
Bhatehr Barpat ad
Ropri Sia Mangal
Dharli
31° Talwand
Dhar 31°
25' Badi 25'
Chhabiawan Kathla
8
P.F
-8

H
Gaihar P.F
N
Gagal Dhara Lalag

Panjgain
Buryans Dal
P.F Ropa
Kudi
Kalsua
Balag
Kian Rawa Majhali
Ghagas Chouri
Deoli Dhar
S7 Sanihan Ujra P.F
Kasol Keri
Jartu Pata
SA
Bagra
Sangan Bohi
TL
Magrot Halogda
P.F S8 Padyar Kufthu
U
Aina Bajarial P.F
J
Juras Samal
RI
Daudi Badnu Bandli
Kol Huwani
VE
Suin Pati
S1 Ban Kuphar Ku
R
Nyu Balog Samtiari ft
Hawoni Karyad Marora Ghamru hu
Chanalag Torti S9 P.
Kutal
Panali Barech
Badsour
S2 Chida P.F
31° Ghawrai 31°
Changar 20'
20' Sandauli Baga Bhalag Beri
Mungrani S6 S5 S3 Bartha
Dharsi S10 Trohat
Bandla Jabal
P.F Pauri
Gari Mohlar Siarli P.F
Samlehu Thar Sahnali Sabar P.F Baadu
Daret
Dades
S4 Khatrul P.F
Kathpur
Thach Matrech S11 Skor P.F
Bamla Loongari Siarli
Malokhar
P.F
Soldha Bana
Cheran Charahu
Niholog
Ratheh P.F
Sargohri
Barnun Pasaya
Behli S13 Chakoh Chamrol SANCTUARY
Bhanda
Basla IK
HA Panjeli Naugaon
D Chamba
Panjel Matianj Khurd
Ghiyana
Parnu
Sagithi Bag Silha
Panjag Dunglu
Rajghat Sulang
Dagsech Ghanna S12
31° NH- 31°
88 Matianj Kalan
15' 15'
10 KM
Tepra SCALE
Bahadurpur
1 0 1 2 Km
LEGEND 76° 50' 76° 55' Soil Sampling Locations 77° 00'
ML Area-Existing Forest Boundary
Plant Site Wildlife Sanctuary Area
Baga Block Road
Bhalag Block River / Nala
Samtiyari Block Village
FIGURE-3.4.1
SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Chapter-3
3.4.2 Baseline Soil Status
The soil characteristics are shown in Table-3.4.2.The results are compared with
standard soil classification given in Table-3.4.3.
TABLE-3.4.2 (A)
SOIL ANALYSIS RESULTS
Sr. No. Parameters UOM S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6

1 pH (1:5 soil water extract) --- 8.44 8.50 8.52 8.56 8.14 7.69
2 Electrical Conductivity µS/cm 106.9 100.6 121.9 117.1 130.5 74.9
(1:5 soil water extract)
3 Texture --- Sandy Sandy Sandy Silty Silty Clay Sandy
Clay Clay Clay Clay Clay
4 Sand % 51 53 52 22 26 49
5 Silt % 26 28 26 24 19 29
6 Clay % 23 19 22 54 55 22
7 Bulk Density g/cc 1.01 1.03 0.98 1.22 1.18 1.06
8 Exchangeable Calcium as Ca mg/kg 3965 3657 2958 4997 4065 986.7
9 Exchangeable Magnesium as Mg mg/kg 300.8 299.8 418.8 60.4 842.2 119.8
10 Exchangeable Sodium as Na mg/kg 15 13.7 13.7 20.1 25.2 7.63
11 Sodium Absorption Ratio --- 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.09 0.06
12 Available Nitrogen as N kg/ha 40.55 10.15 1.33 8.23 11.03 54.81
13 Available Phosphorus as P kg/ha 131.4 422.9 365.9 286 259.1 97
14 Available Potassium as K kg/ha 140.9 55.9 50.1 171.0 238.2 69.08
15 Organic Matter % 0.41 0.10 0.01 0.07 0.10 0.53
16 Organic Carbon % 0.71 0.18 0.02 0.12 0.17 0.92
17 Water soluble Chlorides as Cl mg/kg 177.2 176.4 176.5 70.9 176.7 177
18 Water soluble Sulphates as SO4 mg/kg 47.53 28.18 18.44 212.7 101.0 459
19 Aluminum % 1.58 1.22 0.2 1.72 0.95 1.42
20 Total Iron % 1.43 0.93 0.2 1.26 2.01 0.92
21 Manganese mg/kg 468.9 178.4 198.8 464.5 1143.6 171.5
22 Boron mg/kg 36.3 30.8 22.4 28 36 44.1
23 Zinc mg/kg 49.6 42.6 18 45.13 106.3 28.8

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.4.2 (B)
SOIL ANALYSIS RESULTS
Sr. No. Parameters UOM S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13

1 pH (1:5 soil water extract) --- 7.62 8.15 8.27 8.26 8.33 7.69 7.41
2 Electrical Conductivity µS/cm 255 178.6 207.0 138.8 193.4 62.7 65.1
(1:5 soil water extract)
3 Texture --- Clay Sandy Sandy Silty Silty Clay Silty
Loam Clay Clay Clay Clay Clay
4 Sand % 20 55 56 54 16 16 21
5 Silt % 56 24 27 28 32 57 21
6 Clay % 24 21 17 18 52 27 58
7 Bulk Density g/cc 0.96 1.08 1.14 1.16 1.18 1.24 0.99
8 Exchangeable Calcium as Ca Mg/kg 3352.4 5181.5 4083.7 3999.3 3070.8 4475.4 2134.6
9 Exchangeable Magnesium as Mg/kg 538.5 114.3 906.6 473.5 601 1003.6 529.8
Mg
10 Exchangeable Sodium as Na Mg/kg 12.4 190 17.5 15.8 11.2 30.0 12.5
11 Sodium Absorption Ratio --- 0.05 0.07 0.06 0.06 0.05 0.11 0.06
12 Available Nitrogen as N Kg/ha 174.07 171.65 214.7 82.41 52.25 195.3 28.1
13 Available Phosphorus as P Kg/ha 226.7 130.9 162.6 30.6 160.8 153.9 202.3
14 Available Potassium as K Kg/ha 285.8 280.2 111.3 126.0 113.6 190.1 90.1
15 Organic Matter % 1.87 1.64 1.94 0.73 0.46 1.63 0.29
16 Organic Carbon % 3.23 2.83 3.35 1.26 0.79 2.80 0.51
17 Water soluble Chlorides as Mg/kg 211.3 139.5 139.4 105.4 70.63 141.0 140.6
Cl
18 Water soluble Sulphates as Mg/kg 136.1 245.4 471.3 18.4 29.26 59,04 77.94
SO4
19 Aluminum % 2.12 3.21 2.0 2.89 6.0 0.72 1.7
20 Total Iron % 2.52 3.27 2.63 3.38 1.55 4.97 2.52
21 Manganese Mg/kg 822.5 1106.9 1460 2274.6 796.5 1036.5 522.6
22 Boron Mg/kg 39 44.8 30.8 40.7 30.74 39.05 28.1
23 Zinc Mg/kg 108.4 86.7 80.7 63.2 47.5 113.7 71.0
3.4.2.1 Observations
 It has been observed that the pH of the soil in the study area varied from
7.41 to 8.56. The maximum pH value of 8.56 was observed at S4 where as
the minimum value of 7.41 was observed at S13.
 The electrical conductivity was observed to range from 62.7 µmhos/cm to 255
µmhos/cm with the maximum observed at S7 with the minimum observed in
S12.
 The nitrogen value varies from 1.33-214.7 kg/ha. The nitrogen content in the
study area falls in very less to better category.
 The phosphorus values varies from 30.6 to 422.9 kg/ha, indicating that the
phosphorus content in the study area falls in medium to more than sufficient
category.
 The potassium values varies from 50.1 to 285.8 kg/ha. The potassium content
in the study area falls in less to average category.
 The organic carbon value varies from 0.02 % to 0.18 %. The organic carbon
content in the study area falls in very less category.

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.4.3
STANDARD SOIL CLASSIFICATION
Sr. No. Soil Test Classification

1 pH <4.5 Extremely acidic
4.51- 5.50 Very strongly acidic
5.51-6.00 Moderately acidic
6.01-6.50 Slightly acidic
6.51-7.30 Neutral
7.31-7.80 Slightly alkaline
7.81-8.50 Moderately alkaline
8.51-9.00 Strongly alkaline
>9.00 Very strongly alkaline
2 Salinity Electrical Conductivity Upto 1.00 Average
(ppm) 1.01-2.00 harmful to germination
(1 ppm =640 mho/cm) 2.01-3.00 Harmful to crops
(sensitive to salts)
3 Organic Carbon Upto 0.20: Very less
0.21-0.40: Less
0.41-0.50: Medium,
0.51-0.80: On an avg. sufficient
0.81-1.00: Sufficient
>1.00 : More than sufficient
4 Nitrogen (Kg/ha) Up to 50 Very less
51-100 Less
101-150 Good
151-300 Better
>300 Sufficient
5 Phosphorus (Kg/ha) Upto 15 Very less
16-30 Less
31-50 Medium,
51-65 On an avg. sufficient
66-80 Sufficient
>80 More than sufficient
6 Potash (Kg/ha) 0 -120 Very less
120-180 Less
181-240 Medium
241-300 Average
301-360 Better
>360 More than sufficient
Source: Hand Book of Agriculture, ICAR, New Delhi
3.5 Meteorology
The meteorological data recorded during the monitoring period is very useful for
proper interpretation of the baseline information as well as for input prediction
models for air quality dispersion. Historical data on meteorological parameters
will also play an important role in identifying the general meteorological regime of
the region.

Chapter-3
The year may broadly be divided into four seasons:
 Winter season : December to February

 Pre-monsoon season : March to May
 Monsoon season : June to September
 Post-monsoon season : October to November
On-site monitoring was undertaken for various meteorological variables in order

to generate the site-specific data. Data was collected at site every hour
continuously from 1st October 2015 to 31st December 2015. The generated data
then compared with the meteorological data generated by nearest India
Meteorological Department (IMD) station located at Sundarnagar. The available
meteorological data of IMD, Sundarnagar station has been collected and
analyzed.
3.5.1 Methodology
Site specific data covering micro-meteorological parameters were recorded on

hourly basis during the study period and comprises of parameters like wind
speed, wind direction (from 0 to 360 degrees), temperature, relative humidity,
atmospheric pressure, rainfall and cloud cover. The minimum, maximum and
average values for all the parameters except wind speed and direction are
presented in Table-3.5.1.
TABLE-3.5.1
SUMMARY OF THE METEOROLOGICAL DATA GENERATED AT SITE
Month Temperature Relative Rainfall Atmospheric

(0C) Humidity (mm) Pressure (mb)
(%)
Min Max Min Max Min Max
October, 2015 18.1 27.3 51 69 9.2 836.3 840.5
November, 2015 13.1 24.7 45 56 5.3 831.7 835.9
December, 2015 9.5 21.4 36 49 0 827.4 831.6
Range 9.5 – 27.3 36 - 69 14.5 827.4 – 840.5
 Wind Speed/ Directions
The windrose for the study period representing post monsoon and part of winter
season is shown in Figure-3.5.1 and presented in Table-3.5.2.
TABLE-3.5.2
SUMMARY OF WIND PATTERN AT THE STUDY AREA
Season Post Monsoon Season 2015
First Predominant Wind Direction SW (11.8%)
Second Predominant Wind Direction S (4.5%)
Calm conditions (%) 62.3%
Note: Figures in parenthesis indicates percentage of time wind blows

Chapter-3
 Post-Monsoon Season, 2015

Predominant winds from SW direction were observed for 11.8% of the total time.
In the S direction winds were observed for 4.5% of the total time. Whereas in W
direction the winds were observed for 3.7% of the total time. In other directions,
the percentage frequencies observed were SE (2.5%), NW (2.4%), NE (1.6%), E
(1.5%), ESE (1.4%), ENE (1.3%), WNW (1.2%), NNW (1.2%), N (1.1%), SSW
(1.1%), SSE (0.9%), WSW (0.7%), NNE (0.8%), and calm conditions prevailed
for 62.3% of the time.
3.5.2 Secondary Data collected from IMD-Sundarnagar
Secondary data from IMD-Sundarnagar has been collected for pressure,

temperature, relative humidity, rainfall, evaporation, wind speed and direction.
The data at IMD is usually measured twice a day viz., at 0830 and 1730 hr.
3.5.2.1 Meteorological Data
The meteorological data is collected from the IMD-Sundarnagar, which is the

nearest IMD station to the project site. The data collected from IMD includes wind
speed, wind direction (recorded in sixteen directions), temperature, relative
humidity, atmospheric pressure; rainfall and cloud cover over a period of 10
years. The monthly maximum, minimum and average values are collected for all
the parameters except wind speed and direction. The collected data is tabulated
in Table-3.5.3.
TABLE-3.5.3
CLIMATOLOGICAL DATA-STATION: IMD, SUNDARNAGAR
Month Atmospheric Temperature Relative Rainfall (mm)
Pressure (mb) (0C) Humidity (%)
0830 1730 Min Max 0830 1730
January 876.1 874.3 3.0 17.3 57 73 56.3
February 879.6 876.2 5.0 18.9 55 71 81.5
March 883.4 879.4 8.9 23.5 51 68 88.6
April 887.2 884.6 12.6 28.5 53 72 45.8
May 885.3 881.5 16.9 33.2 48 65 79.1
June 883.4 879.1 20.0 34.3 56 74 197.9
July 881.9 878.7 21.7 30.7 59 76 404.9
August 884.7 883.6 21.5 29.8 64 81 333.9
September 883.5 879.1 18.6 30.2 67 85 132.4
October 881.6 876.7 11.3 28.4 63 77 34.3
November 878.4 876.4 6.3 23.8 59 72 20.7
December 876.2 873.3 3.6 18.9 55 68 22.4
Range 876.1-884.6 3.0-34.3 48-85 1497.8
3.5.2.2 Wind Speed/Direction
Generally, light to moderate winds prevail throughout the year. Winds were light
and moderate particularly during the morning hours. While during the afternoon
hours the winds were stronger. The wind roses for the study period representing
winter, pre-monsoon, monsoon and post-monsoon seasons along with annual
windrose are shown in Figure-3.5.2 to Figure-3.5.6 and presented in Table-
3.5.4.

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.5.4
SUMMARY OF WIND PATTERN – IMD SUNDARNAGAR
Season First predominant Second predominant winds % Calm

winds Condition
0830 1730 0830 1730 0830 1730
Pre-Monsoon NW (2.8) NW (16.6) SE (2.3) SW (14.7) 90.5 46.1
Monsoon NW (2.3) SW (20.6) SE (1.3) NW (8.2) 92.5 55.0
Post Monsoon SE (0.5) SW (18.5) SW (0.5) S (3.5) 98.5 71.0
Winter SE (1.7) SW (17.6) SW (0.6) S (5.0) 96.7 68.7
Annual NW (1.5) SW (17.7) E (1.4) NW (7.3) 93.5 60.1
Note: Figures in parenthesis indicates % of time wind blows from direction
3.5.3 Comparison of Primary and Secondary Data
The India Meteorological Department (IMD) records the data at two times a day
viz. 0830 hr and 1730 hr while the site specific data has been recorded at an hourly
interval. On comparison of site specific data generated for study period vis-à-vis
the IMD data, slight variations were observed. The following observations are
brought out:
 The temperature was recorded on site when compared vis-à-vis the IMD data,
slight variations was found. The minimum and maximum temperatures
recorded at site during study period were 9.5oC and 27.3oC, whereas the
minimum and maximum values recorded at IMD-Sundarnagar during the same
period are 3.6oC and 28.4oC respectively;
 The relative humidity was observed to range from 36%–69% during the study
period at the site, whereas according to IMD- Sundarnagar the Relative
Humidity was observed to be in the range of 55%–77% during the same
season; and
 The wind pattern of the study area is broadly in comparison with the IMD data.
The data generated at project site when compared with the data recorded at IMD,
it is observed that the data generated at the site is broadly in comparison with
regional meteorology, except minor variations as described above.

Chapter-3
NN
.8%
N 1.1%
W1
N
E0
6%
W
.2% 1.
2.
NN
4%
WN E
W1 N %
.2% E 1.3
EN
W 3.7% C-62.3% E 1.5%
% ES
W 0.7 E1
.4%
WS
SS
.1%
SE
E0
2.
W1
5%
.9%
SS
S 4.5%
%
1.8
1
SW
SCALE 5%
SPEED CALM
1.0 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr
FIGURE-3.5.1
SITE SPECIFIC POST MONSOON SEASON WINDROSE (2015)

Chapter-3
0.0
.0%
N 0.0%
2.
%
8%
0%
E0
1.
NN
N
0.0
NN
E
W
% .0%
W
N
WN E0
W EN
0.3% W C-90.5% E 1.7%
W ES
WS E0
.0%
.0 % W
0 S
0.4% S
SS
W
SE
0%
SS
1. E0
2.
3%
%
.0%
0.0
08-30hrs
PRE MONSOON
16
.6
%
N
W
N 2.7%
0.0
.0%
4%
%
3.
E0
NN
E
0.0 N
NN
W
% .0%
WN E0
W E N
7.3% W C-46.1% E 2.0%
W E SE
WS 0.0
%
%
0.7
W
SS
SE
SS
E0
3.1% S
3.
%
4%
.0%
0.0
SW
.7
% 17-30hrs
4
1 PRE MONSOON
SCALE 5%
SPEED CALM
1 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr
FIGURE-3.5.2
PRE-MONSOON SEASONS -IMD SUNDARNAGAR

Chapter-3
0.0
.0%
N 0.3%
%
2.
%
E0
3%
.0
NN
0.0 1
NN
N
E
W
% .0%
W
WN N
W N E0
E
0.5% W C-92.5% E 1.0%
ES
W E0
WS .3%
%
0.0 SW
0.0% S
SE 0.0%
W
SS
8% SS
1.
E
0.
3%
%
0.0
MONSOON
08-30hrs
8.
2%
0.0
.0%
N 0.8%
N
%
W
%
.5
E0
.
NN
0.0 1
NN
E
W
% .% N
WN
W E 0.0
EN
7.1% W C-55.0% E 1.3%
W ES
E0
WS .0%
0 %
0.
W
SS
SE
SS
E0
2.7% S
2.
8%
%
.0%
0.0
MONSOON
17-30hrs
SW
6%
2 0.
SCALE 5%
SPEED CALM
1 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr
FIGURE-3.5.3
MONSOON SEASONS -IMD SUNDARNAGAR

Chapter-3
0 .0
.0%
N 0.0%
%
0.
%
E0
.0
5%
NN
0.0 0
NN
% E %
N
W
WN N 0.0
W
W E
EN
0.0% W C-98.5% E 0.0%
W ES
E0
WS .0%
0 % W
0.
SS
SE 0.0%
0.0% S
S
W
5% SS
0.
E
0.
5%
%
0.0
POST MONSOON
08-30hrs
0.0
.0%
N 0.0%
3.
%
0%
E0
5%
NN
0.
N
0.0
NN
W
% E %
W
WN N E 0.0
W EN
2.0% W C-71.0% E 0.5%
W ES
WS E0
% .0%
0.0
SE
W
SS
SS
1.
E0
0%
3.5% S
%
.0%
0.0
SW POST MONSOON
5%
17-30hrs
.
18
SCALE 5%
SPEED CALM
1 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr
FIGURE-3.5.4
POST MONSOON SEASONS -IMD SUNDARNAGAR

Chapter-3
.0%
0.0
N 0.0%
%
E0
%
0.
.0
NN
3%
0
NN
0.0 E
% .0%
W
N
N
WN E0
W
W E N
0.0% W C-96.7% E 0.0%
W ES
WS E0
% .0%
0.0 SW
0.3% S
W
SE
SS
6% SS
1.
0.
E0
7%
%
.0%
0.4
WINTER
08-30hrs
.0%
0.0
N 0.0%
%
1.
0%
E0
7%
1.
NN
NN
0.0 E
N
% N .0%
W
W
WN
W N E0
E
2.0% W C-68.7% E 1.0%
W ES
WS E0
.0%
0 %
0.
W
SS
SE
SS
E0
3.
%
0%
5.0% S
.0%
0.0
SW WINTER
% 17-30hrs
7.6
1
SCALE 5%
SPEED CALM
1 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr
FIGURE-3.5.5
WINTER SEASONS -IMD SUNDARNAGAR

Chapter-3
0.0
%
1.
N 0.2%
N E 0.0
%
5%
5%
NN
0.0 N
W
NN
0.
W
% .0%
WN
E
W N E0
E
0.3% W C-93.5% E 1.4%
W ES
WS E0
% S E .2%
0.0 SW
0.2% S
W
1.
SS
3%
SS
8%
E0
0.
.0%
0.1
ANNUAL
08-30hrs
7.
3%
0.0
.0%
N
N 1.0%
W
%
7%
E0
NN
1.
0.0
NN
% .0%
W
E
N
WN E0
W E N
4.6% W C-60.1% E 1.2%
W ES
WS E0
% .0%
0.2 SE
W
SS
2.
SS
6%
E0
3.6% S
%
.0%
0.0
SW
ANNUAL
%
17-30hrs
.7
17
SCALE 5%
SPEED CALM
1 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr
FIGURE-3.5.6
ANNAUL WINDROSES-IMD SUNDARNAGAR

Chapter-3
3.6 Air Quality
The ambient air quality with respect to the study zone of 10 km radius around the
mine lease forms the baseline information. The prime objective of the baseline air
quality study was to assess the existing air quality of the area. This will also be
useful for assessing the conformity to standards of the ambient air quality during
the operation of mine. The study area represents mostly rural/residential
environment.
This section describes the selection of sampling locations, methodology adopted for
sampling, analytical techniques and frequency of sampling. Ambient air quality
monitoring has been carried out during 1st October 2015 to 31st December 2015
representing post-monsoon and partly winter season.
3.6.1 Methodology adopted for Air Quality Survey
Selection of Sampling Locations
The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through a
scientifically designed ambient air quality-monitoring network. The design of
monitoring network in the air quality surveillance program has been based on the
following considerations:
 Meteorological conditions on synoptic scale;

 Topography of the study area;
 Representatives of regional background air quality for obtaining baseline status;
and
 Representatives of likely impact areas.
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) stations were set up at fifteen locations
with due consideration to the above mentioned points during to October-December
2015. Table-3.6.1 gives the details of environmental setting around each
monitoring station. The locations of the selected stations with reference to the mine
area are given in the same table and shown in Figure-3.6.1.
Frequency and Parameters for Sampling
Ambient air quality monitoring was carried out at a frequency of two days per
week for three months (October to December 2015) at each location representing
post-monsoon and partly winter season. Ambient air quality monitoring has been
conducted at 15 locations (4 locations in the ML area) within the study area of 10
km radial distance from the mine lease area is presented in Table-3.6.1. The
baseline data of air environment was monitored for parameters mentioned below
as per revised MoEF notification dated 16th November 2009:
 Particulate Matter (PM10); Particulate Matter (PM2.5);

 Sulphur dioxide (SO2); Nitrogen dioxide (NO2);
 Carbon monoxide (CO); Ozone (O3);
 Lead (Pb); Ammonia (NH3);
 Benzene (C6H6); Benzo (a) pyrene (BaP) in Particulate Phase;
 Arsenic (As); and Nickel (Ni)

Chapter-3
76° 50' 76° 55' 77° 00'
10 KM
SANCTUARY
Dugal Ba Kharni
Khanahal ha
ira
ri K
ha
Bhatehr Ropri
Barpat d Mangal
Sia Dharli
31° Talwand
Dhar 31°
25' Badi 25'
Chhabiawan Kathla
8
P.F
-8

H
Gaihar P.F
N
Gagal Dhara Lalag

Panjgain
Buryans Dal
P.F Ropa AAQ9
Kudi
Kalsua
Balag
Kian AAQ10
Rawa Majhali
Ghagas Chouri
Deoli
AAQ7 Sanihan Ujra P.F
Dhar
Kasol Keri
Jartu Pata
SA
Bagra
Sangan Bohi
TL
Magrot
P.F AAQ8 Padyar Halogda Kufthu
Aina Bajarial P.F U
J
Juras Samal
Kol Huwani
Daudi RI Badnu Bandli
AAQ1
Suin VE Pati
Nyu Balog
Ban
R
Kuphar Ku
Hawoni Samtiari Karyad Marora ft
Ghamru hu
Chanalag Torti P.F AAQ11Suin Marora Cheori
P.
Kutal
Daroba Jajar Kandar P.F Barech Ghamru F
Panali
Badsour
AAQ2 Chida P.F
31° 31°
AAQ6 Ghawrai
20' Sandauli Changar Bhalag Beri 20'
Mungrani Baga AAQ5
Bandla Jabal AAQ3 AAQ12
Bartha
P.F Pauri Dharsi Trohat
Samlehu AAQ4 Sahnali Sabar P.F Baadu
Daret
Dades
Thar Khatrul P.F
Kathpur AAQ13
Thach Matrech Skor P.F
Bamla Loongari Malokhar Siarli
P.F
Soldha Bana
Cheran Charahu
Niholog
Ratheh P.F
Sargohri
Barnun
Pasaya
AAQ15 Chakoh Chamrol SANCTUARY
Bhanda Behli
Basla IK
HA Panjeli Naugaon
D Chamba
Parnu
Sagithi Bag Silha
Panjag Dunglu
Rajghat Sulang
Dagsech Ghanna AAQ14
31° NH- 31°
88 Matianj Kalan
15' 15'
NN
.8%
Daseran Suli Chakru

N 1.1%
Mamau N
W
W
SCALE 2.
E0
6%
1.2
4%
10 KM
1.
NN
%
Tepra WN
1 0 1 2 Km
E
W .3%
N
Gate P.F Shyari Dehti 1.2 E1

% EN
Bahadurpur W 3.7% C-62.3% E 1.5%
% ES
0.7 E1
.4%
W
WS SE
LEGEND 76° 50' 76° 55'
SS
%
2.
1.1
E0
5%
ML Area-Existing Forest Boundary Ambient Air Quality Sampling Locations
%
.9%
W
.8
S 4.5%
11
SS

SW
Baga Block Road SCALE 5%
Bhalag Block River / Nala SPEED CALM

1 5 11 19 >19 Km/hr
FIGURE-3.6.1
AIR QUALITY SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Chapter-3
TABLE-3.6.1
DETAILS OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING
Station Name of the Station Distance (km) Direction Environmental
Code Setting
AAQ1 Samtyari ML Block - - -
AAQ2 Existing ML area 0.3 N -
AAQ3 Bhalag ML block - - -
AAQ4 Baga ML block - - -
AAQ5 Cement Plant 0.8 W -
AAQ6 Changar village 2.9 W Crosswind
AAQ7 Kasol village 3.3 NW Crosswind
AAQ8 Padyar village 0.5 NNW Crosswind
AAQ9 Dal village 4.4 N Downwind
AAQ10 Majhali village 4.9 NE Downwind
AAQ11 Kandar village 0.9 ENE Crosswind
AAQ12 Beri village 2.8 E Crosswind
AAQ13 Siarli village 2.7 SE Crosswind
AAQ14 Sulang town 6.7 S Upwind
AAQ15 Janed village 4.4 SW upwind
 Duration of Sampling
The sampling duration for PM10, PM2.5, SO2 and NOx is twenty four hourly
continuous samples per day and CO and HC are sampled for 8 hours continuously
thrice a day. This is to allow a comparison with the present revised standards
mentioned in the latest Gazette Notification of the Central Pollution Control Board
(CPCB) (November 2009).
3.6.2 Presentation of Primary Data
Various statistical parameters like 98th percentile, average, minimum and

maximum values have been computed from the observed raw data for all the AAQ
monitoring stations. The results of monitoring carried out are presented in
Annexure-XII. The summary of these results representing post-monsoon and
partly winter season are given in Table-3.6.2. These are compared with the
standards prescribed by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) for rural and
residential zone and industrial zone.

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.6.2 (A)
SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY RESULTS (POST-MONSOON 2015)
Station Location/ Village PM10 (µg/m3) PM2.5 (µg/m3) SO2 (µg/m3) NOX (µg/m3)
Code Min Max Avg 98% Min Max Avg 98% Min Max Avg 98% Min Max Avg 98%
AAQ1 Samtyari ML Block 48.9 58.5 52.7 58.2 20.0 24.7 22.5 24.5 11.4 13.9 12.5 13.8 16.0 18.5 17.0 18.5
AAQ2 Existing ML area 53 60.5 57.3 60.0 23.1 25.8 24.3 25.7 12.6 14.8 14.1 14.8 17.8 19.6 18.5 19.6
AAQ3 Bhalag ML block 51.5 57.4 54.3 57.2 21.1 24.3 23.1 24.3 11.8 13.4 12.7 13.4 16.1 17.9 16.8 17.8
AAQ4 Baga ML block 52.4 59.4 56.2 59.3 22.8 25.1 23.9 25.1 10.9 14.2 12.8 14.0 16.3 18.9 17.7 18.8
AAQ5 Cement Plant 50.2 62.3 56.1 61.7 24.1 26.3 25.2 26.3 13.0 15.3 14.4 15.3 16.9 20.3 19.0 20.3
AAQ6 Changar village 41.7 52.9 46.2 52.0 17.4 21.4 19.0 21.1 11.4 13.5 12.4 13.5 14.8 18.2 16.5 18.1
AAQ7 Kasol village 37.4 43.3 40.2 43.1 16.3 19.5 18.3 19.5 11.3 12.9 12.2 12.9 15.1 16.9 15.8 16.8
AAQ8 Padyar village 42.2 53.4 46.7 52.5 17.9 21.9 19.5 21.6 11.9 14.0 12.9 14.0 15.3 18.7 17.0 18.6
AAQ9 Dal village 34.1 40.2 36.3 39.6 16.6 18.3 17.5 18.3 10.4 12.4 11.1 12.3 12.8 15.4 14.0 15.4
AAQ10 Majhali village 36.2 42.1 39.0 41.9 17.5 20.7 19.5 20.7 10.6 12.2 11.5 12.2 14.4 16.2 15.1 16.1
AAQ11 Kandar village 48.1 54.1 50.9 53.6 20.8 23.5 22.0 23.4 11.6 13.8 13.1 13.8 16.8 18.6 17.5 18.6
AAQ12 Beri village 37.7 42.6 40.2 42.5 16.4 19.0 17.9 18.9 11.5 13.0 12.2 13.0 14.8 17.7 16.3 17.6
AAQ13 Siarli village 44.2 48.3 46.2 48.3 18.8 21.2 19.9 21.1 11.6 13.3 12.4 13.2 13.6 15.8 14.6 15.7
AAQ14 Sulang town 33.4 39.5 35.6 38.9 15.9 17.6 16.8 17.6 9.7 11.7 10.4 11.6 12.1 14.7 13.3 14.7
AAQ15 Janed village 32.4 38.5 34.6 37.9 15.2 17.0 16.1 17.0 9.3 11.4 10.1 11.2 11.5 14.1 12.7 14.1
Range 32.4 – 62.3 15.2 – 26.3 9.3 – 15.3 11.5 – 20.3

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.6.2 (B)
Station Location/ Village CO (µg/m3) O3 (µg/m3) NH3 (µg/m3) Pb (µg/m3)
AAQ1 Samtyari ML Block 344 503 407 498 5.5 8.6 6.8 8.5 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
AAQ2 Existing ML area 325 515 427 509 4.4 9.1 7.0 9.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
AAQ3 Bhalag ML block 298 498 368 433 4.3 8.4 6.3 8.3 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
AAQ4 Baga ML block 362 508 430 501 5.8 8.8 7.3 8.6 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
AAQ5 Cement Plant 407 525 455 521 5.2 9.3 7.1 9.1 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
AAQ6 Changar village 275 406 322 379 2.4 6.6 4.3 6.4 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
AAQ7 Kasol village 249 449 319 384 2.4 6.5 4.4 6.4 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
AAQ8 Padyar village 280 411 327 384 2.5 6.7 4.4 6.5 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
AAQ9 Dal village 176 400 285 393 2.4 6.4 4.1 6.1 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
AAQ10 Majhali village 242 442 312 377 2.3 6.4 4.3 6.3 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
AAQ11 Kandar village 313 503 415 497 3.8 7.5 5.7 7.4 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
AAQ12 Beri village 269 437 352 429 2.1 6.3 4.0 6.1 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
AAQ13 Siarli village 243 411 346 411 2.4 5.7 3.8 5.6 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
AAQ14 Sulang town 169 393 278 386 2.2 6.2 3.9 5.9 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
AAQ15 Janed village 165 389 274 380 2.0 6.0 3.9 5.8 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <20.0 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
Range 165 - 525 2.0 – 9.3 <20.0 <0.05
TABLE-3.6.2 (C)
Station Location/ Village Bap (ng/m3) As (ng/m3) Ni (ng/m3) C6H6 (ng/m3)

AAQ1 Samtyari ML Block <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
AAQ2 Existing ML area <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
AAQ3 Bhalag ML block <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
AAQ4 Baga ML block <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
AAQ5 Cement Plant <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
AAQ6 Changar village <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
AAQ7 Kasol village <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
AAQ8 Padyar village <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0

Chapter-3
Station Location/ Village Bap (ng/m3) As (ng/m3) Ni (ng/m3) C6H6 (ng/m3)

AAQ9 Dal village <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
AAQ10 Majhali village <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
AAQ11 Kandar village <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
AAQ12 Beri village <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
AAQ13 Siarli village <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
AAQ14 Sulang town <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
AAQ15 Janed village <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
Range <1.0 <0.2 <0.1 <1.0
TABLE-3.6.2 (D)
RSPM CHARACTERSTICS
Samtyari ML Existing Bhalag ML Baga ML Changar

S.NO Parameter UOM Cement Plant(AAQ5)
Block(AAQ1) MLArea(AAQ2) Block(AAQ3) Block(AAQ4) Village(AAQ6)
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
1 Free Silica mg/kg 0.59 0.81 0.54 0.92 0.64 0.89 0.63 0.96 0.66 0.89 0.61 0.81
2 Aluminium mg/kg 2.8 3.6 1.5 2.9 1.8 2.5 1.9 2.5 2.1 3.2 1.4 2.7
3 Calcium mg/kg 5.8 6.1 6.2 7.5 6.4 7.2 6.3 6.7 6.6 7.2 4.8 6.2
4 Sodium mg/kg 5.2 5.9 5.1 6.5 5.2 5.5 5.5 5.8 5.2 5.8 3.7 4.6
5 Potassium mg/kg 2.1 4.7 4.2 5.4 3.9 4.5 4.3 4.7 4.1 4.5 2.3 3.9
6 Magnesium mg/kg 1.4 2.8 1.4 2.6 1.8 2.1 1.8 2.4 2.9 3.5 1.7 2.8
7 Lead mg/kg 0.19 0.36 0.19 0.29 0.22 0.25 0.21 0.27 0.17 0.26 0.08 0.28
8 Zinc mg/kg 3.9 6.2 3.9 5.9 3.7 6.2 4.1 5.1 4.5 6.5 3.4 5.5
9 Vanadium mg/kg <0.001 0.04 <0.001 0.05 <0.001 0.04 <0.001 0.05 <0.001 0.05 <0.001 0.05
10 Iron mg/kg 0.86 0.98 0.72 0.91 0.71 0.67 0.71 0.81 0.76 0.81 0.65 0.86
11 Manganese mg/kg 3.4 3.6 3.5 3.9 3.6 3.4 3.2 4.2 4.2 3.8 3.3 4.7
12 Boron mg/kg 5.2 6.5 5.9 8.1 6.1 7.4 6.3 7.9 6.1 7.4 5.2 6.2
13 Cadmium mg/kg <0.001 0.04 <0.001 0.05 <0.001 0.05 <0.001 0.15 <0.001 0.07 <0.001 0.04
14 Copper mg/kg 0.09 0.38 0.06 0.45 0.05 0.36 0.05 0.45 0.05 0.35 0.06 0.45
15 Nickel mg/kg 0.06 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.05 0.03 0.08 0.03 0.07 0.03 0.05
16 Cobalt mg/kg <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
17 Mercury mg/kg <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Chapter-3
Samtyari ML Existing Bhalag ML Baga ML Changar

S.NO Parameter UOM Cement Plant(AAQ5)
Block(AAQ1) MLArea(AAQ2) Block(AAQ3) Block(AAQ4) Village(AAQ6)
18 Arsenic mg/kg <0.001 0.03 <0.001 0.02 <0.001 0.03 <0.001 0.02 <0.001 0.04 <0.001 0.04
19 Sulphur mg/kg 1.1 1.7 0.99 1.9 0.86 0.95 0.82 2.1 0.81 0.94 0.75 1.05
20 Phosphorus mg/kg 8.2 7.5 7.9 7.7 8.2 7.9 8.3 7.9 8.3 7.8 6.9 6.5
21 Chlorides mg/kg 7.5 6.9 7.3 6.6 7.5 6.8 7.6 6.8 7.6 6.7 6.3 5.7
22 Chromium mg/kg 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.04 0.05 0.04 0.05 0.01 0.02
TABLE-3.6.2 (E)
RSPM CHARACTERSTICS
Sr. Kasol Padvar Dal Majhali Kandar Beri

Parameter UOM
No Village(AAQ7) Villagel(AAQ8) village(AAQ9) Village(AAQ10) Village(AAQ11) Villagel(AAQ12)
1 Free Silica mg/kg 0.54 0.61 0.63 0.74 0.59 0.75 0.61 0.79 0.64 0.89 0.59 0.81
2 Aluminium mg/kg 1.1 2.4 1.5 2.9 1.2 1.8 1.7 2.5 1.7 2.6 1.6 2.1
3 Calcium mg/kg 4.5 4.9 5.3 6.3 3.8 4.3 4.3 5 5.9 6.5 4.9 5.2
4 Sodium mg/kg 3.1 4.1 3.8 4.8 3.2 3.8 3.4 3.7 4.6 5.5 4.2 4.3
5 Potassium mg/kg 1.9 2.9 2.3 3.2 2.1 2.5 2.3 2.4 3.8 4.3 2.9 3
6 Magnesium mg/kg 1.5 2.4 1.7 2.9 1.2 2 1.2 1.6 1.9 2.6 1.5 1.8
7 Lead mg/kg 0.05 0.21 0.04 0.25 0.09 0.15 0.1 0.11 0.08 0.17 0.02 0.09
8 Zinc mg/kg 3.1 3.9 3.5 4.7 2.3 4.1 3.1 4.3 4.2 5.1 2.9 3.6
9 Vanadium mg/kg <0.001 0.03 <0.001 0.04 <0.001 0.06 <0.001 0.04 <0.001 0.06 <0.001 0.03
10 Iron mg/kg 0.56 0.79 0.62 0.86 0.56 0.61 0.59 0.64 0.65 0.74 0.52 0.61
11 Manganese mg/kg 2.8 3.2 3.2 3.9 2.8 3.5 3.5 3.7 5.1 5.9 3.3 3.7
12 Boron mg/kg 4.5 4.8 4.9 5.9 4.2 4.9 5.1 5.7 5.6 6.4 4.6 5.3
13 Cadmium mg/kg <0.001 0.03 <0.001 0.04 <0.001 0.02 <0.001 0.03 <0.001 0.05 <0.001 0.02
14 Copper mg/kg 0.04 0.36 0.06 0.42 0.03 0.36 0.02 0.32 0.05 0.37 0.03 0.29
15 Nickel mg/kg 0.02 0.04 0.03 0.05 0.02 0.05 0.01 0.04 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04
16 Cobalt mg/kg <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
17 Mercury mg/kg <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001

Chapter-3
Sr. Kasol Padvar Dal Majhali Kandar Beri

Parameter UOM
No Village(AAQ7) Villagel(AAQ8) village(AAQ9) Village(AAQ10) Village(AAQ11) Villagel(AAQ12)
18 Arsenic mg/kg <0.001 0.03 <0.001 0.04 <0.001 0.02 <0.001 0.02 <0.001 0.03 <0.001 0.04
19 Sulphur mg/kg 0.69 0.95 0.75 1.08 0.76 0.95 0.81 0.91 0.89 1.01 0.72 0.91
20 Phosphorus mg/kg 6.5 5.9 7.1 7.8 5.8 5.3 5.1 5.2 6.8 6.4 4.9 5.4
21 Chlorides mg/kg 5.8 5.2 6.2 6.9 5.2 4.6 3.9 4.8 5.7 5.2 4.5 4.7
22 Chromium mg/kg 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.04 0.01 0.03 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.02 0.04

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.6.2 (F)
RSPM CHARACTERSTICS
Siarli Village Sulang Town Janed Village

Sr. No Parameter UOM
(AAQ13) (AAQ14) (AAQ15)
Min Max Min Max Min Max
1 Free Silica mg/kg 0.62 0.85 0.57 0.77 0.59 0.68
2 Aluminium mg/kg 1.8 2.1 1.2 1.7 1.3 1.8
3 Calcium mg/kg 5.1 5.4 4 4.5 4.2 4.7
4 Sodium mg/kg 4.5 4.9 3.4 3.8 3.1 3.6
5 Potassium mg/kg 3.1 3.4 2.1 2.5 2 2.9
6 Magnesium mg/kg 1.9 2.4 1.4 1.8 1.3 1.5
7 Lead mg/kg 0.01 0.14 0.03 0.15 0.03 0.12
8 Zinc mg/kg 3.8 4.6 2.4 3.7 2.2 4.1
9 Vanadium mg/kg <0.001 0.02 <0.001 0.05 <0.001 0.03
10 Iron mg/kg 0.51 0.61 0.51 0.63 0.45 0.55
11 Manganese mg/kg 3.9 4.7 2.7 3.4 2.9 3.2
12 Boron mg/kg 4.2 5.4 4.2 4.9 4.4 4.7
13 Cadmium mg/kg <0.001 0.01 <0.001 0.04 <0.001 0.02
14 Copper mg/kg 0.02 0.34 0.03 0.29 0.01 0.25
15 Nickel mg/kg 0.05 0.03 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02
16 Cobalt mg/kg <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
17 Mercury mg/kg <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
18 Arsenic mg/kg <0.001 0.01 <0.001 0.02 <0.001 0.01
19 Sulphur mg/kg 0.85 0.96 0.72 0.84 0.65 0.79
20 Phosphorus mg/kg 7.1 6.6 5.2 5.4 4.6 4.9
21 Chlorides mg/kg 6.3 5.5 4.4 4.5 4.2 4.1
22 Chromium mg/kg 0.03 0.05 0.02 0.03 0.01 0.04
 Particulate Matter (PM2.5)
The minimum and maximum concentrations for PM2.5 were recorded as 15.2 µg/m3
and 26.3 µg/m3 and respectively. The minimum concentration was recorded at
Janed Village (AAQ15) and maximum concentration was recorded at Cement Plant
(AAQ5).
 Particulate Matter (PM10)
The minimum and maximum concentrations for PM10 were recorded as 32.4 µg/m3
and 62.3 µg/m3 and respectively. The minimum concentration and the maximum
concentrations were recorded at Janed Village (AAQ15) and Cement Plant (AAQ5).
 Sulphur Dioxide
The minimum and maximum SO2 concentrations were recorded as 9.3 µg/m3 and
15.3 µg/m3. The minimum concentration was recorded at Janed Village (AAQ15)
and the maximum concentration was recorded at Cement Plant (AAQ5).
 Nitrogen Oxide
The minimum of 11.5 µg/m3 observed at Janed Village (AAQ15) and maximum
concentration of 20.3 µg/m3 for NOx was recorded at Cement Plant (AAQ5).

Chapter-3
 Carbon Monoxide
The minimum and maximum carbon monoxide concentrations were recorded as

165 µg/m3 and 525 µg/m3.
 Hydrocarbons
The values of hydrocarbons are observed below detectable levels.
 Ozone (O3)
The minimum and maximum O3 concentrations were recorded as 2.0 g/m3 and
9.3 g/m3.
 Ammonia (NH3)
The values of NH3 are observed <20.0 g/m3.
 Lead (Pb)
The values of Pb are observed <0.05 g/m3.
 Benzo ( a) Pyrene (BaP)
The values of BaP are observed <1.0 ng/m3.
 Arsenic (As)
The values of As are observed <0.2 ng/m3.
 Nickel (Ni)
The values of Ni are observed <0.1 ng/m3.
 Benzene (C6H6)
The values of C6H6 are observed <1.0 ng/m3.
Air quality monitoring was carried out as per G.S.R no. 826 (E), dated 16th
November 2009 and the observations at all the monitored locations are well within
the limits as per prescribed standards.
3.7 Water Quality
Selected water quality parameters of ground water and surface water resources
within the study area has been studied for assessing the water environment and
evaluate anticipated impact of the proposed project. Understanding the water
quality is essential in preparation of Environmental Impact Assessment and to
identify critical issues with a view to suggest appropriate mitigation measures for
implementation.
The purpose of this study is to:
 Assess the water quality characteristics for critical parameters;

Chapter-3
 Evaluate the impacts on agricultural productivity, habitat conditions,

recreational resources and aesthetics in the vicinity; and
 Prediction of impact on water quality by this project and related activities.
The information required has been collected through primary surveys and
secondary sources.
3.7.1 Methodology
Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were finalized

based on:
 Drainage pattern;
 Location of residential areas representing different activities/likely impact
areas; and
 Likely areas, which can represent baseline conditions.
Water sources covering 10 km radial distance were examined for physico-chemical,

heavy metals and bacteriological parameters in order to assess the effect of
industrial and other activities on water. The samples were collected and analyzed
as per the procedures specified in 'Standard Methods for the Examination of Water
and wastewater' published by American Public Health Association (APHA).
Samples for chemical analysis were collected in polyethylene carboys. Samples

collected for metal content were acidified with 1 ml HNO3. Samples for
bacteriological analysis were collected in sterilized glass bottles. Selected physico-
chemical and bacteriological parameters have been analyzed for projecting the
existing water quality status in the study area. Parameters like temperature,
Dissolved Oxygen (DO), free Chlorine and pH were analyzed at the time of sample
collection.
3.7.2 Water Sampling Locations

Water samples were collected from 10 ground water and 4 surface water-sampling
locations. These samples were taken as grab samples and were analyzed for
various parameters to be compared with the standards for drinking water as per
IS: 10500. The water sampling locations are listed below in Table-3.7.1 and are
depicted in Figure-3.7.1.

Chapter-3
76° 50' 76° 55' 77° 00'
10 KM
SANCTUARY
Dugal Ba Kharni
Khanahal ha
ira
ri K
ha
Bhatehr Ropri
Barpat d Mangal
Sia Dharli
31° Talwand
Dhar 31°
25' Badi 25'
Chhabiawan Kathla
8
P.F
-8

H
Gaihar P.F
N
Gagal Dhara Lalag

Panjgain
Buryans Dal
P.F Ropa
Kudi
Kalsua
Balag
Kian Rawa Majhali
Ghagas Chouri
Deoli GW3 Sanihan Ujra P.F
Dhar
Kasol Keri
Jartu SA Pata Bagra
Magrot Sangan Bohi TL
P.F SW3 Padyar
U Halogda Kufthu
Aina
GW4DaudiBajarial P.F
J
Juras RI Samal
Badnu Bandli
Kol Huwani
VE
Suin Pati
Ban Kuphar Ku
R
Nyu Balog Samtiari f
Hawoni Karyad Marora Ghamru th
P.F Cheori u
Chanalag Torti GW5 Suin Marora P.
Kutal
Panali Barech
Badsour
GW2 Chida P.F
31° SW2 Ghawrai 31°
20' Sandauli GW10Changar BagaGW1 Beri 20'
Bhalag
Mungrani Bartha
Dharsi GW6 Trohat
Bandla Jabal
P.F Pauri
Samlehu Sahnali Sabar P.F Baadu
Daret
Dades
Thar Khatrul P.F
Sohra Bhyan Jhadowi Matrech
Kathpur SW1GW7 Skor P.F
Mandno Harah
Thach Matrech
Bamla Loongari Siarli
Malokhar
P.F
Soldha Bana
Cheran Charahu
Niholog
Ratheh P.F
Sargohri
Barnun Pasaya
Behli GW9 Chakoh Chamrol SANCTUARY
Bhanda
SW4
Basla IK
HA Panjeli Naugaon
D Chamba
Panjel Matianj Khurd
Ghiyana
Parnu
Sagithi Bag Silha
Panjag Dunglu
Rajghat Sulang
Dagsech Ghanna GW8
31° NH- 31°
88 Matianj Kalan
15' 15'
10 KM
Tepra SCALE
Bahadurpur
1 0 1 2 Km
LEGEND 76° 50' 76° 55' Ground Water Locations 77° 00'
Surface Water Locations
Baga Block Road
FIGURE-3.7.1
WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.7.1
DETAILS OF WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Code Location Distance (km) Direction
Ground Water
GW1 Plant Site -- --
GW2 ML Area -- --
GW3 Kasol village -- --
GW4 Padyar village 0.5 NNW
GW5 Kandar village 0.9 ENE
GW6 Beri village 2.8 E
GW7 Siarli village 2.7 SE
GW8 Sulang town 6.7 S
GW9 Janed village 4.4 SW
GW10 Changar village 2.9 W
Surface Water
SW1 Malokhar pond 1.5 S
SW2 Baga Pond 1.2 W
SW3 Satlej river 1.0 NW
SW4 Kharet river 3.9 S
3.7.3 Presentation of Results

Ten ground water and four surface water samples representing water environment
have been considered around the proposed mine within the periphery of 10 km
taking in to account the various uses. The results of ground water samples and
the surface water quality are presented in Table-3.7.2 and Table-3.7.3.

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.7.2
GROUND WATER QUALITY
Sr. Parameters Unit IS:10500 GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5 GW6 GW7 GW8 GW9 GW10
No Limits†
1 pH - 6.5-8.5 7.36 7.89 7.25 7.76 7.57 7.70 7.51 7.27 7.07 7.54
2 Colour Hazen 5(25) 7 6 8 7 6 7 8 9 4 6
3 Taste - Agreeable Ag Ag Ag Ag Ag Ag Ag Ag Ag Ag
4 Odour - UO U.O U.O U.O U.O U.O U.O U.O U.O U.O U.O
5 Conductivity µS/cm $ 490 350 760 480 540 430 450 720 550 570
6 Turbidity NTU (5)10 3 4 6 3 5 4 6 5 7 6
7 TDS Mg/l 500(2000) 325 240 530 320 350 290 295 470 370 375
8 Total Hardness as Caco3 mg/l 300(600) 216 140 366 232 260 212 218 336 246 240
9 Total Alkalinity mg/l 200(600) 142.6 141.8 138.0 218.0 236.0 200 204 284 235.2 262
10 Calcium as Ca2+ mg/l 75(200) 51.2 23.2 26.4 37.6 41.6 34.4 34.4 26.4 52.0 43.2
11 Magnesium as Mg2+ mg/l 30(100) 21.4 19.9 72.9 33.5 37.9 30.6 32.1 65.6 28.2 32.1
12 Residual Chlorine mg/l 0.2 Min <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2
13 Boron mg/l 1.0 0.02 0.09 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
14 Chloride as Cl mg/l 250(1000) 15.6 7.1 14.2 9.9 12.8 5.7 7.1 12.8 15.6 5.7
15 Sulfates as So42- mg/l 200(400) 42.1 4.0 9.4 4.0 4.0 5.6 4.7 51.7 8.5 10.4
16 Fluoride as F mg/l 1.0(1.5) 0.5 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.3
17 Nitrates as No3 mg/l 45(NR) 38.9 20.8 25.6 7.5 8.7 3.2 2.2 1.5 15.7 0.2
18 Phenenolic Compounds mg/l 0.001(0.002) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
19 Cyanides as CN- mg/l 0.05(NR) <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
20 Anionic Detergents mg/l 0.2(1.0) <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2
21 Mineral Oil mg/l 0.01(0.03) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
22 Cadmium as Cd mg/l 0.01(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
23 Arsenic as As mg/l 0.01(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
24 Copper as Cu mg/l 0.05(1.5) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
25 Lead as Pb mg/l 0.05(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
26 Manganese as Mn mg/l 0.1(0.3) 0.04 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 0.06
27 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.3(1.0) 0.21 0.26 0.08 0.06 0.57 0.12 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.11
28 Chromium as Cr+6 mg/l 0.05(NR) <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
29 Selenium as Se mg/l 0.01(NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Chapter-3
Sr. Parameters Unit IS:10500 GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5 GW6 GW7 GW8 GW9 GW10
No Limits†
30 Zinc as Zn mg/l 5.0(15) 0.91 0.86 0.17 0.13 1.44 0.24 0.15 <0.01 0.99 1.3
31 Aluminium as Al mg/l 0.03(0.2) 0.04 0.06 0.03 0.07 0.04 0.03 0.05 0.05 <0.01 0.03
32 Mercury as Hg mg/l 0.001(NR) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
33 Pesticides mg/l Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent
34 E.Coil - Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent
35 Total Coliforms MPN/
10 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2
100ml
†: Limits in parenthesis are permissible limits in absence of alternate source;

$: Limits not specified; NR: No relaxation specified;
UO: Un-objectionable; Ag: Agreeable.

Chapter-3
TABLE 3.7.3
SURFACE WATER QUALITY
Sr. Parameters Unit SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

No
1 pH - 7.40 7.58 7.69 7.78
2 Colour Hazen 3 4 2 3
3 Conductivity µS/cm 520 360 380 480
4 TDS mg/l 350 256 250 320
5 DO mg/l 5.2 5.4 5.2 5.6
6 BOD mg/l <3 <3 <3 <3
7 COD mg/l <5 <5 <5 <5
8 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 260 176 172 232
9 Total Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 238.0 78.2 86.0 176.4
10 Calcium as Ca mg/l 49.6 46.4 37.6 33.6
11 Magnesium as Mg mg/l 33.0 14.6 19.0 36.0
12 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 5.7 12.8 11.3 11.3
13 Residual free Chlorine mg/l <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2
14 Phosphates as PO4 mg/l 0.04 0.02 <0.01 0.06
15 Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 1.5 16.0 68.3 13.3
16 Fluorides as F mg/l 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.2
17 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l 18.7 86.0 15.6 41.3
18 Total Boron as B mg/l <0.01 <0.01 0.27 0.08
19 Phenolic Compounds mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
20 Cyanides mg/l <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
21 Oil and Grease mg/l <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0
22 Cadmium as Cd mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
23 Arsenic as As mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
24 Copper as Cu mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
25 Lead as Pb mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
26 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.07 0.04 0.05 0.05
27 Chromium as Cr+6 mg/l <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
28 Selenium as Se mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
29 Zinc as Zn mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
30 Aluminum as Al mg/l 0.08 0.06 0.08 0.09
31 Mercury as Hg mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
32 SAR - 0.03 0.07 0.21 0.11
33 Insecticides mg/l Absent Absent Absent Absent
34 Anionic Detergents as MBAS mg/l Absent Absent Absent Absent
35 Total Coliforms MPN/100 10 11 14 10
Note: Values in paranthesis are ‘Permissible limit in the absence of Alternate source’.
NR: No relaxation, $: Limits not specified, UO: Un-Objectionable, Agr-Agreeable
IS: 10500 (the standard prescribes the requirements for the essential and desirable characteristics
required to be tested for ascertaining the suitability of water for drinking purpose)
3.7.4 Observations
Ground Water Quality
 The analysis results indicate that the pH ranges in between 7.07 to 7.89, which
is well within the specified standard of 6.5 to 8.5. The minimum pH of 7.07 was
observed at GW9 and the maximum pH of 7.89 was observed at GW2.

Chapter-3
 Total hardness was observed to be ranging from 140 to 366 mg/l. The
minimum hardness (140 mg/l) was recorded at GW2 and the maximum
hardness (366 mg/l) was recorded at GW3.
 Chlorides were found to be in the range of 5.7 mg/l to 15.6 mg/l, the minimum
concentration of chlorides (5.7 mg/l) was observed at GW10, whereas the
maximum value of chlorides (15.6 mg/l) was observed at GW1 & GW9.
 Sulphates were found to be in the range of 4.0 mg/l to 51.7 mg/l. The
minimum value observed at GW2, GW4 & GW5 (4.0 mg/l) whereas the
maximum value observed at GW8 (51.7 mg/l).
 The Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) concentrations were found to be ranging in

between 240 to 530 mg/l, the minimum TDS observed at GW2 (240 mg/l) and
maximum concentration of TDS observed at GW3 (530 mg/l).
 Iron is found in between 0.04 mg/l to 0.57 mg/l and Zinc found <0.01 to 1.44
mg/l.
Surface Water Quality
 The analysis results indicate that the pH values were found to be 7.40 to 7.78.
 DO was observed to be in the range of 5.2 to 5.6 mg/l. The TDS was observed
in the range of 250 mg/l to 350 mg/l, the minimum TDS value was observed
at SW3, and where as maximum value was observed at SW1.
 The chlorides and sulphates were found to be in the range of 5.7 to 12.8 mg/l
and 1.5 to 68.3 mg/l, respectively.
 Total hardness expressed as CaCO3 ranges between 172 to 260 mg/l. The
concentration of nitrate fluctuates between 15.6 to 86.0 mg/l.
 The calcium & magnesium were found to be in the range of 33.6 to 49.6 mg/l
and 14.6 to 36.0 mg/l, respectively. Iron values are found between 0.04 – 0.07
mg/l and zinc is found to be less than 0.01 mg/l.
3.8 Noise Level Survey
The physical description of sound concerns its loudness as a function of frequency.

Noise in general is sound which is composed of many frequency components of
various types of loudness distributed over the audible frequency range. Various
noise scales have been introduced to describe, in a single number, the response of
an average human to a complex sound made up of various frequencies at different
loudness levels. The most common and universally accepted scale is the A
weighted Scale which is measured as dB (A). This is more suitable for audible
range of 20 to 20,000 Hz. The scale has been designed to weigh various
components of noise according to the response of a human ear.

Chapter-3
The impact of noise sources on surrounding community depends on:
 Characteristics of noise sources (instantaneous, intermittent or continuous in

nature). It can be observed that steady noise is not as annoying as one which is
continuously varying in loudness;
 The time of day at which noise occurs, for example high noise levels at night in
residential areas are not acceptable because of sleep disturbance; and
 The location of the noise source, with respect to noise sensitive landuse, which
determines the loudness and period of exposure.
The environmental impact of noise can have several effects varying from Noise
Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL) to annoyance depending on loudness of noise. The
environmental impact assessment of noise from the proposed mine, construction
activity, and vehicular traffic can be undertaken by taking into consideration
various factors like potential damage to hearing, physiological responses, and
annoyance and general community responses.
The main objective of noise monitoring in the study area is to establish the baseline
noise levels, and assess the impact of the total noise generated by the mine
operations around it.
3.8.1 Identification of Sampling Locations
A preliminary reconnaissance survey has been undertaken to identify the major

noise generating sources in the area. Noise at different noise generating sources
has been identified based on the activities in the village area, ambient noise due to
industries and traffic and the noise at sensitive areas like hospitals and schools.
The noise monitoring has been conducted for determination of noise levels at
thirteen locations in the study area. The noise levels at each location were recorded
for 24 hours. The environment setting of each noise monitoring location is given in
Table-3.8.1 and shown in Figure-3.8.1.
TABLE-3.8.1
DETAILS OF NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS
Location Location Distance (Km) Direction Zone

Code
N1 Samtyari ML Block - - Industrial
N2 Existing ML area 0.3 N Industrial
N3 Bhalag ML block - - Industrial
N4 Baga ML block - - Industrial
N5 Cement Plant 0.8 W Industrial
N6 Changar village 2.9 W Residential
N7 Kasol village 3.3 NW Residential
N8 Padyar village 0.5 NNW Residential
N9 Kandar village 0.9 ENE Residential
N10 Beri village 2.8 E Residential
N11 Siarli village 2.7 SE Residential
N12 Sulang town 6.7 S Residential
N13 Janed village 4.4 SW Residential
Chapter-3
76° 50' 76° 55' 77° 00'
10 KM
SANCTUARY
Dugal Ba Kharni
Khanahal ha
ira
ri Kh
Bhatehr Barpat ad
Ropri Sia Mangal
Dharli
31° Talwand
Dhar 31°
25' Badi 25'
Chhabiawan Kathla
8
P.F
-8

H
Gaihar P.F
N
Gagal Dhara Lalag

Panjgain
Buryans Dal
P.F Ropa
Kudi
Kalsua
Balag
Kian Rawa Majhali
Ghagas Chouri
Deoli N7 Sanihan Ujra P.F
Dhar
Kasol Keri
Jartu Pata
SA
Bagra
Sangan Bohi
TL
Magrot Halogda
P.F N8 Padyar Kufthu
U
Aina Bajarial P.F
J
Juras Samal
RI
Daudi Badnu Bandli
Kol Huwani
VE
Suin Pati
N1 Ban Kuphar Ku
R
Nyu Balog Samtiari ft
Chanalag Torti N9 P.
Kutal
Panali Barech
Badsour
N2 Chida P.F
31° 31°
Changar Baga Ghawrai
20' Sandauli Bhalag Beri 20'
Mungrani N6 N5 N3 Bartha
Bandla Jabal
P.F Mohlar Pauri Dharsi
N10
Trohat
Gari Siarli P.F
Samlehu Thar Sahnali Sabar P.F Baadu
Daret
Dades
N4 Khatrul P.F
Kathpur
Matrech
Thach
N11 Skor P.F
Bamla Loongari Malokhar Siarli
P.F
Soldha Bana
Cheran Charahu
Niholog
Ratheh P.F
Sargohri
Barnun Pasaya
Behli N13 Chakoh Chamrol SANCTUARY
Bhanda
Basla IK
HA Panjeli Naugaon
D Chamba
Parnu
Sagithi Bag Silha
Panjag Dunglu
Rajghat Sulang
Dagsech Ghanna N12
31° NH- 31°
88 Matianj Kalan
15' 15'
10 KM
Tepra SCALE
Bahadurpur
1 0 1 2 Km
LEGEND 76° 50' 76° 55' Noise Monitoring Locations 77° 00'
Baga Block Road
FIGURE-3.8.1
NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS

Chapter-3
3.8.2 Method of Monitoring
Sound Pressure Level (SPL) measurements were measured at all locations. The
readings were taken for every hour for 24 hours. The day noise levels have been
monitored during 6 am to 10 pm and night levels during 10 pm to 6 am at all the
locations covered in 10 km radius of the study area.
The statistical analysis is done for measured noise levels at thirteen locations
during post-monsoon and partly winter season. The parameters are analyzed for
Lday, Lnight, and Ldn. These results are tabulated in Table-3.8.2.
TABLE-3.8.2
NOISE LEVELS IN THE STUDY AREA
Location Location L10 L50 L90 Leq Lday Lnight Ldn

Code
N1 Samtyari ML Block 62.3 58.6 55.0 59.5 60.1 56.9 63.9
N2 Existing ML area 64.7 61.1 57.4 62.0 62.5 59.5 66.5
N3 Bhalag ML block 61.9 58.1 54.6 59.0 59.6 56.6 63.6
N4 Baga ML block 60.7 56.9 53.4 57.8 58.4 55.4 62.4
N5 Cement Plant 66.1 62.2 58.4 63.2 64.1 60.5 67.6
N6 Changar village 50.4 46.5 42.7 47.5 48.5 44.6 51.8
N7 Kasol village 47.5 43.8 40.2 44.7 45.2 42.3 49.3
N8 Padyar village 48.4 44.8 41.1 45.7 46.2 43.1 50.1
N9 Kandar village 51.1 47.5 43.8 48.4 48.9 45.8 52.8
N10 Beri village 49.6 46.0 42.3 46.9 47.4 44.3 51.3
N11 Siarli village 46.5 42.9 39.2 43.8 44.3 41.2 48.2
N12 Sulang town 47.4 43.8 40.1 44.7 45.2 42.1 49.1
N13 Janed village 45.6 42.0 38.3 42.9 43.4 40.3 47.3
a) Day time Noise Levels (Lday)
The day time noise levels at all the locations are observed to be within the range of
43.4 to 64.1 dB (A). The minimum noise level was observed to be 43.4 dB (A) at
Janed village (N13) and maximum noise level was observed to be 64.1 dB (A) at
Cement Plant (N5).
b) Night time Noise Levels (Lnight)
The night time noise levels at all the locations were found to be in the range of
40.3 to 60.5 dB (A). The minimum night time noise level was observed to be 40.3
dB (A) at Janed village (N13) and maximum night time noise level was observed to
be 60.5 dB (A) at Cement Plant (N5).

Chapter-3
3.9 Flora and Fauna Studies
3.9.1 Introduction
The present section deals with the ecological evaluation pertaining to the
proposed development. As such, it is to support the assessment of the impact of
a proposed development by providing guidance on how to describe the ecological
features within the area affected, how to value them, and how to predict the
value losses caused by the development. Among the human activities that pose
the highest threat to the conservation of biodiversity are the developmental
projects in particular. Such projects represent artificial elements that cut through
the landscape and interfere with the natural habitat and its conditions by
emissions that may be solid, liquid and or gaseous. This in turn influences the
abundance and distribution of plant and animal species, i.e., the biodiversity of
the areas impacted.
The description of the actual ecological assessment provided by the ecological

baseline study serves to set a reference for the subsequent impact analysis.
Moreover, it helps decision-makers and EIA reviewers to become familiar with the
environmental features and the needs of the study area.
3.9.2 Objectives of the Study
The present study was undertaken with the following objectives to assess both
terrestrial and aquatic habitats of the study area:
 To assess the nature and distribution of vegetation in and around the existing
project site.
 To assess the fauna in the study area.
 To understand the ecology of the water bodies.
 To identify and quantify the ethno botanical importance of the plant species.
 To ascertain the migratory routes of fauna, presence of breeding grounds and
sensitive habitats in the study area, if any.
 To assess the presence of protected areas in the study area.
 To review the information from secondary sources and discuss the issues of
concern with the relevant authority and stakeholders.
 Impact prediction based on primary and secondary data sources to formulate
mitigation measures.
3.9.3 Methodology
To achieve the above objectives a detailed study of the area was undertaken with
the mine as its centre. The different methods adopted were as follows:
 Generation of primary data by undertaking systematic ecological studies in the

study area;
 Primary data collection for flora through random sampling method for trees,
shrubs and herbs from the selected locations to know the vegetation cover
qualitatively.

Chapter-3
 Faunal studies by taking transect in the study area to spot the fauna and also
to know the fauna through secondary indictors such as pugmarks, scats, fecal
pallets, calls and other signs.
 For ecological information, the secondary sources such as local officials,
villagers and other stakeholders were interviewed.
 Sourcing secondary data with respect to the study area from published
literature.
The locations for terrestrial and aquatic ecological studies are shown in Figure
3.9.1 and the details are given in Table 3.9.1.
TABLE-3.9.1
ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS
Station Location Distance (km) Direction
Terrestrial
TE1 Near Village Jajar 2.1 W
TE2 Near Village Karyad 0.3 NE
TE3 Near Village Beri 2.9 E
TE4 Near Village Malokhar 1.8 SE
TE5 Near Village Kharsi 1.9 SW
Aquatic
AE1 Near Village Barmana 7.5 NNW
AE2 Near Village Matrech 3.3 ESE
AE3 Near Village Aslu 3.6 SSE
3.9.4 General Biodiversity

The altitudinal variation, environmental setting and distinct climatic zones has
endowed the state with rich biodiversity that includes many tropical, sub-tropical,
temperate as well as alpine vegetation. Diverse group of fauna associated with
these different vegetations and together have made this region one of the most
important ecosystem on the planet. Hence it is of high importance to assess the
biodiversity of the region with respect to the proposed expansion project area and
its surrounding.
The study area falls in the Western Himalayas of India which has hilly terrains
with steep mountain slopes and valleys. The region has considerable land cover
under forest and it has many rivers forming the source for one of the major
rivers-Sutlaj. The major source of water in this region is the Himalayan snow melt
and monsoonal precipitation. Being a part of Himalayan ranges, this region
harbours rich biodiversity and wealth of natural resources.
The forests of the State have been classified on an ecological basis as laid down
by Champion and Seth, and can be broadly classified into Coniferous Forests and
broad-leaved forests. Distribution of various species follows fairly regular
altitudinal stratification. The vegetation varies from Dry Scrub Forests at lower
altitudes to Alpine Pastures at higher altitudes. In between these two extremes,
distinct vegetation zones of Mixed Deciduous Forests, Bamboo, Chil, Oaks,
Deodar, Kail, Fir and Spruce, are found. The richness and diversity of flora can be
gauged from the fact that, out of total 45,000 species found in the country as
many as 3,295 species (7.32%) are reported in the State. More than 95% of the
species are endemic to Himachal Pradesh and characteristic of Western
Himalayan flora, while about 5% (150 species) are exotic, introduced over the
last 150 years.
Chapter-3
76° 50' 76° 55' 77° 00'
10 KM
SANCTUARY
Dugal Ba Kharni
Khanahal ha
ira
ri K
ha
Bhatehr Ropri
Barpat d Mangal
Sia Dharli
31° Talwand
Dhar 31°
25' Badi 25'
Chhabiawan
AE1 Kathla
8
P.F
-8

H
Gaihar P.F
N
Gagal Dhara Lalag

Panjgain
Buryans Dal
P.F Ropa
Kudi
Kalsua
Balag
Kian Rawa Majhali
Ghagas Chouri
Deoli Sanihan Ujra P.F
Dhar
Kasol Keri
Jartu Pata
SA
Bagra
Sangan Bohi
TL
Magrot Halogda
P.F Kufthu
U
Aina Padyar
Bajarial P.F
J
Juras Samal
Kol Huwani
Daudi RI Badnu Bandli
VE
Pati
TE2 Ban Suin
Kuphar Ku
Nyu Balog Samtiari R ft
Chanalag Torti P.
Kutal
Panali Barech
Badsour Chida P.F
31° TE1 31°
Changar Ghawrai
20' Sandauli Baga Bhalag Beri 20'
Mungrani Bartha
Bandla Jabal
P.F Pauri Dharsi
TE3
Trohat
Samlehu Sahnali Sabar P.F Baadu
Daret
Dades
Thar Khatrul P.F
Kharoti Dabar TE5 Kharsi
Kathpur
Sohra Bhyan TE4 Matrech
AE2
Jhadowi Mandno Harah
Thach Matrech Siarli Skor P.F
Bamla Loongari Malokhar
P.F
Soldha Bana
Cheran Charahu
Niholog
Ratheh P.F
Sargohri
Barnun Pasaya AE3 Aslu MAJHATAL WILDLIFE
Behli Chakoh Chamrol SANCTUARY
Bhanda
Basla IK
HA Panjeli Naugaon
D Chamba
Parnu
Sagithi Bag Silha
Panjag Dunglu
Rajghat Sulang
Dagsech Ghanna
31° NH- 31°

88 Matianj Kalan
15' 15'
10 KM
Tepra SCALE
Bahadurpur
1 0 1 2 Km
LEGEND 76° 50' 76° 55' Terrestrial Sampling Locations 77° 00'
ML Area-Existing Forest Boundary Aquatic Sampling Locations

Baga Block Road
FIGURE 3.9.1
LOCATIONS FOR TERRESTRIAL AND AQUATIC ECOLOGICAL

for Production Capacity of 4.0 MTPA (3.60 MTPA Limestone Mine and 0.40 MTPA Shale) ML Area
of 172.7434 ha at Baga, Bhalag, Samtyari, Padiyar & Sehnali Villages, Arki Tehsil, Solan District
and Soldha & Mains Villages, Sadar Tehsil, Bilaspur District, Himachal Pradesh
Chapter-3
3.9.4.1 Forest Types of the Region
The following Table-3.9.2 gives the forest types of Himachal Pradesh with
general floristic compositions with respect to the altitude.
TABLE-3.9.2
FOREST TYPES OF THE REGION
Classification based on
Flora of Himachal Pradesh
latitudinal Zones
A. Trees
Khair, Siris, Kachnar, Semal, Tun, Mango,
Lower Motane Zone (up Behul, Shisham, Ritha, Tut, Behera & Chil.
B. Shrubs
to 1000m above msl) Vitex, Munj, Ber, Ipomea, Dodonea, Bamboo.
Vetiver, Sanchrus, Munjh.
C. Grasses
A. Trees
Kunish, Poplar, Willow, Ohi, Robinia, Drek, Kail,
Middle Motane Zone
Chil Toon, Behmi, Chulli, Walnut, Khirik.
(From 1,000metres to B. Shrubs
Vitex, Berberis, Carrisa.
2000m above msl)
Lolium, Dactylis, Phleum, Phylaris.
C. Grasses
A. Trees Deodar, Fir Spruce, Maple, Ash, BhojPatra,
Temperate Zone (From Horse Chestnut, Alder, Robinia, Poplar, Walnut.
2,000m to 3000metres B. Shrubs Berberis.
above msl) Festuca, Dactylis, Bromus, Lucerne, white
C. Grasses Clover, Red Clover, Dioscorea.
A. Trees
Birch, Juniper, Cypress, Willow.
Alpine Zone (Above Saussurea lappa, Cotoneaster microphylla,
B. Shrubs
3000m above msl) Artemesia.
Festuca arundinacea, Dectylis glomerata.
C. Grasses
3.9.4.2 Cropland Ecosystem
This is also known as manmade ecosystem or artificial ecosystem because of man

tries to control biotic community and physical environment. The common crops in
crops land ecosystem in study area are Oryzhiza sativa, Elusine coracona, Zea
mays,Triticum vulgare, Triticum diococcum, Sorghum vulgare, which are mainly
dependent on rainwater during monsoon season, canal irrigation and river. In this
crop land ecosystem in addition to the crop raised, a number of weeds like
Cynodon dactylon, Euphorbia hirta, Cyperus rotundus, Digetaria sp. and
Alyscicarpus sp, Cymbopogon flexosus also occur in the fields. Apart from that
commercial crops like ground nut sunflower and several vegetable crops are also
grown in this region.
3.9.4.3 Terrestrial Ecosystem
Natural vegetation is mostly restricted to herb layer having drought resistance.

Other than herb layer the area is almost devoid of major forest type tree except
agroforestry types and commercial plantations such as Eucalyptus hybrid, Acacia
leucopholoe, Leucena leucocephala, Phoenix aculis, Azadirachta indica, Ficus sp.,
Acacia sp and Zizyphus jujuba, Euphorbia sp. which are mainly restricted to

Chapter-3
waste and culturable waste lands and near villages and agricultural lands, Delonix
regia, Peltoforrum ferrugineum, Albizia procera, Albizia lebbeck, Dalbergia sissoo,
Terminalia catapa, and Tamarindus indica are predominant. About 248 plant
species were recorded from 72 families in the study area.
3.9.4.4 Composition and Condition of the Forests in the Study Area
The major portion of the study area belongs to Kunihar and Bilaspur Forest
division of Shimla and Bilaspur districts. The Kunihar division consists of
Nalagarh, Arki, part of Kasauli and part of Shimla tehsils. Due to wide variations
in altitude, aspect of soil depth and texture and available moisture, the
vegetation met with in the tract also shows great variations. Chil, Khair, bamboos
and other broad-leafed species like Chhal, Simbal, Jhingam etc are the most
important species met in the area. Biotic interference like excessive grazing, fires,
grass cutting and felling of trees also bring about great changes in the vegetation
even within a limited area. Natural regeneration of all the species is generally
deficit, though good patches of Chil plantations are met within area brought
under artificial regeneration and the areas are away from habitations and are not
subjected to adverse biotic influences. The forests of this division can be grouped
under the following types as per the revised survey of the forest types of India by
Champion and Seth (1968).
Group-5:- Tropical Dry Deciduous Forests
Sub-Group 5B Northern Tropical Dry Deciduous Forests

1. C2 Northern dry mixed deciduous forests
2. DSI Dry deciduous scrub
3. E9 Dry bamboo brake
Group 6:- Tropical Thorn forests
Sub-Groups 6B Northern Tropical Thorn forests

1. DS2, Tropical Euphorbia scrub
Group 9 DS2:- Sub-Tropical Euphorbia scrub
Group 9 Sub:- Tropical Pine forests
Type C1. Himalayan sub-tropical chill pile forests

a. Lower Shivalik Chil Pine forests
b. Upper or Himalayan Chil Pine forests
Group 12 Himalayan Moist temperature forests
C1 Lower Western Himalayan Temperate forests

a. Ban Oak forests (Quercus incana)
From the point of view of management forests of Group 5 B (1) and group 5 B(2)
have been taken as one type. Scrub forests. The forests of type 5 B (3) are

Chapter-3
bamboo brakes. The forests of group 6 are mainly thorn or Euphorbia scrub
forests. The main floristic of these types is described as follows.
Mixed Deciduous Forests (Scrub):
This type occurs on altitudes from 300 m to 1300 m and extends even upto 1500
m on warmer aspects and scarp slopes. They are at their best at sites with deep
soil with favorable soil moisture conditions. The upper canopy is usually a very
open with thin shrubby under growth. During the hot weather the trees are
leafless and the soils fully exposed, whereas during the monsoons it is fully
covered with foliage. In most areas, due to adverse biotic influences, the crop has
been reduced to a few scattered trees only. The principal species met with the top
canopy are Chhal (Anoegeissus latifolia), Jhingan (Lannea coramandalica), Siris
(Albizzia lebbeck), Albizzia procera, Albizzia odarattissima, Simal (Bambax cieba),
Pula (Kydia calcina), Barnasi (Forenia limonia), Amaltas (Cassaia fistula),
Chamror (Ehretia leavis), Sandan (Ougenia oojensis, Kaim (Mitragyna parviflora),
Kangu (Flacartia indica), Khair (Acacia catechu), Iaman (Syzygium cumini), Chilla
(Caseria tomentosa), Amla (Emblica officinalis), Kachnar (Bauhinia sp) Toon
(cedrela toona) in depressions, Dhaman (Grewia sp), Shingar (Boernemeria
regulosa) very commonly seen locally on the moist soils, Kamal (Mallotus
phillippinus), Blojho (Sapium insigne), Ber (Zyzyphus mauritiana), Bel (Aegle
marmelos) and Dhak (Butea monosperma).
Under growth consist of Harsinghar (Nyctanthes arbortristis), Karunfa (Carissa

apaca), Dhavi (Woodfordia fruticosa), Kathi (Indigofera pulchella), Gundhella
(Murayya keoigii), Basuti (Adhatoda vasica), Mehendru (Dodonaea viscosa) and
Keor (Holarrhena antidycenterica).
The important grasses are Bhabar (Ishammum augustifolium), Makora

(Heteropogon contortus), Dub (Cynodon dactylon), Dhaulu (Chrysopogon
montanatus), Labb (Cymbopogon martinii) and Munj (Erianthus munja).
Climbers Tour (Bauhinia vahlii), Salary (Pueraria tuberosa), Karingham

(Caesalpina sepiera), Kurar (Acacia pinnata), Dhudi (Cryptolepis bulchanani).
Natural regeneration of almost all the species is deficient, primarily due to

adverse biotic factors mainly excessive grazing. In some of these forests, khair
has been successfully introduced after clarification the existing growth, Khair
plantations in blanks such as UF Surujpur, Dholar, Mandbhala, Betar and
kuranwala in Kuthar range are also doing well. But where after plantation,
adequate protection and maintenance has not been carried out, the areas have
been invaded by Lantana camara as is seen in UF Matkuda, Dhar Jhokari and
Khadli etc in Kuthar range. This type of forests starts from Chandi in Kuthar
range and extends upto Kashlog in Dhami range.
Mixed Deciduous Forests (Bamboos):
These types are found upto 1000m elevation on well drained and loose textured
Shivalik formations. It closely resembles the foregoing type the only difference
being that in this case, bamboos (Dendrocalamus strictus) is met within the top

Chapter-3
canopy. The development of bamboo clumps in Ramgarh, Baddu, Majru, Retali

and Dassua in Nalagarh tract is good, whereas it is moderate in Awar, Braghu,
Bhowan, Nalki of Kuthar Range. The floristic characteristics are same as that of
mixed deciduous type.
Thorn forests or Euphorbia Scrub Forests:
Generally these types of forests are recently formed habitats due to dry seasons
and degradation of existing forests. Heavy grazing pressure and frequent fires
has played as significant role in their presence. Some bamboos are also present
in patches. The tree growth is very sparse or even non-existent and only the very
hardy species form the part of these stands. Many large areas are uniformly
occupied by Euphorbia. Most of the areas of Arki and Dhami ranges between
Kunihar and Kashlog are the best representation of this habitat. Moreover,
Lantana has spread over most of the areas on southern and western slopes of
Kuthar range between Patta and Banalgi. The growth of pure Lantana is so thick
that it has completely replaced other vegetation as seen in Khadli, Matkuda,
Chandi and Shan etc. Shrubs like Carissa apca along with few grasses occurs
throughout these habitats.
The Main Floristic Composition is as under:
Top Story:
Khair (Acacia catechu), Jhingan (Lannea coramandalica), Amaltas (Cassia fistula),

Bel (Aegle marmelos), Baranasi (Feronia limonia), Kangu (Flacourtia indica),
Punica granatum (Wild Pomegranate), Quercus glauca (Blue Japanese Oak-
Banni).
Under Growth:
Thor (Euphorbia royleana), Phil lark (Lantana camara), Karunda (Carissa apica),
Ghandela (Murraya Koenigii) and Kuri (Nyctanthes arortristis), Achyranthes
aspera, (Prickly chaff flower), Asparagus ascendens (Shatavari), Berberis asiatica
(Indian Barberry), Rosa brunonii (Himalayan musk rose),
Grasses:
Makora (Heteropogon montanus), Bubba (Cynodon dactylon), Dhaulu (Carissa

apica), Ghandela (Murraya koenigii) and Kuri (Nyctanthes arortristis),
Cymbopogon flexosus (Khad grass).
Chil Pine Forests:
These are most important forests of the tract occurring between 800 to 1800 m in
elevation. Biotic influences play an important part in the regeneration and
distribution of this species. With favorable soil conditions and on northern and
eastern aspects, chil comes down to even 800 m elevation or it can extend upto
1800 m or more in elevation. The pine, generally, will stand singly or in groups
with the scattered lower deciduous tree storey along its lower altitudinal limit
where there is usually a fairly continuous low scrub growth of xenophytic shrubs.

Chapter-3
Regeneration can naturally establish itself easily, if proper protection is afforded

and mother trees are well distributed over the area. Chanol and Bohli Katli of
Kuthar range, DF sergharakhru of Dhami range and Kamal Pandal and Jaglog
forests of Ramshehr range can be cited as examples of good regeneration.
Upper Storey: Chil (Pinus roxburghii)
Middle Storey:
Kanto (Pyres pasha), Ban oak (Quercus incana), Kamal (Mallotus phillippinus,
Amla (Emblica officinalis), Khair (Acacia catechu) and Dare (Punica granatum).
Undergrowth:
Karaunda (Carissa apica), Mehnder (Dodonia viscosa), Akha (Rubus ellipticus),

Chhota jhunjra (Myrsine Africana), Dhavi (Woodfrodia fruticaosa), Padar
(Colebrookia sp), Kashmal (Berberis lyceum), Kathi (Indigofera pulchela) and
Gandhela (Murraya koenigii).
Grasses:
Chrysopogon fulvus, Chrysopogon sp, Dichanthium annalatum, Heteropgon

contortus and Themeda anathera, Cymbopogon flexosus (Khad grass).
Climbers: Very few Gulab (Rosa moschatus) is the most common.
Cryptogamic Vegetation:
The area shows many algae, fungi, bryophytes and ferns. Algae are present in
aquatic bodies or in marshy places. Fungi, particularly from ascomycetes and
basidiomycetes are located on ground or epiphytically. Lichens of crustose, foliose
and fruticose types are present on different substrates (Lichen, Ascomycetes and
Basidiomycetes could be observed near old building tops, old walls of the
houses). Bryophytes occur in wet areas and occasionally on barks of trees and old
walls of houses.
3.9.5 Present Status of Biodiversity
While these hilly states once harboured rich biodiversity, presently, these are in
various stages of degradation. There are only a few patches that still have the
natural species composition comprising of native species. Many other plant
communities have been disturbed on account of habitat loss, degradation, soil
erosion and biological invasions. Hence the government of Himachal Pradesh was
instrumental in preserving the rich areas under wildlife sanctuaries and parks of
the state.
In order to protect these species from large-scale commercial felling there is a

green felling ban imposed in the state. This has been implemented, as these
species have a large turnover cycle (100 or more years), poor germination
percentages, poor seedling recruitment and slow growth rates.

Chapter-3
This study area is well accessible by road and the area also harbours a river and
other smaller rivulets flowing through it. The vegetation in the buffer zone
comprises of sparse to well protected vegetation in different categories such as
open land, reserve forests, wildlife sanctuaries inter-mixed with villages and
agricultural land. The buffer zone includes two wildlife sanctuaries viz: Bandli
Wildlife Sanctuary in the North and Majhatal Wildlife Sanctuary in the South. The
details of the Protected Areas and Reserve Forest are given in Table-3.9.3. The
authenticated map of the proposed site with respect to the two wildlife
sanctuaries is shown in Annexure-XIII (A).
TABLE-3.9.3
LIST OF FORESTS IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr. Forests From Baga From Bhalag From Samtyari

No. Block Block Block
3.9.6 Bandli Wildlife Sanctuary
Himachal Pradesh ranks third among all the states in the country in terms of the
percentage of total area of the state under Protected Area (PA) coverage. Its
thirty two Sanctuaries and two National Parks occupy 13.6% of the state’s
geographical area as compared to the national average of 4.7% (HPFD 2004b).
While two of the state’s sanctuaries each over a large area of more than 1000
km2, as many as sixteen out of the total thirty two sanctuaries are less than 75
km2 in area. One of these is the Bandli Wildlife Sanctuary-a small Protected Area
of 41.32 km2 located at a distance of about 8 km from the town of Sundernagar,
District Mandi, Himachal Pradesh. It extends from 31º25’21” to 31º29’02” North
and 76º52’04” to 76º56’54” East. The Sanctuary was established in by notifying

Chapter-3
gazetter in 1999 it is representative of the North-West Himalaya province of the

Himalayan biogeographic zone classified as 2A.
Physiographic Features
Topography
Bandli Wildlife Sanctuary occurs in hilly terrain spanning an altitudinal range from
about 600 m to over 2000 m. The change in altitude is abrupt and steep with the
highest point of Bandli Tibba at an altitude of 2162 m. The area consists of steep
rock and cliffs with about 5% of the area under precipitous rocky slopes.
Land Use
The approximate proportion of land use categories in Bandli WLS consists of 40%
land under tree cover and an equal proportion under grasslands. Land under
shrub cover and precipitous rocks comprise 15% and 5% respectively.
Drainage
The southern, western and northern sides of the Sanctuary form part of the
catchments of the Satluj River while the eastern side drains into the Beas River
through Bhadrolu Nala. The southern side is bound by Seri Khad. Numerous nalas
dissect the terrain of the sanctuary.
Rock and Soil Type
The rock type is predominantly calcite limestone with a few shale bands and gray
colored dolomite having quartz veins. The base rock has resulted in shallow
textured soils which, on the whole, are well-drained. Open areas near habitation
have soil which is poor in organic matter due to repeated burning. Northern and
eastern aspects consist of certain areas with soil rich in nutrient content.
Climate
The cold, dry and wet seasons are distinctly marked with temperature variation
ranging from 36ºC in summer to as low as -1ºC in winter. The highest reaches of
the area receive mild snowfall every year. Ground frost is common during winter
and mild fog conditions persist for a small duration during the monsoon season.
The annual rainfall in the area averages to about 1500 mm. Wind conditions
remain mild for most of the year with high velocity winds only occurring on
hilltops.
Vegetation
The vegetation of the area corresponds with Northern Dry Mixed Deciduous
Forests 5B/C2, Himalayan subtropical Chir Pine Forest 9/C1b 12/C1/1a and Lower
West Himalayan Temperature Forest–Ban Oak Forest categories of forest as per
Champion and Seth (1968).

Chapter-3
Northern Dry Mixed Deciduous type of forest is found on the southern and also
partly on the western slopes of the Sanctuary occurring in the lowest areas of
Bandli WLS from about 600 m upto the higher reaches till about 1300 m. Some of
the major species characterizing this type in the sanctuary are given in Table -
3.9.4.
TABLE- 3.9.4
PREDOMINANT PLANT SPECIES IN BANDLI WILDLIFE SANCTUARY
Sr. No Scientific Name Local Name

1 Acacia catechu Khair
2 Adhatoda vasica Basuti
3 Bauhinia racemosa Safed kachnar
4 Bauhinia vahlii Vahli
5 Carissa opaca Garna, Karauda
6 Cassia fistula Amaltas
7 Dalbergia sissoo Shisham
8 Dodonaea viscosa Mendar
9 Emblica officinalis Amla
10 Euphorbia royleana -
11 Felmingia fruticulosa -
12 Indigofera dosua Indigofera
13 Lannea coramalica Lanea
14 Mallotus phillippinensis Kamala
15 Murraya kownigii Currbaypatta, Gandhela
16 Phoenix acualis Wild dwarf date
17 Pinus roxburghii (chir pine)
18 Pueraria tuberosa -
19 Quercus leucotrichophora Ban oak
20 Rubus eliticus Rubus
21 Syzygium cumini Jamun
22 Terminalia bellerica Bahera
23 Viburnum coriaceum -
24 Woodfordia floribunda -
25 Zizyphus mauritiana Ber
Fauna
Mammals: Bandli Wildlife Sanctuary provides habitat for a variety of mammalian

species that include carnivores such as the leopard and leopard cat. Among wild
ungulates, goral and barking deer are found here. The major faunal species
recorded presented in Table–3.9.5.
TABLE 3.9.5
DETAILS OF RECORDED IN MAMMALS IN BANDLI WILDLIFE
Sr. Common Name Scientific Name Conservation Status as

No Wildlife Protection Act,
1972
1 Barking deer Muntiacus muntjak Schedule III
2 Black bear Ursus thibetanus Part I of Schedule I
3 Common Indian mongoose Herpestres edwardsii Part II of Schedule II

Chapter-3
Sr. Common Name Scientific Name Conservation Status as

No Wildlife Protection Act,
1972
4 Leopard Panthera pardus Part III of Schedule I
5 Goral Naemorhedus goral Schedule III
6 Hanuman Langur Semnopithecus entellus Schedule II
7 Himalayan palm civet Paguma lrvata Schedule II
Himalayan yellow throated
8 marten Martes flavigula Schedule II
9 Indian flying squirrel Petaurista petaurista Schedule V
10 Indian fox Vulpes bengalensis Schedule II
11 Indian hare Lepus nigricollis Schedule IV
12 Indian porcupine Hystrix indica Schedule IV
13 Jackal Canis aureus Schedule II
14 Jungle cat Felis chaus Schedule II
15 Leopard cat Prionailurus bengalensis Part III of Schedule I
16 Rhesus macaque Macaca mullata Schedule II
Reptiles: The recorded reptilian fauna from sanctuary area are presented in
Table–3.9.6.
TABLE-3.9.6
DETAILS OF RECORDED REPTILIAN FAUNA FROM SANCTUARY
Sr. No Common Name Scientific Name Conservation Status as

Wildlife Protection Act, 1972
1 Common krait Bungarus caeruleus Schedule IV
2 Monitor lizard Varanus bengalensis Part II of Schedule I
3 Rat snake Ptyas mucosus Schedule III
Avifauna: Bandli WLS supports a large variety of birds including four species of
pheasants. The sanctuary is a stronghold for Himalayan pheasants particularly
the Cheer Pheasant (Catreus wallichii), a vulnerable species endemic to the
Himalaya. In addition to the Cheer Pheasant, the sanctuary also supports
populations of the Kalij pheasant (Lophura leucomelanos), Indian peafowl (Pavo
cristatus) and red jungle fowl (Gallus gallus). Table–3.9.7 lists some of the
important avifauna of Bandli Wildlife sanctuary.
TABLE-3.9.7
DETAILS OF RECORDED BIRDS FROM SANCTUARY
Sr. No Common Name Scientific Name Conservation Status

as Wildlife Protection
Act, 1972
1 Cheer pheasant Catreus wallichii Part III of Schedule I
2 Indian peafowl Pavo cristatus Part III of Schedule I
3 Kalij pheasant Lophura leucomelanos Part III of Schedule I
4 Red junglefowl Gallus gallus Schedule IV
5 Chukor Alectoris chukar -
6 Black partridge Francolinus francolinus Schedule IV
7 Grey partridge Francolinus Pondicerianus Schedule IV
8 Common quail Coturnix coturnix Schedule IV
9 Red -wattled lapwing Vanellus indicus -
10 Common hoopoe Upupa epops -
11 Common Indian nightjar Caprimulgus asiaticus Schedule IV

Chapter-3
Sr. No Common Name Scientific Name Conservation Status

as Wildlife Protection
Act, 1972
12 Rufous treepie Dendrocitta vagabunda Schedule IV
13 Black-headed jay Garrulus lanceolatus Schedule IV
14 Yellow-billed blue magpie Urocissa flavirostris Schedule IV
15 Blue-throated barbet Megalaima asiatica Schedule IV
16 Coppersmith barbet Megalaima haemacephala Schedule IV
17 Paradise flycatcher Terpsiphone paradise Schedule IV
18 Pied bush chat Sazicola caprata -
19 Indian robin Sazicoloides fulicata -
20 Magpie robin Copsychus saularis Schedule IV
21 Common pariah kite Milvus migrans -
22 Rock pigeon Columba livia -
23 House sparrow Passer domesticus -
24 Common kestrel Falco tinnunculus -
25 Spotted dove Streptopelia chinensis Schedule IV
26 Ring dove Streptopelia decaocto Schedule IV
27 Spotted owlet Athene brama Schedule IV
28 Golden oriole Oriolus oriolus Schedule IV
29 Black-lored tit Parus xanthogenys Schedule IV
30 Great tit Parus major Schedule IV
Muscicapa (Eumyias)
31 Verditer’s flycatcher thalassina Schedule IV
White-throated fantail
32 flycatcher Rhipidura albicollis Schedule IV
33 Spotted forktail Enicurus maculates -
34 Asian Koel Eudynamys scolopacea -
35 Brainfever bird Hierococcyx varius -
Eurasian eagle owl (Indian
36 great-horned owl) Bubo bubo Schedule IV
37 Jungle babbler Turdoides striatus Schedule IV
Blue (himalayan) whistling
38 thrush Myophonus caeruleus Schedule IV
39 Jungle crow Corvus macrorhynchos -
40 Common myna Acridotheres tristis Schedule IV
41 Brahminy myna Sturnus pagodarum Schedule IV
42 Rock bunting Emberiza cia -
43 Himalayan Bulbul Pycnonotus leucogenys Schedule IV
44 Red-vented bulbul Pycnonotus cafer Schedule IV
45 Black bulbul Hypsipetes leucocephalus Schedule IV
46 Black drongo Dicrurus macrocercus Schedule IV
47 White-breasted king fisher Halcyon smyrnensis Schedule IV
48 Plum-headed parakeet Psittacula cyanocephala Schedule IV
49 Slaty-headed parakeet Psittacula himalayana Schedule IV
3.9.7 Majhatal Wildlife Sanctuary
This wildlife sanctuary is part of Kunihar Forest Division. Majathal Sanctuary

is situated in the Shimla and Solan districts. Its terrain is undulating and steep on
the mountain ridge in the south. It was established in: 1962 (first notified) and
March 1974 (re-notified).
Area and Altitude: It covers an area of 39.4 square kilometers on varying

altitudes of 900 to 1966 meters above sea level.

Chapter-3
Forest Cover: Majathal Wildlife Sanctuary has a forest cover typical to the lower
elevations of the west Himalayan region. The forest is of Himalayan dry
temperate type.
Climate and Visiting Season: With an annual average temperature of -1 to

29°C, this sanctuary can be visited any time of the year. The monsoon season
during July to September has an annual rainfall of 1040 millimeters. The
probability of landslides increases when it rains. Forested with grasses dominating
the sanctuary are oak trees of ban, kharsu and moru species. Chir pine is the
only conifer growing in this area.
Fauna at the Majathal Sanctuary: Majathal Sanctuary has a good population

of the Cheer Pheasant and Goral. Other animals which inhabit the protected area
are Himalayan Black Bear, Leopard, Rhesus Macaque, Jungle Cat, Himalayan
Palm Civet, Yellow Throated Marten, Barking Deer, Sambar, Indian Wild Bear and
Langur. There considerable number of bird species residing the protected area
some rare ones such as oriental white backed vulture, black francolin and koklas
pheasants and in total 104 species have been documented as per the Envis
database as given in Annexure-XIII(B).
3.9.8 Results of Primary Field Survey
3.9.8.1Terrestrial Flora
The terrestrial sampling results revealed that most of the areas which are
categories under Reserve forest and other protection status have comparatively
good forest cover and biodiversity. The study area has many villages, a road
network to few areas and also developmental pockets such as industries, mining
areas, agricultural land and human habitation. The study area also includes one
of the major river-Satluj and its associate tributaries. Many small streams and
springs emerge in different valleys which ultimately join the large river. The
streams and springs occurring in the study area are perennial while many others
are ephemeral. Because of the hilly terrains and steep elevation of the mountains
and the presence of streams and rivers, make it inaccessible hence many parts of
the forest areas still remain less disturbed. The authenticated list of flora
commonly occurring in the core as well as buffer zone of the study area is given
as Annexure-XIII(C).
The most dominant tree in the study area is Pinus roxburghii. This tree has a
conspicuous distribution in most of the areas and it does not allow much of the
under-growth. In most of the areas it has a uniform growth range and thus
reveals that these pine forests are the result of historic silviculture practices.
Other species also represent the region but with lower abundance, these are
Bombax ceiba, Cedrela toona, Emblica officinalis and Bauhinia variegate. The
other large tree representation is of Eucalyptus sp. mostly showing patchy
monoculture. The overall diversity of the under storey was observed to be low
owing to the presence of Pine forest and Eucalyptus plantations which allow very
less growth underneath.

Chapter-3
Many areas have growth of Euphorbia royleana which forms a more open
scrubland forest with less number of large tree species. Weed intrusion can be
seen profoundly in all the areas and roadside vegetations and moreover in the
vegetation that are near the human habitation or villages. Species such as
Lantana camara, Nyetanthes arbor tristis, Tridex sp., Murraya koenigii and
Mallotus phillipinensus are very common and in many areas are the only
dominant shrubs out competing other species of shrubs and grasses.
Some areas have patches of Bamboo stands. The major species of bamboo that
dominates the study area is Bambusa arundinacea. Some of the bamboo clumps
can be seen dry which might be due to the flowering and drying of the entire
clump. The other bamboo stands of B. arundinacea which are green might have
late flowering and others seen to be green are of different species. The climber
Bauhinia vahlii is commonly observed in most of the vegetation and on the
roadside plantation. At some places the ground vegetation is occupied by grasses
like Agrostis stolonifera, Andropogon tristis, Chrysopogon echinulatus and
Dichanthium annulatum. The detailed list of plant species recorded from the
study area is given as Annexure-XIII (D) and the habitats with species in the
study area are depicted in Figure-3.9.2.
3.9.8.2 Terrestrial Fauna
Wide altitudinal ranges and varied topography has resulted in making it a very
rich repository of wild fauna. From dry deciduous to luxuriant temperate forests
to alpine scrub, the region has free ranging animals in all the climatic zones.
Whereas, Snow Black Bear, Wild Boar, Barking Deer, Sambhar, Rhesus Macaque,
Hanuman Langur, Jungle Cat, Hare, Fox and Leopard among mammals are
common inhabitants of the region. Birds like Chir Pheasant, Koklas, Kaleej Red
Jungle Fowl and Pea Fowl. The authenticated list of commonly occurring fauna in
the core and the buffer zone of the study area is given in Annexure-XIII (E)
and the detailed list of mammals, Reptiles and Amphibians is given in Annexure-
XIII (F). The list of birds observed during the study is given below in Table-
3.9.8.
The list of butterflies from the study area is given in Table-3.9.9. The state is
endowed with a rich wildlife and some of the species have witnessed considerable
increase in population sizes and numbers after a ban on hunting was imposed in
the State. There are, however, lack of authentic data/figures regarding lower
groups of species, such as insects, molluscs, Soil-borne micro-fauna for example
soil nematodes and ciliates etc.

Chapter-3
Eucalyptus stands Pinus roxburghii
Dry bamboo stands Lantana camara
Euphorbia royleana Stream in the study area
FIGURE-3.9.2
HABITATS IN THE STUDY AREA
Chapter-3
TABLE-3.9.8
LIST OF BIRDS OBSERVED IN THE STUDY AREA
Sr. No. Common Names Sr No. Common Names

1 White Cheeked Bulbul 10 White Capped Water Redstart
2 Hill/Jungle Babbler 11 Common Myna
3 Blue Rock Pigeon 12 Great Tit
4 Red Headed Vulture 13 Crow Pheasant
5 Great Hill Barbet 14 Warbler
6 Red Jungle Fowl 15 Cheer Pheasant
7 Spotted Forktail 16 Himalayan Whistling Thrush
8 Red Whiskered Bulbul 17 Oriental White Eye
9 Red Billed Blue Magpie 18 Wall creeper
TABLE-3.9.9
LIST OF BUTTERFLIES FROM THE STUDY AREA
Sr. No. Scientific Name Common Name

1 Graphium agamemmos Tailed Jay
2 Papilo polymnstor Blue Mormon
3 Junonia altites Grey Pansey
4 Junonia almana Peacock Pansey
5 Pelopides assemensis -
6 Polytrema discrete -
7 Euploca cora -
8 Euploca crassa -
9 Oeuploca dicciotianua -
3.9.8.3 Agro-Ecosystems
Agriculture being the major occupation of the people of this region, is also one of
the land use change that affects biodiversity. Clearing of forest areas for crop
cultivation and creation of orchards has reduced the forest areas to great extents
over the years. The legal protection to the existing forest lands somehow acts as
conservation effort and also is the matter of conflict between the wildlife and the
villages around the protected areas. Wildlife often intruders the farms for food
resources but there is no provision of compensation for crop damage by wild
animals, which further increases the conflict. Farmers are, however, allowed crop
protection licenses under which they can kill certain animals like Wild Boar,
Rhesus Macaque in their fields to save their crops from damage. However, such
option is seldom availed by the farmers due to procedural complexities or
religious sentiments.
The buffer zone has terrain farmlands on the hilly regions which primarily grow
rice, wheat, green vegetables, tubers etc. The presence of human population also
requires forest produce for their day to day activities. These resource demands
such as timber, firewood, medicinal plants impose great pressure on the nearby
forests thus leading to their degradation and destruction.

Chapter-3
3.9.8.4 Biodiversity Issues and Concerns
There are no issues pertaining to the proposed project such as land acquisition
and forest land, as the forest land diversion and the associated clearances have
been already approved.
Other issues such as wildlife killing due to various reasons is one of the concerns,
the various factors may include, killing for flesh, trade or resistance against
attack. Accidental road kills is also an important reason as wildlife has been
observed to cross the roads for food and water.
The region includes forests established and/or standing on private lands, much of
which also supports natural vegetation and trees as part of traditional agro-
forestry practices. Such a landscape, irrespective of the legal designation of the
area or ownership rights, provides suitable habitat for wildlife. The wildlife often
strays from the forest into the open lands hence wildlife encounters in the state
are frequent, irrespective of the ownership of the land in which the forest is
located. This often gives rise to conflicting issues at the human-wildlife interface,
especially where land use changes are observed.
Many cases of such conflicts where the wild animals, especially Himalayan Black
Bear and Leopard, attacking cattle or even human beings are reported every year
from the state. Though there is a state policy and, therefore, rules to provide
financial compensation where these conflicts result in injury or loss to the life,
human-wildlife conflicts are becoming a major concern for the people as well as
the forest department.
Sheep and Goat grazing in the nearby forest areas is commonly practices while
the Cows are usually fed in stalls. Dogs are kept by villagers to protect the
livestock, interaction with the villages and observations suggest that wild
predators mainly leopard has an affinity to pick livestock and dogs hence the
dogs are wearing a broad metal belt around the neck to protect them from
predatory attacks.
Pressure on the forest areas is due to everyday household requirements in the

nearby villages for fodder, livestock feeding and fuel wood for cooking and
heating fireplace. Overgrazing, tree cutting, collection of NTFPs, grass and lopping
has resulted in degradation of many areas. The alteration of vegetation can be
seen wherein nuisance species and weeds have increased while replacing native
and important species.
3.9.8.5 Cryptogamic Vegetation
The area shows many algae, fungi, bryophytes and ferns. Fungi, particularly from
ascomycetes and basidiomycetes are located either on ground or epiphytically.
Lichens of crustose, foliose and fruticose types are present on different
substrates. Bryophytes occur in wet areas and occasionally on barks of trees and
old walls of houses and other structures. The diversity and abundance of these
species shows high seasonality depending on the availability of moisture.

Chapter-3
3.9.8.6 Aquatic Biodiversity
The buffer zone of the study area has few freshwater streams/springs which are
mostly ephemeral and some remain perennial. All the streams and rivulets join
the main lotic water body ie. Sutlaj River.
Phytoplankton: The phytoplankton diversity is represented by all the three

major groups i.e.; Chlorophyceae, Bacillariophyceae and Cyanophyceae. The
presence of high number of diatoms shows that the water body has healthy water
quality while the presence of blue-green algae with other species that form mats
and aggregates indicate water stagnation. As the study area has steep elevation
gradient, resulting in high speed of the river that allows very selective species to
grow. Moreover the available nutrients and the amount of sunlight also determine
the species composition. The list of species from the study area is given in
TABLE-3.9.10.
TABLE-3.9.10
LIST OF PHYTOPLANKTON OBSERVED IN THE STUDY AREA
Scientific Name Scientific Name

Gyrosigma sp. Microcystis sp.
Achananthes affinis Navicula gracilis
Gyrosigma accuminatus Nitzschia gracilis
Pandorina sp. Chroococcus minutes
Ankistrodesmus falcatus Spirulina princepes
Ankistrodesmus var.tumidus Pinnularia braunii
Pediastrum boryanum Synedra tabulate
Scenedesmus bijuga Cladophora sp.
Melosira granulate Cymbella sp.
Cyclotella meneghiana Navicula radiosa
Zooplankton: Zooplankton species composition and diversity forms the main

dietary composition of fishes. Zooplanktons partially decide the diversity and
abundance of fish in a given water body. The zooplankton species composition in
turn decided by the available phytoplankton community. The zooplankton species
are also a good indicator of water quality as the resistant groups such as
copepods, other crustaceans and insects dominate the water body which has poor
water quality. The oligotrophic water bodies have high diversity and presence of
many other groups such as cladocerans, rotifers and Ciliates. The most commonly
occurring zooplankton species are given Table-3.9.11.
TABLE-3.9.11
LIST OF ZOOPLANKTON OBSERVED IN THE STUDY AREA
Scientific Name Scientific Name

Mesocyclops sp. Mesocyclops leuckarti
Keratella sp. Mesocyclops hyalinus
Keratella monospina Coleps hirsutus
Brachirous caudatus Arcella sp.
Asplancha brighwell Actinophyros sp.
Colpidium colpoda Asplancha sp.
Daphnia sp. Ceriodaphnia sp.
Ceriodaphnia reticulata

Chapter-3
Benthos: These animals are attached on rocks, logs, sediment, debris and
aquatic plants during some period of their life cycle. Their distribution depends on
water velocity, volume of water and nature of stream bed as well as presence of
nutrients. Diptera is associated with poor water quality as they are more resistant
to pollution.
The Ephemeroptera were found at some locations which indicates good water
quality for biotic communities. Ephemeroptera, Diptera, Trichoptera, Coleoptera,
Odonata, Oligochaeta and Mollusca.
Fishes: Being a high altitude region, the study area has Satluj, a major river of
the Himalayan region. The species occurring in this part of the river are mostly
cold water species showing migratory behavior due to extreme weather events.
The migratory phenomenon of the fish species is directly related to its life cycle
as the fishes move from one habitat to other for spawning. The breeding
migration starts with the onset of monsoon when a rise in water level in search of
suitable breeding grounds up-river. Even winter migration takes place for the
purpose of feeding in most of the fishes migrate towards downstream. It is
usually the periods of fish migration when fishing activities intensify in the area.
There is no fishing community but fishing is done by the riparian human
populations as well as the migrant labours using illicit method of poaching or
sometimes hooks and line as well as cast net.
Rainbow trout and Mahasheer are the important fishes in Himachal Pradesh. The
major fishes available in the streams and rivers are Trout, Mahasheer,
Nemacheilus spp., Barilus sp, Schizothoracids Crossocheilus sp. Glyptothorax spp.
etc.
3.9.9 Conclusions
The study area comprises of Reserve Forests and two Wildlife Sanctuaries. The
Core zone of the study area does not harbour any Schedule-I species or
migratory corridors of any fauna. As the two protected areas viz; Bandli Wildlife
Sanctuary and Majhtal Wildlife Sanctuary fall within the study area have species
of conservation importance and thus shall need a Conservation Plan.
An application for obtaining recommendations/NOC from National Board of

Wildlife for additional ML area of 172.7434 ha has been submitted to district
forest officer (wildlife) Shimla vide letter no: JAL/JHCP/Mines/WL/2015/No.18676
dated 23rd June 2015. Attached as an Annexure-VI.
Initially wildlife management plan was prepared for existing mine lease area and
approved by the Chief Wildlife Warden Himachal Pradesh for Rs 54.12 lakhs for
taking remedial measures. The plan is under implementation and is being
executed by the Wild Life Department. Further, a conservation plan with a
provision of Rs 50.00 lakhs for Schedule-I wildlife species under Wildlife
(Protection) Act, 1972 has been prepared in consultation with state wildlife
department and authenticated by PCCF (WL) Himachal Pradesh Simla. Wild life
conservation plan attached as Annexure-XIII (G).

Chapter-3
3.10 Demography and Socio-Economics
The demographic and socio- economic conditions prevailing in the 10 km radius

of the mine lease area Samtiari (505), Hawani Kol (513), Baga (511), Bhalag
(510), Sahnali (509) villages in Akri Tehsil, Solan District, Bilaspur Sadar Tehsil in
Bilaspur District, Sundarnagar, Nihri Tehsils in Mandi District of Himachal
Pradesh” is analyzed. The socio-economic data forms the basis for developing a
suitable enterprise social responsibility plan to address the needs of the
population.
The project proponent is committed to take up the socio-economic development

initiatives not only to minimize the negative impact on the population and also
improve the socio-economic status of population living in 10 km radius of the
plant as its sustained effort as part of corporate social responsibility.
3.10.1 Methodology Adopted for the Study
The methodology adopted for the study mainly includes primary survey, review of
published secondary data (District Census Statistical Handbooks-2011 and
Primary Census Abstract of Census-2011) with respect to population, household
size, sex ratio, social stratification, literacy rate and occupational structure for 10
km radius study area.
3.10.2 Review of Demographic and Socio-Economic Profile-2011
The village wise demographic data of 312 villages falling within 10 km radius of
the project site as per the 2011 census is given in Annexure-XIV. The salient
features of the demographic and socio-economic conditions are analyzed and
described in the following sections.
3.10.3 Demography
As per the 2001 census the total population of the study area is 80964.The
population reported as per the 2011 census is 90753. Overall around 12.1% more
decennial growth is reported in the study area.
The growth rate of population in the study area comparatively reported less than
the growth rate of state rural (Himachal Pradesh Rural12.7).
Distribution of Population
As per 2011 census the study area consisted of 90753 persons inhabited in study
area. The distribution of population in the study area is shown in Table-3.10.1.

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.10.1
DISTRIBUTION OF POPULATION
Particulars 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0-10 km

No. of Households 2002 6745 8843 17590
Male Population 6049 17711 23063 46823
Female Population 4915 16805 22210 43930
Total Population 10964 34516 45273 90753
Male Population (0-6 years) 669 2236 2772 5677
Female Population (0-6 years) 622 2134 2562 5318
Total Population (0-6 years) 1291 4370 5334 10995
% of 0-6 years population 11.77 12.66 11.78 12.12
Average Household Size 5.48 5.12 5.12 5.16
% of males to the total population 55.17 51.31 50.94 51.59
% of females to the total population 44.83 48.69 49.06 48.41
Sex Ratio (no of females per 1000 males) 813 949 963 938
Source: District Census Hand Book–2011
 Average Household Size
The study area has a household size of 5.16 as per 2011 census, which has
decreased from 5.53 in 2001. This is mainly due to population control measures,
health awareness programs.
 Sex Ratio
The configuration of male and female indicates that the males constitute to about
51.59% and females to 48.41% of the total population as per 2011 census
records. The study area on an average has 938 females per 1000 males as per
2011 census reports. In comparison to the state sex ratio (Himachal pradesh
Rural 986) the study area has recorded low sex ratio. The sex ratio in the study
area indirectly reveals certain sociological and cultural aspects in relation with
female births.
3.10.4 Social Structure
In the study area, as per 2011 census, 24.52% of the population belongs to (SC)
Scheduled Castes and 0.18% belongs to (ST) Scheduled Tribes. Overall the data
of social stratification reveals that the SC and ST % to population is more than
24%.
In comparison with study area proportion of SC and ST population is less than the
state (Himachal Pradesh SC 25.2% and ST 5.7%). The SC and ST communities
are marginalized and they are at considered at low level of social strata and calls
for a special attention in Social Impact Management Plan for improving their
socio-economic status apart from preservation and protection of their art, culture
and traditional rights of livelihood.
The distribution of population by social structure is shown in Table-3.10.2.

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.10.2
DISTRIBUTION OF POPULATION BY SOCIAL STRUCTURE

Schedule caste 1857 9118 11278 22253
% To the total population 16.94 26.42 24.91 24.52
Schedule Tribes 15 20 125 160
% To the total population 0.14 0.06 0.28 0.18
Total SC and ST population 1872 9138 11403 22413
% To total population 17.07 26.47 25.19 24.70
Total population 10964 34516 45273 90753
Source: District Census Hand Book –2011
3.10.5 Literacy Levels
The data of study area reveals that literacy rate of 80.05% as per 2011 census,
which is found to be less than state rate of literacy (Himachal Pradesh 82.8%).
The distribution of literate and literacy rate in the study area is given in Table-
3.10.3.
TABLE-3.10.3
DISTRIBUTION OF LITERATE AND LITERACY RATES

Male Population 6049 17711 23063 46823
Female Population 4915 16805 22210 43930
Male Population (0-6 years) 669 2236 2772 5677
Female Population (0-6 years) 622 2134 2562 5318
Total Population (0-6 years) 1291 4370 5334 10995
Total Population above 7 years 9673 30146 39939 79758
Male literates (7+ years) 4635 13385 18193 36213
Female literates (7+ Years) 2904 10192 14539 27635
Total literates (7+ Years) 7539 23577 32732 63848
Male literacy rate (%) to the total literates 61.48 56.77 55.58 56.72
Female literacy rate (%) to the total literates 38.52 43.23 44.42 43.28
Average Male Literacy to the total population (%) 47.92 44.40 45.55 45.40
Average female Literacy to the total population (%) 30.02 33.81 36.40 34.65
Total Literacy rate (%) to the total population 77.94 78.21 81.95 80.05
Source: District Census Hand Book –2011
The percentage of male literates to the total literates of the study area works out
to be 56.72%. The percentage of female literates to the total literates, which is
an important indicator for social change, is observed to be 43.28% in the study
area as per 2011 census records.
3.10.6 Occupational Structure
The occupational structure of residents of work participation rate in the study

area is studied with reference to main workers, marginal workers and non-
workers. The main workers include 10 categories of workers defined by the
Census Department consisting of cultivators, agricultural laborers, those engaged
in live-stock, forestry, fishing, mining and quarrying; manufacturing, processing

Chapter-3
and repairs in household industry; and other than household industry,

construction, trade and commerce, transport and communication and other
services.
The marginal workers are those workers engaged in some work for a period of
less than six months during the reference year prior to the census survey. The
non-workers include those engaged in unpaid household duties, students, retired
persons, dependents, beggars, vagrants etc.; institutional inmates or all other
non-workers who do not fall under the above categories.
Total work participation rate in the project study areas is 53.32% and the non-
workers constitute 46.68% of the total population respectively. In comparison
with study area work participation rate is more than the state. (Himachal pradesh
51.9%). The main workers to the total workers are 53.99% and the marginal
workers constitute to 46.01% to the total workers. The occupational structure of
the study area is shown in Table-3.10.4.
TABLE-3.10.4
OCCUPATIONAL STRUCTURE

Total workers 6587 18488 23310 48385
Work participation rate (%) 60.08 53.56 51.49 53.32
Total main workers 3022 9912 13190 26124
% of main workers to total workers 45.88 53.61 56.59 53.99
Marginal workers 3565 8576 10120 22261
% of marginal workers to total workers 54.12 46.39 43.41 46.01
Non-workers 4377 16028 21963 42368
% of non-workers to total population 39.92 46.44 48.51 46.68
Source: District Census Hand Book-2011
3.10.7 Health Environment
Health facilities in the study area are there in all the three systems. There are 02
allopathic hospitals and 01 Ayurveda hospital in the study area. But the Govt.
PHC hospitals are found with inadequate facilities like ambulance and support
staff. In one of the PHCs doctor’s post is vacant for the past 3 months.
In the remote areas of the study area providing the health facilities is one of the
important role of government. Health is an important indicator for human
development, releasing this, based on the health needs of the area the JHCP has
started an hospital in the project. The project proponent JP group is running a 30
beds hospital as part of its CSR initiative and serving around 27000 per annum
for common ailments like amoebiasis, gastro enteritis, diabetics, ailments,
bronchitis, asthama and other acute upper respiration. The hospital is found to be
providing good health services to the population in study area. Photographs of
Socio Economic Survey are shown in Figure-3.10.1. The health and hospital
profile of the area is given in Annexure–XV.

Chapter-3
FIGURE-3.10.1
SOCIO ECONOMIC SURVEY

Chapter-3
3.11 Traffic Density Survey
The traffic studies have been conducted to know the prevailing traffic volumes on
the roads in the study area. It is essential to consider these details for assessing the
anticipated future traffic volumes as a part of overall impacts assessment for the
project.
The variations of traffic densities depend upon the working days and time and also
vary in day and night times. In order to assess the prevailing traffic volumes on the
roads, the survey was conducted during normal working days of the week by
avoiding local holidays or abnormal situations to reflect the true picture of the traffic
densities. The traffic study was conducted at one location for two days.
3.11.1 Selection of Sampling Location
The traffic density study was conducted at Kharsi to Baga road which is about 0.1
km away from the plant area.
3.11.2 Methodology
3.11.2.1 Vehicular Count
The vehicles plying in both the directions were counted continuously for 12 hours at
one location. The vehicles were counted every hour and recorded under respective
category. The maximum traffic count in an hour is termed as peak hour traffic. The
vehicles were categorized under various heads like trucks/tankers, buses, Multi
Axles, cars, 2/3 wheelers, cycles and bullock carts.
3.11.2.2 Categorization of Traffic
The engine driven vehicles were categorized into various heads viz. Light Motor
Vehicles (LMV) as two wheelers (scooters, motor cycles etc.), three wheelers
(auto rickshaws, 3-wheel tempo etc.); Medium Motor Vehicles (cars, jeeps),
tractors (6 wheelers), minibuses and mini trucks (8 wheelers); Heavy Motor
Vehicles such as Buses, trucks and Tankers (10 wheelers).
3.11.3 Results and Discussion
The summary of daily traffic count for the location was monitored during the study
period is summarized in Table-3.11.1.
It was observed that the 2/3 wheelers, Cars/Jeeps and trucks/buses forms the
major volume of the traffic. The total traffic PCU of this road is minimal.
3.11.3.1Presentation of Results
The present level of traffic has been converted to Passenger Car Units (PCU) at this
location as per the conversion factors stipulated by Indian Road Congress (IRC). The
Passenger Car Unit (PCU) recorded at the selected traffic location, which is towards
Kharsi to Baga Road is in between 2955 PCU to 2970 PCU.

Chapter-3
TABLE-3.11.1
TRAFFIC DENSITY (VEHICLES/DAY)
Code Location Wheelers Wheelers Tractors Buses Trucks Total

(Bicycle/Sco (Car/Jeep) PCU’S
oter/
Motorcycle)
Day-1 Towards Kharsi to 142 289 21 68 849 2970
Day-2 Baga Road 131 369 17 75 823 2955
Note: PCU rating: (2/3 wheelers: 0.5, Car/Jeep: 1.0, Tractor: 3.0, Buses: 3.0, Trucks/HMV: 3.0)

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
4.0 IMPACT ASSESSMENT
4.1 Introduction
“Environmental Impact” can be defined as any alteration of environmental

conditions or creation of a new set of environmental conditions, adverse or
beneficial, caused or induced by the action or set of proposed actions under
consideration.
This chapter incorporates both qualitative and quantitative description of various

environmental impacts from the proposed open cast limestone and shale mine.
The open cast mining operations in general cause environmental degradation and
if adequate control measures are not taken to prevent/mitigate the adverse
environmental impacts, these operations may cause irreversible damage to the
eco-system. The environmental parameters most commonly affected by mining
activities are:
 Topography;
 Land use;
 Climate;
 Drainage;
 Air quality;
 Water resources and quality;
 Noise levels and ground vibrations;
 Soil quality;
 Flora and fauna;
 Landuse pattern; and
 Socio-economic conditions.
The proposed limestone and shale mining project is likely to create impact on the
environment in two distinct phases:
 During the mine developmental phase, which may be regarded as temporary

or short term; and
 During the operation phase, which would have long term effects.
The mine developmental and operation of the proposed limestone and shale mine
comprises various activities each of which may have an impact on some or other
environmental parameters. Various impacts during the mine developmental and
operation phase on the environment parameters have been studied to estimate
the impact on the environment and are discussed briefly below and elaborated in
the subsequent sections.
4.2 Impacts during Mine Developmental Phase
This includes the following activities related to leveling of site, construction of

access road, crushing plant and other related structures and equipment.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
4.2.1 Impact on Land use
At mine developmental stage no major changes are anticipated. Existing

structures like crushing plant, screening plant, administration office and service
center of existing mine will be utilized. Mine development of these facilities will
not have much impact on land use.
4.2.2 Impact on Soil
The preparation of limestone and shale excavation area also leads to loss of
topsoil in this region. The topsoil requires proper handling like separate stacking
so that, it can be used for green belt development. Apart from very localized
impacts at the crushing plant site, no significant adverse impact on soil in the
surrounding area is anticipated.
4.2.3 Impact on Air Quality
During mine developmental phase, particulate matter will be the main pollutant,
which would be generated from the site developmental activities and vehicular
movement on the road. Further, concentration of NOx and CO may also slightly
increase due to increased vehicular traffic movement. However, the increase in
ambient concentrations of air quality will be negligible and reversible. As most of
the equipment will be mobile, the emissions are likely to be fugitive. The dust
generated will also be fugitive in nature, which can be controlled by suitable
mitigation measures like sprinkling of water.
The impacts will be localized in nature and the areas out side the project
boundary are not likely to have any adverse impact with respect to ambient air
quality.
4.2.4 Impact on Water Resources and Quality
Water required to cater the need for drinking purpose, dust suppression at faces
and on haul roads, cleaning and washing of HEME, crushing plant and plantation
etc. The requirement of water for mining is about 150 m3/day. The source of
water shall be from the Satluj river that flows at a distance of about 2.5 km from
the ML area. Water will be used for spray on haul roads, plantation, cleaning and
washing of machineries and toilets etc.
4.2.5 Impact on Noise Levels
The major sources of noise during the mine developmental phase are vehicular
traffic, mine development equipment like dozers, scrapers, pumps, compressors,
pneumatic tools, drilling and blasting etc. The operation of these equipment will
generate noise ranging between 85-90 dB (A) near source. These noises will be
generated mostly within the mine boundary and will be transient in nature. Due
to proposed green belt all around the periphery of the mine boundary, these
noises will be attenuated to a large extent and are not likely to have any
significant impact on the nearby villages.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
4.2.6 Impact on Ecology
The mine facilities has been designed away from major tree bearing areas, so
that most of the new facilities are located within the existing cement plant area
for operational convenience and to minimize disturbance to the community. Since
the mine has existing facilities like crushing plant, office complex, central work
shop, no cutting of tree species and removal herbaceous plants is required.
Maximum care will be taken to minimize the tree cutting and removal of
herbaceous flora is a temporary and reversible hence, there is no major impact
on ecology during mine development phase.
4.2.7 Demography and Socio-Economics
The impact of the proposed limestone and shale mine project would begin to be
felt with the start-up of the mine developmental activities. The non-workers
constitute about 46.68% (42368) of the total population in 10 km radius study
area. Some of them will be available for employment in the proposed project
during mine developmental activities. As the labourers are generally un-skilled,
the locals would get opportunities for employment during mine developmental
activities. The peak manpower required during the mine developmental period is
estimated to be about 137 persons. It is estimated that at least 2/3 of the labour
force will be sourced from the local area.
There will be some migration of manpower from outside the study area during
mine developmental phase, which may put some pressure on the local
settlements and resources. However, this impact is envisaged to be marginal and
a temporary phenomenon.
4.3 Impacts During Operational Phase
4.3.1 Impact on Topography
The area applied for mining lease forms part of the lesser Himalayan ranges,
the Baga block is seen in and around the applied area. The highest elevation in
the applied area is 1645 mRL (in central NE part of Baga block) and lowest is 675
mRL (in NW part of Samtiyari block).
4.3.2 Impact on Land use
The mining lease area considered for exploitation is comprised of shale and
limestone formation bearing area. It is envisaged that about 172.7434 ha will be
disturbed by the mining activity during the life of the deposit. Out of this, about
109.0 ha area has be mined out, which includes the mined out void, area under
exploitation, position of various benches quarry roads, back filled area. The core
zone is private land, the area consist of unfertile black cotton soil cap.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
The existing land use pattern of mine lease is given in Table-4.1, the land use
pattern at the end of five years is given in Table-4.2 and the land use pattern at
the end of mine life is given in Table-4.3.
TABLE-4.1
PRESENT LAND USE PATTERN OF MINE LEASE
Forest Private Inhabited Others Total

Land Land Land
(b) Dumps of ore, - - - - Nil
waste & O.B.
(c) Tar road, foot 2.50 - - - 2.50*
track, structures
(d) Habitation - - 0.6660 - 0.6660
(e) Others (intact)
(i) Forest land 133.0842 - - - 133.0842
Total occupied 135.5842 36.4932 0.6660 - 172.7434
area
(g) Area backfilled by applicant – Nil (h) Area afforested by applied – Nil (* PDW Road)
TABLE-4.2

Land Land Land
(a) Pits & Quarries 14.00 - - - 14.00
waste & O.B.
(c) Infrastructure 5.00 - - - 5.00*
including of office,
Tar Road, Haulage,
Foot Track
(d) Habitation - - 0.6660 - 0.6660
(e) Others (intact)
(i) Forest land 116.5842 - - - 116.5842
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-4.3

Land Land Land
(a) Pits & Quarries 109.0 - - - 109.0
waste & O.B.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment

Land Land Land
(c) Infrastructure 7.50 - - - 7.50
Tar Road, Haulage,
Foot Track
(e) Others (intact)
(i) Forest land 19.0842 - - - 19.0842
(f) Area to be backfilled by mine owner: Nil, (g) Area to be afforested by mine owner 20.0 ha
4.3.3 Impact on Climate
4.3.3.1 Temperature
The average monthly minimum and maximum temperatures are monitored at the
proposed site and also analyzed based on the data from nearest IMD station at
Sundarnagar. The trends of temperatures show a regular cyclic pattern. The
temperature pattern indicates a regional behavior and is thus not likely to be
affected by proposed limestone and shale mining. Any local temperature increase
due to operation of mining machinery and blasting will be moderated by the
proposed green belt programme.
 Rainfall
The average annual rainfall in the region is 1497.8 mm as per IMD data of
Sundarnagar. Any changes in the pattern of rainfall will be on regional scale
because of cumulative reasons. The operation of mine will not have any adverse
effect on the rainfall pattern of the area.
 Wind Speed
The wind speeds of any area depend on the existence of elevations and
depressions in the region. The proposed mine operation will have minor change in
topography and creation of structures in mine area and its immediate vicinity.
Due to change in the topography of the project area minor variations are
envisaged at local level.
 Humidity
The relative humidity in the area is not likely to change because of the
construction operations, as it will not cause any changes in the prevailing
temperatures and rainfall of the region.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
4.3.3.2 Drainage
area. There are number of seasonal nalas seen within. All the nalas recharge
during the rainy season and ultimately merge with the Satluj river.
4.4 Impact on Air Quality
The air pollution impact of limestone mines depends on the intensity of ore
extraction operations, mode of transport and mode of screening of ore. The
intensity of operation is directly related to the rate of production of ore from
mining. Production details reported in Chapter-2. Similarly, drills, shovels,
dumpers of different capacities are engaged mainly for extracting and
transporting the ore from the mining areas. The details of the equipment are
given in Chapter-2 and the sources are discussed below.
 Drilling
Drilling will be done by blast holes by drilling 150-165 mm dia DTH drill machine.
Drilling operations are mainly carried out during day time.
 Blasting
Blasting operations raise a cloud of dust, though momentary. This can be

controlled by monitoring charge per hole, charge per round, angle of holes, choice
of delays, blasting pattern and blast timings and sub-grade drilling etc. Heavy
blasting of 50 to 60 holes shall be carried out on daily basis. Proper safety
measures shall need to be taken at the time of blasting.
 Transportation of Ore
The entire limestone excavated from this mine will be fed to Jaypee Himachal
Cement Plant (JHCP). The blasted mass is loaded by hydraulic excavator of 3.5
cum bucket capacity. The mine is situated at a distance of about 0.5-km from the
plant. The limestone will be transported to the plant by closed belt and pipe
conveyor system.
Further, along both sides of this closed belt and pipe conveyor green belt will be
developed by to control the spread of airborne dust and for noise attenuation.
Thus the pollution load due to increase in capacity on transportation is greatly
reduced.
 Ore Loading
The ore after crushing and sizing at in pit crushing plant is transported to cement
plant through closed belt and pipe conveyor system.
Of the above sources, drilling, blasting, excavation and transportation through

dumper and crushing plant are the major sources, which are of significance.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
Water sprinkling arrangements at the appropriate places will be provided to

contain the emissions.
The proposed project of lime stone mining activities are likely to contribute
additional Particulate Matter (PM), dust from area sources and Oxides of Nitrogen
(NOx) and hydrocarbons from automobile exhaust. The existing baseline
concentrations of pollutants are within the limits prescribed by CPCB for
industrial/mixed areas and for rural/residential areas.
Air pollution sources at the proposed project of mining site can be classified into
three categories, viz., area sources, line sources and instantaneous point sources.
Extraction of lime stone by various activities in mining area is considered as an
area source. Transportation of ore from mining area to the crusher is considered
as line source. Blasting is usually done by deep holes. Blasting in the proposed
mining will be conducted through deep blast holes and blasting will be carried out
during day time.
From the mine, ore will be transported by 35 T capacity rear dump trucks to the
crushing plant. PM and NOx emissions are envisaged during blasting and
transportation operations. But these will be kept under control by monitoring
regularly, the emissions from exhaust and by sprinkling of water on haul roads
etc.
Even though blasting generates NOx it will be instantaneous and intermittent.

Also, NOx emission from the vehicular movement on surface would be intermittent
and getting dispersed quickly.
A large quantity of dust will be wind borne due to blasting but due to the existing
and the proposed plantation around the mine the spread of dust will be arrested.
The sources of pollutants are given in Table-4.4.
TABLE-4.4
SOURCES OF POLLUTANTS
Sr. No Source Type of Pollutant

1 Mining activity, (drilling, blasting, loading & PM, NOx
crushing)
2 Sorting of ore and loading PM
3 Transportation of sorted ore PM, NOx
4.4.1 Impacts of Mining Activities
4.4.1.1 Impacts from Area Sources
As discussed in Chapter-2, the area sources include mine pit and its activities
covering drilling, blasting, hauling and loading /unloading.
The dust emissions from the above areas will be fugitive in nature and maximum
during summer season (when the wind velocities are likely to be high) and almost
nil during the monsoon season. The dust emissions are likely to be confined to
the mine premises only.
Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
Drilling will be done with latest drill machines thus the likelihood of dust emission
from drilling activities is negligible. The gaseous emissions like Oxides of Nitrogen
from the blasting activity will be instantaneous and will prevail for shorter
duration. Hence, the impact due to blasting will be instantaneous and there will
not be any long-term adverse impacts.
Similarly, the excavator operations, loading and unloading operations will cause
dust generation. The dust generated will be confined to the area of operation of
the excavator and will not have any adverse impact on the community. The
gaseous emissions from these operations will also be negligible and limited to the
mine.
4.4.1.2 Line Sources and their Impact
Transportation of ore/waste from the mine pit to the primary crusher unit are
covered under line source. It can be observed that the contribution from the
dumper movement on the haul road will be confined to the mine area only and
will not have any adverse impact on the community.
The dumper movement will cause emission of particulate matter. However, this
will be fugitive in nature and will be restricted to the proximity of the haul road
only.
Further, the truck wheels are likely to cause pollution in terms of dust. However,
with the inception of truck washing system, this is going to be minimized.
4.4.1.3 Impact due to Instantaneous Emission Sources and their Impact
Blasting is the major source of instantaneous emission sources. Blasting in the

mining will be conducted through deep blast holes and will be carried out during
day time only.
PM and NOx emissions are envisaged during these blasting operations. But, these
are kept under control by sprinkling of water on haul roads and monitoring
regularly the emissions from exhaust etc.
The large quantity of dust will be wind borne due to blasting. The proposed
greenbelt around the mine, the spread of dust will be arrested. Even though
blasting generates NOx, it will be instantaneous and intermittent.
4.4.1.4 Fugitive Emissions
The fugitive emissions are mainly generated while loading the raw material at
mine face, transportation of ore and while unloading. Automatic water sprinklers
will be installed at crusher hopper and pressurized water is sprinkled. The dust on
haul roads will be suppressed through regular water sprinkling. The fugitive
emission generated during drilling is controlled by using dust collectors with
vacuum suction to the drilling machines.
With the proposed control measures, the fugitive emissions will be insignificant in
terms of their impact on environment.
Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
4.4.1.5 Air Pollution Impact Prediction through Modelling
 Details of Mathematical Modeling
For prediction of maximum Ground Level Concentrations (GLC’s), the air

dispersion modeling software (AERMOD version 7.1.0) was used. AERMOD is
steady state advanced Gaussian plume model that simulates air quality and
deposition fields upto 50 km radius. AERMOD is approved by USEPA and is widely
used software. It is an advanced version of Industrial Source Complex (ISCST3)
model, utilizes similar input and output structure to ISCST3 sharing many of the
same features, as well as offering additional features. The model is applicable to
rural and urban areas, flat and complex terrain, surface and elevated releases
and multiple sources including point, area, flare, line and volume sources.
Dispersion modeling using AERMOD requires hourly meteorological data. Site

specific data recorded during post monsoon and partly winter season 2015 is
used for executing modeling studies. The site specific meteorological data is
processed using AERMET processor.
 Model Set-up
The model set-up details are presented in Table-4.5 below for proposed
172.7434 ha mining blocks with a production capacity of 4.0 MTPA.
TABLE-4.5
MODEL SET-UP
Sr. No. Parameter Details
1 Model Name AERMOD (Version 7.1.0)
2 Model Type Steady state Gaussian Plume Air
Dispersion model
3 Topography Hilly, Forest
4 Averaging Time 24 hours
5 Source Type Point, area and line sources
6 Boundary Limits 10 km X 10 km
7 Co-ordinate System Uniform Grid
8 Receptor Height 0
9 Anemometer 10 m
10 Surface meteorological data Site Specific data processed by AERMET
11 Upper air Data Upper air Estimator using AERMET
processor
 Model Input Data
The major dust generating sources include drilling, blasting, loading to dumpers
from excavators, wheel generated dust and wind erosion. The model input data is
presented in Table-4.6.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
TABLE-4.6
EMISSION FACTORS USED FOR MODELING
Sr. No. Activity Emission Factor Equations Emission Factor

1 Blasting 7.6 E-2 LB/Tonne stone 0.0342 kg/tonne
2 Drilling 8.0 E-5 LB/Tonne stone 0.000036 kg/tonne
3 Hauling 6.2 E-0 LB/Mile 2.79 kg/mile
4 Truck loading 1.0 E-4 LB/Tonne stone 0.000045 kg/tonne
5 Truck unloading 1.6 E-4 LB/Tonne stone 0.000072 kg/tonne
Reference: Environmental Protection Agency’s Compilation of Air Pollutant Emission Factors (AP42)
 Presentation of Results
The dispersion modelling results for particulate matter is given in Table-4.7.
TABLE-4.7
PREDICTED 24-HOURLY SHORT-TERM GROUND LEVEL INCREMENTAL
CONCENTRATIONS FOR PARTICULATE MATTER
Season Maximum Predicted Incremental Direction

Concentrations (g/m3)
Mine Lease Area ML Boundary
Post Monsoon 24.1 3.0 NE
The results indicate that the maximum incremental dust concentrations for
proposed mining will be about 24.1 µg/m3 within mine lease area and 3.0 µg/m3
at the mine lease boundary. Isopleths showing the incremental concentrations are
shown in Figure-4.1. The concentration will be further reduced farther from mine
area.
4.5 Cumulative Predicted Impacts due to Industries in Study Area
4.5.1 Cumulative Modeling for nearby Industries located within 10 km radius
The list of industries already existing within 10 km from the mine lease area
along with Isopleths are shown in Figure-4.2 and details of the same are
provided in Table-4.8.
TABLE-4.8
LIST OF INDUSTRIES IN 10 KM RADIUS
Sr. Industry Baga Block Bhalag Block Samtyari Block

No
1 Ambuja Cement Plant 6.7 km, SSE 6.9 km, S 9.2 km, SSE
2 Dharlaghat Limestone Mines 9.0 km, SE 8.7 km, SSE 11.1 km, SSE
(Ambuja)
3 ACC Cement Plant 9.6 km, NNW 9.4 km, NW 6.9 km, NW
4 ACC LS Mine 9.2 km, NNW 8.9 km, NW 6.5 km, NW
5 Existing Mine of JHCP Adjacent
6 JHCP Cement Plant Adjacent

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
In the present case, model simulations have been carried for post monsoon and
partly winter season using the hourly Joint Frequency data viz. stability, wind
speed, mixing height and temperature. For the short-term simulations, the
Ground Level Concentrations (GLCs) were estimated around 441 receptors to
obtain an optimum description of variations in GLCs over the site within 10 km
radius covering 16 directions. The predicted 24 hourly short term concentrations
are given in Table-4.9.
TABLE-4.9
CUMULATIVE INCREMENTAL CONCENTRATIONS
DUE TO THE INDUSTRIES IN STUDY AREA (10 KM RADIUS)
Pollutant Incremental Direction NAAQS

Concentration (g/m3)
PM10 30.76 NW 100
It may be understood that the emissions due to the operating industries in 10 km

radius area have already been covered in baseline air quality. The incremental
concentration of proposed mining blocks will be well within the limits of NAAQS
2009.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
FIGURE-4.1
SHORT TERM GLCs OF PM DUE TO MINING OPERATIONS

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
FIGURE-4.2
CUMULATIVE INCREMENTAL CONCENTATION OF PM
DUE TO OPERATING INDUSTRIES

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
4.4.2 Air Pollution Management
Mitigative measures suggested for air pollution controls are based on the baseline
ambient air quality of the area. From the point of view of maintenance of an
acceptable ambient air quality in the region, it is desirable that air quality is
monitored on a regular basis to check compliance of standards as prescribed by
CPCB. In case of non-compliance, appropriate mitigation measures need to be
checked.
 Measures to Prevent Generation and Dispersal of Dust
Dust particles, which are normally generated during mining operations, become
air borne, thus leading to increase in PM level in the ambient air. In the proposed
mining activity adequate control measures would be adopted during mining
operations. The control measures to be adopted are:
 Regular sprinkling of water on the haulage roads within the ML area to reduce
the dust generation due to traffic on haul roads;
 Water will be sprayed on the ore during crushing and loading; and
 Water sprays will be used on coarse ore stock piles for reducing dust
generated during fall of ore from the conveyors.
 Overall Impact due to the Mine
As discussed above under each activity, there will be increase in terms of dust
load and gaseous emissions. However, it can be stated that these incremental
contributions will be confined to the mining area and its surroundings and will not
have any adverse impact on the outside community. Further, the mitigation
measures as described in the end of this Chapter will further bring down these
concentrations making the proposed mining activities more environmental
friendly.
4.5 Impact on Water Resources and Quality
The water is required in mining operations for water sprinkling on haul roads and
feeder roads, service center, dust suppression at loading yard, autoshop,
greenbelt development and domestic purposes in mine.
4.5.1 Impact on Water Resources
Water required to cater the need for drinking purpose, dust suppression at faces
and on haul roads, cleaning and washing of HEME, crushing plant and plantation
etc. The requirement of water for mining is about 150 m3/day. The source of
water shall be from the Satluj river that flows at a distance of about 2.5 km from
the ML area. Water will be used for spray on haul roads, plantation, cleaning and
washing of machineries and toilets etc.
No wastewater will be generated after water spraying at faces and along haul
roads, for dust suppression. The water gets absorbed by the ground, percolates
through porous strata or run down, or gets evaporated. Only the limited quantity

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
of water will be used under high pressure for washing and cleaning of HEME in
the work shop/garage. The oil & grease traps will be provided to arrest any
petroleum products. This water will be used for plantation, therefore, no recycling
of water required in the mines.
Considering the availability of surface water in the area vis-à-vis the

consumption, the impact of withdrawal of surface water for various uses
mentioned above will be insignificant.
 Water Regime
 Surface Water
The area exhibits a typically rugged undulating topography. The proposed mining
area forms a plateau in some parts with the flanks dipping steeply forming
practically vertical scarps.
area. There are number seasonal nalas seen within. All the nalas recharge during
the rainy season and ultimately merge with the Satluj river. Physiography and
drainage map of the Solan district is given in Figure–4.3.
 Underground Drainage
There is no water table exists in the mining lease. This has been proved by the
exploratory drills. There is no return water during the drilling process this means
there is no water table exists upto the level 1000 mRL. Limestone or rejects in
the deposit do not contain any harmful ingredient. Requirement of water for
mining complex is only 150 m3/day in dry season, which shall be met from the
plant water supply scheme. No adverse effect on water table and quality of
ground water is, therefore, anticipated while mining or any kind of leaching.
 The effect of large scale mining on hydrological conditions

The mining operations are not expected to have any impact on the ground water
in the area, as the mining operations will not touch the ground water table during
the mine life.
4.5.2 Impact of Mining on Surface Water
The mining activity, as per the conceptual mine plan is proposed to be confined to
an area of 109.0 ha out of 172.7434 ha of the lease area. The ultimate depth of
the mining will be at the elevation of 1050 m for Baga block from the original
elevation of 1620 m and for Samtiyari block original elevation of 1360 m. The
general land surface is at the elevation of 610 m msl at Sutlej river and depth to
water is 5 to 10 m below the general land surface. A hydrogeological section has
been shown in Figure-4.4, which shows the configuration of water table across
the core zone and elevation of mining area.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
ML Area
FIGURE-4.3
PHYSIOGRAPHY AND DRAINAGE MAP OF THE SOLAN DISTRICT

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
FIGURE-4.4
HYDROGEOLOGICAL SECTION

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
The mining lease area does not have any major stream channel or nala, except
few streamlets having very small catchment area within lease area. There is
therefore no stream flowing in the mining area requiring any diversion. With the
future mining operation being confined to the main two limestone hills Baga and
Bhalag (about 1.5 km away from each other), surface water resources are not
affected as it does not disturb the drainage pattern of the area except in an area
of 14.0 ha during first five years of the plan period and ultimately 109.0 ha during
mine closure stage.
It is therefore apparent that there will be hardly any impact of mining on the
surface water regime. With a view to stop the silt content, generated due to
mining with surface water which ultimately joins Sutlej river, it is proposed that
adequate number of check dams will be constructed on the streamlets and silt will
be deposited in the check dam and only silt free water will be allowed to flow
down.
4.5.3 Impact on Ground Water Quality
Baga block and from 1360 m above MSL in Samtiyari block. The ultimate pit limit
at depth for the mining operations at present is envisaged at 1050 m above MSL,
which is well above the existing water table in the area. Thus, the water table is
not likely to be encountered in the course of mining operations.
It is therefore concluded that there will not be any impact of mining on ground
water as the mining will be mostly above the water table.
Similarly, there will not be any impact on the ground water resources of buffer
zone due to mining activity as the ground water of the buffer zone is hardly
exploited by tube wells or open wells except for drinking use by way of few hand
pumps and few springs. The mining activities are confined to the level well above
the ground water table. Thus the mining operation will not affect the hydrological
conditions of the area. The water balance is shown in Table-4.10 and water
balance diagram is shown in Figure-4.5.
TABLE-4.10
WATER REQUIREMENT
Sr. No Particulars Quantity (m3/day)

1 Domestic for prinking purpose 05
2 Dust Suppression 100
3 Mine Operations (wet drilling) 02
4 Greenbelt Development 20
5 Misc. & utilities 19
6 Mechanical workshop 04
Total 150
Source: Mine Plan

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
From
Satluj River
150
5 100 2 20 4 19
Dust Mine Greenbelt Mechanical Misc &

Drinking
Suppression Operations Development Workshop Utilities
Note :
3
All Values are in m /day
FIGURE-4.5
WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
4.5.4 Rain Water Harvesting
The proposed mining area forms a plateau in some parts with the flanks dipping
steeply forming practically vertical scarps. The area has a number of seasonal
nalas seen within. All the nalas recharge during the rainy season and ultimately
merge with the Satluj River.
There are total 44 No’s of gully plugs, stones masonry Gabion Structures, Check
dams (C1 to C44) and retaining walls (R0 to R6) have already been constructed
in and around the cement plant area and also in downstream of Baga-Bhalag
Nallahs in nearby ML area. These preventive steps have been taken up as per the
guidelines of CS & WRTI, Chandigarh to avoid any flow of silts downstream in
River Satluj. Such type of gully plugs and gabion structures is proposed in the
applied area. All the mined out material is proposed to consumed for cement
manufacturing process and there will be no general of waste material. No waste
material from mining operation will flow into Bhalag/Baga nallah and Satluj river.
Photographs of existing check dams and retaining walls are shown in Figure-4.6.
Typical rain water structures are shown in Figure-4.7 to Figure-4.9.
Photographs of the existing rain water structures are shown in Figure-4.10.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
Dam constructed at Village Challan
FIGURE-4.6
PHOTOGRAPHS OF EXISTING CHECK DAMS AND RETAINING WALLS

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
FIGURE-4.7
RECHARGE SYSTEM FOR ADMINISTRATIVE BLOCK

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
FIGURE-4.8
RECHARGE SYSTEM FOR WORKSHOP
FIGURE-4.9
RECHARGE SYSTEM FOR PAVED ROAD THROUGH RECHARGE TRENCH

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
ROOF TOP RAIN WATER HARVESTING SYSTEM
RAIN/STORM WATER CHANNEL DRAIN HOLES
FIGURE-4.10
PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE EXISTING RAIN WATER STRUCTURES
Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
4.6 Impact on Noise Levels and Ground Vibrations
4.6.1 Noise Impact Analysis on Working Environment
In the mine site due to mining operations, deployment of mining machinery,

blasting operation and men, it is imperative that noise levels would increase.
However, as the mines is located less than 0.5 km from the nearest settlement,
the expected noise levels will have significant impact on the exiting ambient noise
levels in the residential areas and will have significant effect from the
occupational health point of view.
4.6.2 Noise Generated due to Drilling Operations
The drilling operations in the mine will be carried out by DTH drills with
compressor. In addition to the drillers hydraulic shovels are also expected to be in
operation. Noise levels expected at 1-m distance are given in Table-4.11.
TABLE-4.11
NOISE GENERATION DUE TO DRILLING
Sr. No. Name of the Equipment Noise Levels dB(A)

1 Wagon Drills 86.0
2 Shovel 89.0
The generated noise will be in the range of 86.0-89.0 dB (A) as given in Table-
4.11 and will be a worst case scenario. The noise levels in the working
environment are compared with the standards prescribed by Occupational Safety
and Health Administration (OSHA) which in-turn are being enforced by
Government of India through Model rules framed under the Factories Act. These
standards were established with the emphasis on reducing the hearing loss. It
should be noted that each shift being of 8 hr duration, equivalent noise level
exposure during the shift is 90 dB (A). It is observed that the noise generated
due to drilling are within the safety limit of 90 dB(A) for 8 hr exposure.
4.6.3 Impact due to Ground Vibrations
Ground vibration, fly rock, air blast, noise, dust and fumes are the deleterious
effects of blasting on environment. The explosive energy sets up a seismic wave
in the ground, which can cause significant damage to structures and disturbance
to human occupants. It causes major damages to the pit configuration too.
When an explosive charge is fired inside the blast hole, it is instantly converted
into hot gases, which exert intense pressure on the blast hole walls. A high
intensity shock waves propagate radially in all directions and cause the rock
particles to oscillate. This oscillation is felt as ground vibration. The proposed
mining operations using deep hole drilling and blasting using delay detonators are
bound to produce ground vibrations.
Blasting, in addition to easing the hard strata, generates ground vibrations and
instantaneous noise. Ground vibration from mine blasting is expressed by

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
amplitude, frequency and duration of blast. The variables, which influence ground
vibrations are controllable and non-controllable. The non-controllable variables
include general surface terrain and wind. Similarly, the controllable variables
include type of explosives, charge per delay, delay interval, direction of blast
progression, burden, spacing and specific charge and coupling ratio.
The oscillation of rock particles is called Particle Velocity and its maximum value
is called Peak Particle velocity (PPV), which is measured in millimeter per second.
The standards for safe limit of PPV are established by Director General of Mines
Safety (DGMS) for safe level criteria through Circular No. 7 dated 29/8/1997. The
safe level criteria PPV as mentioned in Circular No. 7 of DGMS is presented in
Table-4.12.
TABLE-4.12
PERMISSIBLE PEAK PARTICLE VELOCITY
All values are given in mm/sec
Type of Structure Dominant excitation Frequency
<8 Hz 8 – 25 Hz >25 Hz
A] Buildings/structures not belonging to the owner
Domestic houses/structures (Kuchha brick and cement) 5 10 15
Industrial Buildings (RCC and framed structures 10 20 25
Objects of historical importance and sensitive structures 2 5 10
A] Buildings belonging to the owner with limited life span
Domestic houses/structures (Kuccha brick and cement) 10 15 25
Industrial buildings (RCC & framed structures) 15 25 50
Source: DGMS Circular No. 7 dated 29/08/1997
As the distance increases the PPV value is likely to reduce. The ground vibrations
generated by blasting during the mining operations will be well within the
standards prescribed by DGMS for controlled blasting. Ground vibrations are not
likely to affect the structures in the vicinity of mine lease area.
By adopting controlled blasting, the problems will be greatly minimized at mines.

The impacts are also minimized by choosing proper detonating system, optimizing
total charge and charge/delay. Noiseless trunk delays to minimize the noise due
to air blast, non-electric (NONEL) system of blasting for true bottom hole
initiation, muffling mats to arrest the dust and fly rock will be adopted. Hence,
the impact due to ground vibration will be significantly reduced.
4.6.4 Noise Generated Due to Blasting
The noise levels during blasting operations are likely to be in the range of 120 to
130 dB(A) at the blast site. The noise levels tend to decrease with distance. As
the blasting is likely to last maximum for 5 minutes depending on the charge, the
noise levels over this time would be instantaneous and short in duration and
hence impact on noise levels from blasting are not envisaged.
4.6.5 Noise Generated due to Excavation and Transportation
The noise generated during excavation, loading and transportation activities due
to the proposed mine project are presented in Table-4.13.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
TABLE-4.13
NOISE DUE TO EXCAVATION/LOADING/TRANSPORTATION
Sr. Name of the Equipment Noise at Source

No dB(A)
1 Crusher (out side crusher cabin at drive end of LC) 100
2 Crusher (Inside cabin, door open) 86
3 Near Drill machine-1(when hole collar drilling) 104
4 Drill machine-1(after 3 m drilling) 103
5 Near Dumper (at full race) 92
6 Terex Dumper (at full race) 94
7 Near Haul road while dumpers are plying 88
8 Dozer (when dozing) 102
9 Hydraulic shovel 85
4.6.6 Noise due to Crushing, Screening and Loading Plant
The average noise levels generated due to proposed crushing activities will be
about 88.5 dB(A) which is below the 8 hr exposure limit of 90 dB(A). The
crushers in the mines will be housed in a shed. Hence, noise will be contained.
The average noise generated due to screening activities will be about 96.5 dB(A)
which is above the 8 hr exposure limit of 90 dB(A). The average noise due to the
loading activity will be about 75.8 dB(A) which is well below the 8 hr exposure
limit of 90 dB(A). Workers in the high noise generating areas will be provided
earplugs/earmuffs as safety precaution.
4.6.7 Noise Dispersion from the Mine
The noise generation from the mining activities will be from various sources,
which may originate from various locations. For the purpose of noise dispersion, it
is assumed that all the noise generating sources from the quarry as one source.
Hence, total noise from drilling, excavation, transportation, loading, and crushing
will be equal to 99.4 dB (A). The dispersion of this noise is computed by using the
model.
 Mathematical Model for Sound Wave Propagation During Operation
For an approximate estimation of dispersion of noise in the ambient from the

source point, a standard mathematical model for sound wave propagation is
used. The sound pressure level generated by noise sources decreases with
increasing distance from the source due to wave divergence. An additional
decrease in sound pressure level with distance from the source is expected due to
atmospheric effect or its interaction with objects in the transmission path.
For hemispherical sound wave propagation through homogenous loss free

medium, one can estimate noise levels at various locations, due to different
sources using model based on first principles, as per the following equation:
Lp2 = Lp1 - 20 Log (r2 / r1) .....(1)

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
Where Lp2 and Lp1 area Sound Pressure Levels (SPLs) at points located at
distances r2 and r1 from the source. The combined effect of all the sources then
can be determined at various locations by the following equation.
Lp (total) = 10 Log (10(Lp1/10) + 10 (Lp2/10)

+ 10 (Lp3/10)
……) ..… (2)
Where, Lp1, Lp2, Lp3 are noise pressure levels at a point due to different sources.
Based on the above equations a user-friendly model has been developed. The
details of the model are as follows:
 Maximum number of sources is limited to 200;

 Noise levels can be predicted at any distance specified from the source;
 Model is designed to take flat or undulating terrain;
 Coordinates of the sources in meters;
 Maximum and Minimum levels are calculated by the model;
 Output of the model in the form of isopleths; and
 Environmental attenuation factors and machine corrections have not been
incorporated in the model but corrections are made for the measured L eq
levels.
4.6.8 Input to the Model
Major noise sources as cumulative noise source has been identified and noise
levels expected are presented in Table-4.11. From the noise sources in the
proposed mines, co-ordinates have been defined with respect to the mine. For
convenience of the contours, 100 m grid scale is chosen.
An attempt has been made to predict the noise levels at the boundary of the
proposed mining site. Coordinates X and Y are taken as input to the model is
correlated with grid size and scale (1:100 m). Thus, the center of the mining area
is defined as 0,0 coordinates. The input to the model has been taken as the
cumulative noise of noise generating sources.
4.6.9 Noise Impact Analysis on Community
The contours and the noise levels obtained by modeling are presented in Figure-
4.11. From the contours, it is observed that higher noise levels will be confined
to work zone areas only. It can be seen that noise levels get diffused rapidly with
distance. The predicted noise levels indicate that the noise contours of 35 dB (A)
occurs within the mine lease area only at about 500-600 m from the center of the
source. Thus, there will not be an increment to the community ambient noise
levels.
In summary, it can be stated that only the noise impact due to mining on working
environment is relatively significant (equivalent levels are but likely to be within
limits), while the noise impact on community is insignificant.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
-1000 -800 -600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 800 1000
1000 1000
800 800
600 600
400 400
200 200
0 0
-200 -200
-400 -400
-600 -600
-800 -800
-1000 -1000
-1000 -800 -600 -400 -200 0 200 400 600 800 1000
FIGURE-4.11
NOISE DISPERSION TREND AROUND THE MINE

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
4.7 Impact on Soil
The environmental impact of the proposed mining activities on topsoil are based
on the nature of activities, extent of area covered and associated aspects of
environmental concern. The dust generated during blasting operations, loading
and unloading operations and vehicular movements normally constitute heavier
particles that would readily settle on very small areas within the mining area
itself. On account of various associated activities there is increase in vehicular
traffic on these areas. These may generate additional particulate emissions.
Generation of particulate emissions is therefore, of primary concern.
Another important aspect is soil erosion on the hill slopes, if not managed
properly. The existing and the proposed plantation of the number of exotic
species will be an effective insulation of nearby areas to arrest soil erosion on the
hill slopes. A detailed slope study will be conducted by CIMFR at the time of mine
operation.
Temporary Storage and Utilization of Top Soil
Scree generation was proposed to be used for construction of haul roads, service
roads, ramps and its maintenance. The excess quantity generated was proposed
to be dumped in the valley portion.
 Control Erosion/Sedimentation of Water Courses
As permanent preventive measures in the mining area, proposals are made to

control the quality of water flowing out of the mining area during monsoons.
The strata within the area mainly consist of limestone, shale and dolomite. Most
of the strata except shale is hard and compact in nature. Limestone benches haul
roads and ramps shall be developed and constructed mostly in hard strata and as
such loose material slopes are not anticipated. The slopes, whether at
faces/benches or by the side of haul roads shall be in hard strata.
There is no watercourse in the applied lease area except seasonal streams, which
get charged as and when it rains.
Suitable arrangement shall be made for controlling of erosion in the benches etc.
For protection of sedimentation of watercourse, plantation shall be done all along
the slope of the hill, if necessary check dams shall also be constructed.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
 Treatment and Disposal of Water from Mine
No water will be generated due to mining activities except rain water. A drainage
system is proposed to be made to carry away the rain water of the catchments
area surrounding the working. No pollution of this water is anticipated as neither
the limestone nor the rejects there in contain any harmful ingredient, thereby not
affecting the quality of water going downstream by mining operations.
4.8 Impact on Flora and Fauna
The baseline flora and fauna has been described in Section-3.9 of Chapter-3.
The major ecologically sensitive aspects pertaining to the proposed project site
are the forest areas and the faunal diversity in the adjoining areas. The most
important and sensitive area are the two wildlife sanctuaries which harbours
schedule-I species. These protected areas falls within the study area although the
core area does not harbour any schedule-I species.
Impacts on Flora
Introduction of obnoxious or exotic species and increase in weed frequencies is an

important threat to the ecosystem functioning. These species might overwhelm
the local biodiversity and thus eliminate local species occurring in the adjoining
forest areas. There is likeliness of introducing exotic species due to proposed
mining activity. Influx of humans and regular human movement from the project
area and the adjoining areas may result in introduction of obnoxious species. The
vehicular movement and road traffic also sometimes results in introduction of
unwanted species. Air emissions and increase in dust may also result in restricted
growth, regeneration and degradation of sensitive vegetation. These alterations
will have low impacts in the future course of proposed development, thus the
impacts will be low from ecosystem functioning point of view.
Impacts on Fauna
All the species occurring in the study area have large species range and there is
no occurrence of endemic species in the core zone. Furthermore, the core project
area and the adjoining areas share similar habitat and thus clearing of ground will
not eliminate habitat of any species permanently. If the project activities are not
regulated, potential negative impacts can be anticipated on the fauna due to
increase in noise levels, deterioration of air emissions, increase in dust levels,
degradation of vegetation, elicit hunting and road kills.
Impacts on Water Bodies
There are small streams, springs and rivulets in the study area which join
together and connect to the Satluj River which is one of the large rivers of the
region. These water bodies harbour freshwater fish species, which may face
threat in the future due to water usage by the project. The mining activity may
result in hydro-geological changes and indirectly may affect the flow pattern of

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
surface aquifers and lotic water bodies thus this aspect may be considered a
potential impact.
Impacts on Ecosystem
The proposed activity may result in vegetation clearing of large surface areas of
land, might result in degradation of surrounding habitat, introduction of weeds,
increased road traffic, habitat fragmentation and wildlife poaching and forest
fires. These activities may act at the larger level and reduce ecosystem resilience.
Ecosystem resilience is the overall diversity of the habitat, which helps to resist
the adverse conditions and or calamities that may seriously damage that
particular habitat. The proposed mine lease area may impose negative ecological
attributes and might result in overall reduction in ecosystem resilience of the
habitat if the activities are not managed properly.
Cumulative Impacts
It is important to take into account a holistic view for better representation of the
predicted impacts of the proposed project. This requires a consideration of
cumulative impacts of existing and past developmental activities in the vicinity of
the project. The addition of present proposed project with the earlier large and
small-scale activities shall give cumulative impacts. This may further be analysed
by adding the proposed and predicted developmental activities in the near future
if known. Existence of other mines and cement plants attribute to overall high
disturbance to the ecosystems. The secondary impacts that occur are due to
increase in human pressure result in tree cutting, lopping, cattle grazing and
absence of large mature trees.
Mitigation Measures
The anticipated impacts due to air, water and noise and soil have been mitigated
by adhering to the norms of respective regulatory guidelines and using best
practices in the industry.
Considering the proximity of the proposed project to the two Wildlife Sanctuaries
and the anticipated impacts, a Wildlife Conservation Plan and a green belt
development will be prepared to mitigation any residual impacts.
4.9 Impact on Land Use Pattern
4.9.1 Land Use Pattern in Buffer Zone
No adverse impact is anticipated in land use of buffer zone due to the proposed
mining operations, as all the concerned activities will be concentrated in the core
zone only in ML areas.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
4.9.2 Land use Pattern in Core Zone
The active mining area will be biologically reclaimed to protect soil erosion at the
abandoning stage of mine.
Care will be taken to disturb minimum vegetation. Adequate compensatory

afforestation in lieu of forest land.
4.10 Impact on Socio - Economic Aspects
This section of the chapter deals with the demographic, social and economic
impact of the proposed project and more importantly on the villages of project
periphery.
Acquisition of land for proposed mine lease area is under process. The company
shall pay compensation to all the project affected persons for acquisition of their
land, houses and other immovable property. Rehabilitation and Resettlement
grants and other benefits shall be paid to the eligible families, including those
belonging to the schedule cast category, as per the State Rehabilitation and
Resettlement Policy.
However, the project is expected to have following impacts on demographic,

socio-economic and health conditions of the study area.
4.10.1 Impact on Population Growth
 Increase of Migration
The proposed mining operation has an impact on the population growth of the
project area and especially in Baga, Bhalag and Samtiyari villages due to
migration of workers. The trend is expected to continue as it would provide
considerable direct and indirect employment to the families from the nearby
villages. There will be employees from outside may take up jobs in the proposed
mines and with migration of their families, an increase in the population is
anticipated.
The very important and naturally expected change in demography as single

person families especially men, who have migrated in to the Baga, Bhalag and
Samtiyari villages for employment is observed.
Due to this trend there will be an expected change in social and emotional
support system existed in family as a social institution.
Increase of Number of Households
There is a distinguishable change observed in the analysis is the number of

families have increased very significantly from 64 households in 2001 to 174 in
2011 in Baga, Bhalag and Samtiyari Villages, in which the mine is located.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
The very important impact to be noted is that these are mostly nuclear or single
men families, which are very expectable, change social change in industrial area.
Adverse Impact on Sex Ratio
Similarly the male population in Baga village has increased from 390 in 2001 to
1073, which had major impact on the male-female sex ratio and size of the
household. The trend is expected to have its impact on social, behavioral as well
as the health condition of these single migrant workers.
Population Growth Control
The CSR initiated by the project proponent has shown visible impact on health
education, improved literacy and age of marriage, which has impact on size of
family. The study area had a very marginal growth of population in the 10 km of
project study area, except the Baga village, in the last decade and the same
efforts are expected to continue.
The demographic profile of project core area and within 3 km radius is expected
to become urban in nature due to industrialization and would create small and
nuclear families.
4.10.2 Impact on Civic Amenities, Educational and Heath Care Facilities
The existing project has created desirable civic amenities in the area. The PAFs
and the population from the surrounding villages are getting social benefits in the
form of education, drinking water, sanitation, roads, communication facilities,
transportation, marketing, banking, postal services, and health facilities directly
and indirectly. The project located, Baga village of Mangal Panchayat, is
converted to non-backward village from the backward village category (Annexed:
Government of Himachal Pradesh Planning department notification number PLG
(BASP)/2012-13(Misc.)).
The proposed limestone and shale mining project will also be committed to
continue improving the civic amenities and providing the services, thus impacting
on the socio-economic development of the population. Photographs of existing
CSR Initiatives are given in Figure-4.12.
4.10.3 Impact on Economic Aspects
The proposed mines further would be instrumental in improving the financial

resources of the surrounding population.
The proposed mine will create direct employment in the mine and indirect
employment opportunities, through ancillary units, to the population in the study
area as well as PAFs.
Direct Employment
In the proposed mine the local population is the largest group among the
employees, the employment potential ameliorates economic conditions of these
Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
families directly. Local people will be given preference in the proposed project for
employment under semi-skilled and un-skilled categories. Thus the people in and
around the mine area are directly will be benefited economically.
Indirect Employment
The projects had already encouraged and will also further encourage in setting up
of various micro enterprises/petty trade/business and provide utility services for
benefiting people around the mining areas.
This would provide employment to many other families indirectly who are
involved in business and service oriented activities. This in-turn will improve the
socio-economic conditions of the area.
4.10.4 Impact on Rehabilitation of Human Settlements
Acquisition of land for proposed mine lease area is under process. The company
shall pay compensation to all the project affected persons for acquisition of their
land, houses and other immovable property. Rehabilitation and Resettlement
grants and other benefits shall be paid to the eligible families, including those
belonging to the schedule cast category, as per the State Rehabilitation and
Resettlement Policy.
4.11 Impact on Places of Tourist/Religious/Historical Importance
There are no places of historical importance in the near vicinity. Hence, no

adverse impact is anticipated on any place of historical importance due to mining
operations.

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
WIDENING & UP-GRADATION OF PWD ROAD TO NH-STANDARD
FIGURE-4.12
PHOTOGRAPHS OF EXISTING MINE – UPGRADATION OF PWD ROAD

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
4.12 Progressive Mine Closure Plan
 Mined Out Land
The ML area has a hilly topography with elevation of 1645 mRL at Baga block and
675 mRL in NW part of Samtyari Block. 14.00 ha shall be utilized by the end of
first five years of Progressive Mine Closure Plan. Land will be disturbed due to
mining.
 Mining Method
This will be an opencast, fully mechanized captive mine of JHCP. Mining will be
carried out by conventional method adopting deep hole drilling and multi row
deep hole blasting using milli second delay/ relay detonation system for loosening
of material and the loosened material will be handled and transported by an
excavator and dumper combination. The haul roads will be maintained at a
gradient of not more than 700. The bench height will be 10 m.
 Progressive Mine Closure Plan (PMCP)
The mine plan has been designed for the progressive closure of the mine, No
temporary discontinuance and abandonment is anticipated during the progressive
mine closure plan period. Therefore, no protective and rehabilitation measures
are proposed during this period. But during this period of PMCP a certain amount
shall be spent for protection of environment that is plantation, topsoil etc
management & other environmental aspects including monitoring of air, water,
noise quality etc. The abandonment cost estimated during the plan period is given
in Table-4.14.
TABLE-4.14(A)
ABANDONMENT COST ESTIMATED DURING FIRST YEAR
Rs.
1 2 3 4 5 6
slope of vallies

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment

Rs.
sampling
Monitoring (Core &
retaining walls)
Total 0.50 1000 15,40,000/- -
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-4.14(B)
ABANDONMENT COST ESTIMATED DURING SECOND YEAR
Rs.
1 2 3 4 5 6
slope of vallies
sampling
Monitoring (Core &
retaining walls)
Total 0.50 1000 15,40,000/- -
Source: Mine Plan

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment
TABLE-4.14(C)
ABANDONMENT COST ESTIMATED DURING THIRD YEAR
Rs.
1 2 3 4 5 6
slope of vallies
sampling
Monitoring (Core &
retaining walls)
Total 0.50 1000 15,40,000/- -
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-4.14(D)
ABANDONMENT COST ESTIMATED DURING FOURTH YEAR
Rs.
1 2 3 4 5 6

Chapter-4
Impact Assessment

Rs.
slope of vallies
sampling
Monitoring (Core &
retaining walls)
Total 0.50 1000 15,40,000/- -
Source: Mine Plan
TABLE-4.14(E)
ABANDONMENT COST ESTIMATED DURING FIFTH YEAR
Rs.
1 2 3 4 5 6
slope of vallies
sampling
Monitoring (Core &
Chapter-4
Impact Assessment

Rs.
retaining walls)
Total 0.50 1000 15,40,000/- -
Source: Mine Plan
The amount of financial assurance given, @ Rs. 25,000/- per ha, for the 19.0 ha
of utilized area at the end of plan period is Rs. 4,75,000/.
Reclamation and Rehabilitation Measures
The area will be progressively reclaimed and rehabilitated as and when areas are
devoid of lime stone come into being, after the exhaustion of limestone within the
area during life of mine.

Chapter-5
Environment Management Plan
5.0 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN
5.1 Introduction
The mining operations in proposed limestone and shale mine need to be inter-
twined with judicious utilization of non-renewable resources and within the limits
of permissible assimilative capacity of the region. The assimilative capacity of the
region is the maximum amount of pollution load that can be discharged into the
environment without affecting the designated use and is governed by dilution,
dispersion and removal due to physico-chemical and biological treatment.
The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is required to ensure sustainable

development in the region around the mining complex, hence it needs to be an all
encompassing plan for which the mining authorities, Government, regulatory
agencies like Central and State Pollution Control Boards, Indian Bureau of Mines
(IBM), etc. working in the region and more importantly the affected population of
the region need to extend their co-operation and contribution.
It has been anticipated that on the other hand that the region will not be affected
adversely with the proposed mining activity and will have new economic fillip for
the region as a whole. Mitigation measures at the source level and an overall
Management Plan at the regional level are elicited, so as to improve the
supportive capacity of the region and also to preserve the assimilative capacity of
the receiving bodies.
The environmental attributes, which are likely to be affected in the region, are
land use, topography, water resources, soil, air quality, socio-economic status,
ecology and public health.
The Management Action Plan aims at controlling pollution at the source level to
the extent possible, with the available and affordable technology, followed by
treatment measures before they are discharged. In addition to the mine specific
control measures, the proposed mine establishment will follow the following
guidelines:
 Adoption of Reuse and Recycling technologies to reduce generation of wastes

and optimize the production cost of the mine; and
 Progressive land reclamation measures.
It is to be appreciated that mining process is to a certain extent, an inevitable

destructive process, but the hazards are within measurable limits and can be
easily ameliorated to a significant extent.
The pollution sources anticipated in and around the mines are given in Chapter-2,
and the proposed environmental control measures are suggested in this chapter
for effective environment management at the mine site.

Chapter-5
5.2 Air Pollution Management
The potential sources of air pollution arising from the proposed mining operations
are drilling, blasting, top soil, haul roads, exhaust fumes of internal combustion
machines, combusting of domestic fuel oil and transportation of ore in the
vicinity. Air pollution caused by mining and associated activities can be classified
into the following categories:
 Gaseous pollutants (Nitrogen Oxides, Sulphur Dioxide and Carbon Monoxide);

and
 Particulate Matter.
The proposed level of mining is not anticipated to raise the concentration of the
pollutants beyond the prescribed limits of CPCB. However, the following control
measures are suggested to control the PM levels in ambient air.
5.2.1 Air Pollution Control Measures
The main sources of dust in the mining operations are:
1. Drilling operation;
2. Blasting;
3. Excavation and preparatory work in ore & waste;
4. Transportation of ore; and
5. Screening and loading operation.
 Drilling Operations
When blast holes are drilled the cuttings from the holes are flushed out of the
holes by passing the compressed air through drill rods and these cuttings are
allowed to fall outside the collar of the blast hole by means of blowers. The dust
thus generated during drilling is suppressed and allowed to settle in the form of a
cone near the collar of the blast hole itself by use of water during drilling so that
the air is not polluted by the blast hole drilling.
 Blasting
The air pollution during blasting is in the form of chemical gases produced during
the explosion and dust generated during the blast. Burden and spacing are
proposed to be kept at 3.5-4.0 m and 4.0-4.5 m. Milli second delay detonators
are proposed to be used to divide the resultant vibration package into a number
of small vibration level. Only one time blasting shall be practiced in a day in
Baga-Bhalag limestone mine & shale area. Total no. of holes to be drilled is
envisaged 35-40 in 2-3 no. of rows for fragmentation of limestone and shale per
day. The gases generated during explosion are not likely to contribute much to
air pollution as no such ill effects of the escaped gases are observed on
vegetation nor on the residents of the nearby townships or residential houses
near to the mines.

Chapter-5
 Excavation and Preparatory Work in Ore
During run-of-mine excavation during dry months some dust is generated.

However, since the Lime stone and top soil contain some natural moisture of the
order 2.0 to 2.5% not much dust is generated during shoveling and dozing
operations of blasted ore/waste even during dry season.
 Transportation of Ore
The blasted mass is loaded by 6 hydraulic excavator each of 3.5 cum bucket
capacity, the lime stone crushed at crusher in mines will be transported to the
plant by closed belt and pipe conveyor system to cement plant which is located
only 0.5 km away from the mine.
In every shift about 3 to 4 times and depending up on the road condition water
shall be sprinkled by taking utmost care to ensure that less water is consumed for
effective dust suppression keeping in view the water conservation aspects.
 Screening and Loading Operations
During ore processing water sprinklers will be operated at all possible points in
the proposed limestone and shale mines; thereby reducing the dust generation.
During stacking of lump and fines some dust may generate and arrangements
shall be made to ensure effective dust suppression by water spraying.
It is anticipated that the particulate matter settles down within the mining area
itself due to their higher specific gravity. The PM levels and dust fall rate within
the tolerable limits. The sparsely populated villages, which are at farther distance
from the active mining area do not encounter problem due to dust arising from
the proposed mining operations.
5.2.1.1 Additional Control Measures at Mining Area
Apart from the above additional control measures to be adopted for controlling air
pollution and dust emissions from the proposed mining activity are summarized
below:
 Proper maintenance of the heavy earth moving machinery and vehicles;

 Regular water sprinkling shall be carried out to suppress the dust on haul
roads, service roads and mining face by dumpers converted into water
sprinklers;
 The haul roads and service roads shall be graded to remove the accumulated
loose material;
 Mostly wet drilling shall be practiced. The dry drilling equipment should have
dust collection system;
 Drilling machines shall have sharp drill bits for drilling holes;
 Blasting should be carried out with optimum charge;
 Blasting operations will be carried out as per Circular no-8 of DGMS rules;
 Blasting should be avoided during high winds, night time and temperature
inversion periods;

Chapter-5
 During high winds, excavation operations should be suspended;

 The dumpers should not be overloaded so as to prevent spillage of the ore on
the roads during transportation;
 Good housekeeping shall be practiced at all the development and production
benches and at utility service places; and
 Good canopy greenbelt shall be developed around the mining area, which acts
as barrier between mining operation and outside mining area.
5.2.1.2 Control Measures at Mineral Processing Plants
 Water shall be sprinkled on the lime stone and shale during operations. The
atomized water sprinkler aided with compressed air at the point of lime stone
dumping platform should be installed;
 Greenbelt should be developed near loading units;
 The vehicles should be maintained properly and exhaust emission are to be

checked regularly; and
 Speed restrictions should be imposed on the vehicles to minimize the dust

generation.
Employees working at crushing plant, screening plant should be provided with the
respirators regularly.
5.3 Water Pollution
The action program to prevent surface water pollution focuses on prevention of

wash off and mine water directly flowing into nearby natural drainage channels.
Mining operations does not include washing/zigging and hence, there is no water
pollution envisaged. Further, adequate control measures have been adopted to
check not only the run-off water but also uncontrolled run-off water during
monsoon season.
5.3.1 Control Measures at Mines
The control measures to be adopted for controlling water pollution are as follows
 Proper drainage arrangements at mine should be maintained;

 Check Dams should be constructed where ever required;
 De-silting of following check dams should be done on regular basis;
 Degraded land should be stabilized by afforestation to prevent soil erosion;
 Buttress wall and contour trench should be provided and properly maintained;
 Contour bunding should be done before onset of monsoon.
The check dam should have the concrete lining with boulders wrapped in chain
link mesh. However the feasibility of constructing new check dams should be
studied further for the effective surface water pollution control.

Chapter-5
5.3.2 Water Pollution Sources

The main sources of water pollution due to mining operations are:
 Turbid flows of the streams flowing from the active mine areas, stock pile and
loading plant areas;
 Domestic sewage; and
 Discharge from service center and auto shops.
5.3.3 Wastewater Treatment
A small workshop is provided at existing mine site without washing facility will be
utilized. Washing of equipments will be done at Central Workshop located at Plant
Site. Sanitary wastewater which will be generated from toilets will be of negligible
quantity and a soak pit will be provided. No wastewater treatment facility has
been proposed in mine site.
5.3.4 Ground Water Pollution Control Measures
No wells or water bodies exists in and around the area except a small size
seasonal water pit. Seepage of rainwater along the bedding planes and joints give
rise to nala. These nalas dry up over a period of time after monsoon to be
recharged only with a fresh spell of rainwater from these nala flows down along
the nala to river Satluj. None of springs is seen within the area applied for mining
lease. A few tube wells exist alongside the road near village Baga. Water in these
tube wells has been encountered at the depth of nearly 50 m below the surface.
The surface level at these points is nearly 1100 m above MSL.
Baga block and from 1360 m above MSL in Samtiyari block and the ultimate pit
limit at depth for the mining operations at present is envisaged at 1050 m above
MSL, which is well above the existing water table in the area. Thus, the water
table is not likely to be encountered in the course of mining operations. Hence, no
adverse impact on the water table is envisaged while mining during the ensuing
mine plan period and at the abandonment of mine.
The sub-surface / ground water will not be encountered in the present and
conceptual mine plan period because the workings would always remain above
the ground. There is no mine water discharge from the said mining lease as there
is no use of water for the purpose of washing of mining machines at mine site.
The maintenance of mining machinery shall be carried out at plant site workshop.
However, regular monitoring of water levels and quality in the existing bore wells
in the vicinity will be carried out both with reference to areas spread and time
intervals so as to study the hydrodynamics of the strata.
The measures to be taken for water quality management are given below:
 Working benches will be kept free from loose overburden/waste material;

 Garland drains around the mine will be constructed to arrest silt from the
water flowing out of mining area;
 Periodical clearing of silt accumulation in drains;
Chapter-5
 Monitoring of water of garland drains;

 Direct precipitation of rain water in the mine in rainy season will be
channelised to garland drains via settling tanks. The same will be used for
horticulture after desilting; and
 Check dams will be constructed to prevent washing off loose sediments
Settling tanks will be constructed around quarry and crude ore stack to settle
loose sediments.
5.4 Noise and Vibration

5.4.1 Noise Abatement Measures
The following control measures shall be adopted to keep the ambient noise levels
well below the limits:
 Blast hole drilling shall be restricted to day time hours only;

 Proper and timely maintenance of mining machinery;
 Noise levels shall be controlled by using optimum explosive charge per delay
detonators and proper stemming to prevent blow out of holes;
 Speed of moving dumpers running in the mine shall be limited to moderate
speed to prevent undue noise as per DGMS circulars enforcing safety
standards;
 Provision of user friendly, soft type ear muffs/ear plugs to workers in noise
prone zones in the mine;
 The operator’s chamber shall be safely guarded from the noise pollution by
preventing it from the noise arising because of the machinery;
 The noise level generated by blasting is only momentary and is about 100-
120 dB (A); and
 Developing greenbelt on the sides of loading plant.
Apart from above, the following measures shall be taken to protect the workers
from exposure to higher noise levels:
 Provision of protective devices like ear muffs/ear plugs;

 Provision of sound insulated chambers for the workers deployed on machines
producing higher levels of noise like bulldozers, drills and dumpers etc.; and
 Reducing the exposure time of workers to the higher noise levels.
5.4.2 Ground Vibration Control Measures
The following measures shall be adopted to contain the Peak Particle Velocity
(PPV) due to blasting within the permissible limits.
 Proper blast design;

 Avoiding excess confinement of charges;
 Number of blast holes per delay shall be kept one;
 Proper stemming of holes shall always be carried out;
 Blasting shall be avoided during foggy whether and when wind velocity is
more than 25 km/hour;

Chapter-5
 The spacing to burden distance of 4.5:3.5 shall be used owing to the fractured
geological formation;
 Staggered pattern of blasting shall be adopted;
 Number of delays used per blast shall be more so as to reduce charge weight
per delay and creation of shock waves. In addition to this, wherever
confinement is more, like the corners of the block being blasted, belly holes,
etc. extra delay shall be provided. Each line of blast holes shall also being
divided to blast at two or more different timings by using delays;
 A delay of 8-10 milliseconds shall be adopted, as the strata are medium hard
with high frequency of jointing/fracturing;
 Blasting operations shall be carried out only during day time as per mine
safety guidelines;
 A safe distance of about 500 m from center of blasting should be maintained;
and
 During blasting, other activities in the immediate vicinity shall be temporarily
stopped.
Further, the proposed afforestation also helps in reducing the noise and vibration
level to some extent.4
5.4.3 Mitigation Measures for Noise Control
Controlling noise and ground vibration level due to blasting is important aspect in
the opencast mining considering the effect on the surrounding environment. The
noise level monitoring carried out in the residential areas has indicated that the
present daytime noise levels are below 55 dB (A). The noise will be generated by
drilling, blasting, movement of heavy machinery, crushing and air blast in the
active mining area. Air blast is caused due to unconfined or partially confined
explosion and detonating cords exposed in atmosphere. In addition, green belts
around the infrastructure will be established so as to contain the work zone noise
levels.
5.4.4 Vibration Abatement
The vibrations by the mechanical effects act on existing rocks and subject them
to tensile, compressive and shearing stresses, which spoil their mechanical
characteristics with an immediate consequence. The low intensity vibrations are
also caused due to the permanent installation like compressors and traffic.
Among all these, blasting is the major source of vibration.
Ground vibrations measured as peak particle velocity, depends mainly on
maximum charge/delay, distance of nearest structure and characteristic of
intervening strata. Out of the above three main factors, one can control only
maximum charge per delay to minimize ground vibrations.
The ground vibrations can cause:

 Land instability: Distorts working faces of benches and downfalls of the OB
/waste rock dumps;
 Cracks in buildings which are present in the mine premises, mine townships
and in the nearby villages; and

Chapter-5
 Psychological discomfort to human beings as well as to nearby fauna.
The blasting operations in the proposed mines will be carried out by deep hole
drilling and blasting using delay detonators, which are bound to reduce the
ground vibrations. Further, the ground vibrations will be controlled by using
modern shock tubes with delay non-electric detonators.
The measures adopted to contain the Peak Particle Velocity (PPV) due to blasting
should be within the permissible limits. Further, the ongoing afforestation
programme will reduce the noise and vibration level to some extent.
5.5 Reclamation and Rehabilitation
The strata within the lease area mainly consist of limestone, shale. Most of the
strata except shale and part of dolomite are hard and compact in nature.
Limestone benches haul roads and ramps shall be developed and constructed
mostly in hard strata and as such loose material slopes are not anticipated. The
slopes, whether at faces/ benches or by the side of haul roads shall be in hard
strata.
There is no pit shall be formed below the ground level on conceptual mine plan
period. Only relief shall be changed to make it flat ground and high plateau in the
Bhalag, Samtiyari and Baga mining blocks. Hence, there is no proposal for
backfilling of mined out area except reclamation and rehabilitation of abandoned
mining benches
During this mine plan period about 14.00 ha land shall be degraded by mining
and allied activities. No mining pit shall be exhausted upto the ultimate pit limit
during this mine plan period. Hence, there is no proposal for reclamation and
rehabilitation of mined out area.
During the mine plan period of five years as well as during the conceptual period,
no area shall be formed as pit. Only relief of the area shall change. Waste
material, if any encountered shall be utilized for construction of access road, haul
roads and rehabilitation of abandoned mining benches.
The mining area covering 172.7474 ha shall be gradually developed and mined
for limestone/ shale. It is estimated that by the end of life of the mine, entire
limestone and shale measured and indicated reserves in Bhalag, Samtiyari and
Baga blocks will be exhausted. Back filling is not envisaged as there is no
material available to reclaim.
The top of the dumping platform shall be flat and plants will be grown up after its
maturity.
Management
The following measures will be undertaken for waste management during

planning period of 5 year and beyond:
 Dumping of various size of materials in a mixture form for better stability;

Chapter-5
 Water sprinkling;
 Compaction;
 Leveling;
 Terracing at dead end;
 Construction of check dams;
 Development of garland drain & settling tank; and
 Plantation of local and pioneer species on the terraces with suitable
amendments arrived from soil quality studies.
5.6 Waste Dump Management
Dumping area for limestone/ shale boulders is not being provided for since the
entire production is being planned commensurate with expected rate of
consumption with a view to avoid re-handling the same and cost thereof. Crushed
limestone/ shale shall be taken to the crusher by dumpers.
Topsoil, if any shall be utilized to develop plantation on periphery and parts of

non-mineralized barren land, within the lease hold area to reduce impact of
airborne soil dust.
No Sub-grade limestone will be generated and hence no arrangement is required

for stacking. No overburden staking is required.
5.7 Soil Conservation
The limestone is out cropping so no top soil exist over the limestone. Topsoil if
any will be reused over the fully reclaimed benches and dumps for biological
growth in plantation schemes and filling the sapling pits.
5.7.1 Soil Erosion Control Measures
During monsoon season, there is possibility of washing off of loose materials

along the plateau slopes. Therefore, following precautionary measures will be
undertaken for controlling the wash off.
 Around the bench slope, terraces are proposed;
 Check dams are proposed along the lower contours which will be constructed
by boulders. During rain, water passes through the dams and wash-
off/sediments are arrested. Check dam will be cleared up by the help of dozer
or back-hoe; and
 Shrubs are proposed to be planted along the terraces to prevent erosion.
The environment management plan is shown in Figure-5.1.

Chapter-5
FIGURE-5.1
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

Chapter-5
5.8 Green Belt Development
5.8.1 Introduction
With rapid industrialization and consequent deleterious impact of pollutants on

environment, values of environmental protection offered by trees are becoming
clear. Trees are very suitable for detecting, recognizing and monitoring air
pollution effects. Monitoring of biological effects of air pollutant by the use of
plants as indicators has been applied on local, regional and national scale. Trees
function as sinks of air pollutants, besides their bio-esthetical values, owing to its
large surface area. Annual need of oxygen for one person is met by 150 m 2 of
leaf surface i.e. 30-40 m2 of greenery. So it is necessary to develop green belt in
and around the polluted site with suitable species to combat the air pollution
effectively.
The plantation development not only functions as foreground and background

landscape features resulting in harmonizing and amalgamating the physical
structures of the mines with surrounding environment, but also acts as pollution
sink as indicated above. Thus, implementation of afforestation program is of
paramount importance. In addition to augmenting present vegetation, it will also
check soil erosion, make the ecosystem more complex and functionally, stable and
make the climate more conducive.
5.8.2 Plantation Programme
The main aim of plantation in and around the mine areas is to stabilize the land
to protect it from rain and wind erosion. As the leftover working area shall
contain broken material and fine particles, stabilization against wind erosion is
also a must. The plantation scheme broadly covers the following areas:
 Plantation around peripheral portions of mine and other built up structures;

 Afforestation of barren areas in the lease hold;
 Gardens, parks and haul road plantation;
 Plantation by way of reclamation /rehabilitation of mined out blocks and waste
dumps; and
 Improving the conditions of catchment areas and to prevent erosion.
It is proposed to plant around 1000 plants per ha. The plantation will be done
along periphery of the area boundary. Total 2.50 ha area will be covered under
plantation in the next five years. During mine life, it is proposed to be plant
20000 sampling covering 20.0 ha area along area boundary. Phase wise
plantation schedule till end of mine life is given in Table-5.1.

Chapter-5
TABLE-5.1
PLANTATION PROGRAMME
Proposed Afforestation Schedule
Year No of trees to be Location Area to be
planted covered (ha)
1st 500 Area boundary 0.50
2nd 500 0.50
3rd 500 0.50
4th 500 0.50
5th 500 0.50
Total end of plan period 2500 Within the 2.50
applied area
6th to 18th 17500 All around the 17.50
area boundary
Total at the end of mine 20000 All around the 20.0
life area boundary,
virgin area etc.
All protection measures like provision of garland drain, afforestation and

stabilization will be taken care on year to year basis as per the requirement. A
final mine closure plan incorporating time schedule for abandonment shall be
submitted before one year of its closure as per rule.
The following steps should be taken for post plantation care:
 Activation of feeding roots by loosening the soil regularly;
 Incorporation of manure for healthy growth of the plant;
 Improving aeration & water infiltration;
 Clearing of weeds;
 Supporting of saplings;
 Formation of soil mulch;
 Protection from browsing animals & trespassers by providing fencing;
 Fertilizer application, if necessary; and
 Regular watering.
5.8.2.1 Plantation Species
The plantation species have been suggested considered based on the following:
* Adapted to the Geo-climatic conditions of the area;

* Mix of round, spreading, oblong and conical canopies;
* Different heights ranging from 4 m to 20 m; and
* Preferably evergreen trees.
Plantation in areas with good soil cover especially for plantation around the mine,
initially should be started by direct seeding synchronous with the onset of rains.
This involves preparation of local site with regard to water harvesting, soil and
water conservation measures, strip cultivation and weeding. It also gives the
initial advantage of time saving by eliminating nursery, transport and planting. It
also has the advantage of improving the form of the tree and its rooting pattern.
Green belts are proposed surrounding the ML area and along the permanent
approach road to the mine from the plant. The main purpose of green belt
development is to contribute to the following factors:

Chapter-5
 Improve the aesthetics of the area;

 Trap the vehicular emissions and fugitive dust emissions;
 Attenuate noise levels generated from the mine;
 Prevent soil ecological homeostasis;
 Prevent soil erosion and to protect the natural vegetation; and
 Utilize the runoff water.
However the advice of experts shall be taken before finalizing them. List of Local
plant species is given in Table-5.2.
TABLE-5.2
LIST OF LOCAL SPECIES
Sr. No. Local Name Botanical Name
1 Anwala Emblica officinalis
2 Chir Pincus roxburghil
3 Darek Melia azadirachta
4 Khair Acacia catechu
5 Popular Populous ciliate
6 Samel Bonbax ceiba
7 Toon Cedrela toona
8 Shisham Dalbergia sissoo
Apart from the green belts and aesthetic plantation for eliminating fugitive
emissions and noise control, all other massive plantation over the disturbed area
shall also be done to improvise the land use. Plantation programme shall be
decided and executed with the assistance of Forest Dept experts and co-operation
from the local community. Based on the community needs the afforestation
would mainly have to aim at:
 Protection of soil erosion

 Plantations of fuel wood blocks to meet the energy requirements
During the subsequent afforestation programmes, re-plantation of the un-
survived plants will also be taken up.
5.9 Measures to Improve Socio-Economic Conditions of Local Population

A part of applied area is having scattered inhabitation that needs to be relocated.
A resettlement and rehabilitation possibilities shall be studied and submitted to
the competent authority for its approval. The mining staff and workers come for
work from surrounding villages. In buffer zone within a radius of 10 km from the
nearby villages.
JHCP shall extend community development programmes and social benefits like
drinking water, health care and other site services, measures not only to the
persons employed in the mines, but also to the local villagers.
The State and Central Governments will also get benefited in the form of
revenues/ royalties, excise, taxes and cess etc. Ultimately the mining forms the
basic activity, which will benefit many people who are depending upon it for their
livelihood for a number of years.

Chapter-5
5.9.1 Employment to Local People
The mining and associated activities offer opportunities of employment to the

eligible people from the ethnic population. People also get employment in the
other developmental activities and also the mineral based activities in and around
the complexes, especially in transport of cement which shall be given to the
contract labour. The mining project envisages employment opportunities for
about 137 persons both as direct employees under skilled, semi-skilled and
unskilled categories and as indirect employees in contractual works.
5.10 Environment Management System
5.10.1 Introduction
The earlier sections identified the measures for environmental protection

especially for providing the necessary pollution control to comply with the
standards stipulating the limits for emitting pollutants in air, water or on land so
that the assimilative capacity is not exceeded.
Environmental policy at mines level is yet to be defined formally. Standards are
stipulated by various regulatory agencies to limit the emission of pollutants in air
and water. Similarly, a mandatory practice is recommended for preparing an
Environment Statement each year in order to encourage the mines to allow
efficient use of resources in their production processes and reduce the quantities
of waste per unit of product. This in itself is not sufficient since this does not
provide an assurance that its environmental performance not only meets, will
continue to meet, legislative and policy requirements.
5.10.2 Formation of an Environmental Management System
The environmental management system to be formed by mine will enable it to

maximize its beneficial effects and minimize its adverse effects with emphasis on
prevention. It should:
 Identify and evaluate the environmental effects arising from the activities,
products and services to determine those of significance;
 Identify and evaluate the environmental effects arising from incidents,
accidents and potential emergency situations;
 Identify the relevant legislative and regulatory requirements;
 Enable priorities to be identified and pertinent environmental objectives and
targets to be set;
 Facilitate planning, control, monitoring, auditing and review activities to
ensure that the policy is complied with; and
 Allow periodic evaluation to suit changing circumstances so that it remains
relevant.
5.10.3 Implementation of an Environmental Management System
 Commitment
It is essential that the top management of the mines is committed to

development of its activities in an environmentally sound manner and supports all
efforts in achieving this objective.
Chapter-5
Experience has shown that all attempts to change the processes and production
methods which reduce/prevent wastes and inefficient use of resources ultimately
result not only in environmentally sound practices but also better business
returns.
 Preparatory Environmental Review
A mining industry with no formal environmental management system first

establish its current position with regards to environment through a preparatory
environmental review. This should cover four areas:
 Legislative and regulatory requirements;

 Evaluation and registration of significant parameters and their environmental
impacts;
 Review of existing environmental management practices and procedures, and
 Assessment of feedback from investigation of previous environmental
incidents and non-compliance with legislation, regulations or existing policies
and procedures.
The resulting report should address:
 The nature and extent of problems and deficiencies;

 The priorities to be accorded to rectify them, and
 An improvement program designed to ensure that the personnel and material
resources required are identified and made available.
 Environmental Policy
The mine management should actively initiate, develop and support the
environmental policy, which is relevant to its activities, products and services and
their environmental effects. Broadly this should:
 Be consistent with the occupational health and safety policy and other policies
(such as quality policy);
 Indicate which of the industrial activities are covered by the environmental
management system;
 Be communicated and implemented at all levels of the project; and
 Be available publicly.
 Organization and Personnel
To facilitate the implementation of the EMS, one of the most important aspects
relate to the organization and personnel. The related issues are:
 Define and document the responsibility, authority and interrelations of key

personnel involved in the implementation of the environmental policy,
objectives and environmental management system;
 Identify the in-house verification requirements and procedures including
resources and personnel;
 Appoint a Management Representative (MR);

Chapter-5
 Communicate to employees at all levels the importance of compliance with

the environmental policy, their role and responsibilities in achieving
compliance, the potential consequences of departures from the specified
procedures, and identify and provide appropriate training; and
 Establish and maintain procedures to ensure that contractors are made aware
of the environmental management system requirements and provisions.
 Environmental Effects
The mine management should establish and maintain procedures for:
 Receiving, documenting and responding to internal as well as external

communications concerning environmental aspects and management;
 Identifying, examining and evaluating the environmental effects of its
activities under normal and abnormal/emergency situations (including risk
assessment) and compiling significant effects in a register; and
 Recording all legislative, regulatory and other policy requirements and codes
in a register.
 Environmental Objectives and Targets
The objectives should be set with a view to realizing gradual and steady
improvements in environmental performance through application of best available
and economically viable technology.
The areas targeted for improvement should be those where improvements are
most necessary to reduce risks (to environmental and industry) and liabilities.
These should be identified through cost-benefit analysis wherever practicable and
should be quantitative and achievable.
 Environmental Management Program
The establishment of an environmental management program is the key to

compliance with the industry’s environmental policy and achievement of the
environmental objectives and targets.
It should designate the responsibility for achieving the targets at each level and
the means thereof. It should deal with the actions required for the consequences
of the mine’s past activities as well as address the life cycle new mine
developments so as to effectively control adverse impacts.
 Environmental Management Manual and Documentation
The documentation is intended to provide an adequate description of the

environmental management system. The manual is expected to provide a
reference to the implementation and maintenance of the system.
 Operational Control
The management responsibilities should be defined to ensure that the control,

verification, measurement and testing of environment parameters within the
project are adequately coordinated and effectively performed.

Chapter-5
The control, verification, measurement and testing should be made through

documented procedures and work instructions defining the manner of conducting
activities, the absence of which can lead to violation of the environment policy.
In the event of non-compliance, procedures for investigation of the causative

mechanism should be established and the factors reported for corrective actions.
 Environment Management Records
The project should establish and maintain a system of records to demonstrate

compliance with the environmental management systems and the extent of
achievement of the environmental objectives and targets. In addition the other
records (legislative, audit and review reports), management records should
address the following:
 Details of failure in compliance and corrective action;

 Details of indigents and corrective action;
 Details of complaints and follow-up action;
 Appropriate contractor and supplier information;
 Inspection and maintenance reports;
 Product identification and composition data;
 Monitoring data; and
 Environmental training records.
 Environmental Management Audit
The management audits are to determine whether the activities are conforming
to the environmental management systems and effective in implementing the
environmental policy. They may be internal or external, but carried out
impartially and effectively by a person properly trained for it. Broad knowledge of
the environmental process and expertise in relevant discipline is also required.
Appropriate audit program and protocols should be established.
 Environmental Statement
As a mandatory requirement under the Environment Protection Rules (1986) as
amended through the Notification issued by the Ministry of Environment and
Forests in April 1993, an Environmental Statement should be prepared annually.
This should include the consumption of total resources (raw material and water
per tonne of product), quantity and concentration of pollutants (air and water
discharged, quantity of hazardous and solid waste generation, pollution
abatement measures, conservation of natural resources and cost of production
vis-a vis the investment on pollution abatement. This may be an internal or
external audits, but carried out impartially and effectively by a person properly
trained for it. Broad knowledge of the environmental process and expertise in
relevant disciplines is also required.

Chapter-5
The intention of this statement is:
 To identify the process/production areas where resources can be used more

efficiently through a comparison with the figures of a similar industry (thereby
reducing the consumption per unit of product);
 To determine the areas where waste generation can be minimized at source

and through end of pipe treatment (thereby reducing the wastes generated
and discharged per unit of product); and
 Initiate a self-correcting /improvement system through an internal analysis to

achieve cost reduction through choice of superior technology and more
efficient practices.
 Environmental Management Reviews
The senior management should periodically review the Environmental

Management System (EMS) to ensure its suitability and effectiveness. The need
for possible changes in the environmental policy and objectives for continuous
improvement should be ascertained and revisions made accordingly.
EMS based on the above objectives should be formulated and implemented at the
mine site.
5.11 Occupational Safety and Health
Occupational safety and health is very closely related to productivity and good
employer-employee relationship. The main factors of occupational health in
limestone mine are fugitive dust and noise. Safety of employee during blasting
operation and maintenance of mining equipment and handling of explosive
materials are taken care of as per Mine Regulations 1961. To avoid any adverse
affects on the health of workers due to dust, heat, noise and vibration sufficient
measures have been provided in the mining project. These include:
* Provision of wet drilling and drilling with built dust catcher;

* Provision of rest shelters for mine workers with amenities like drinking water,
fans, toilets etc.;
* Provision of personal protection devices to the workers;
* Rotation of workers exposed to noise premises;
* Dust suppression of haul road;
* Closed control room in crusher house with proper ventilation;
* Effective de-dusting system in the crusher house; and
* First-aid facilities in the mining area.
Occupational Health Survey of the employees will be carried out at regular

intervals. Mines management should open a separate occupational health
services cell. The occupational health services should be fully functional. It should
be managed by a well qualified doctor and trained doctor of Dy.CMO cadre and
assisted by trained nurses. The health cell should consist of

Chapter-5
 A computer with printer;

 Titamus 2 a vision tester for vision examination;
 LYNK- Respirable Dust Kit;
 ELEKON MICRO Controlled diagnostic Audiometer;
 Precision Impulses Integrating Sound Level Meter; and
 Area heat stress monitoring Modern.
A committee has already constituted to monitor the safety occupational aspects,

which needs periodically enhance the safety and occupational health awareness
amongst the workers engaged in existing mine and plant operations. The same
practices shall be implemented for proposed mine project.
5.12 Training and Human Resources Development
Though emphasis shall be on appointing qualified and experienced personnel in

various disciplines, it is also ensured that they are adequately trained for the jobs
expected of them. For this basic training is given to raw and new appointees,
whereas refresher training is given to others keeping in view provisions of Mines
Vocational Training Rules 1966.
Personnel who have to operate and/or maintain heavy earth moving equipment
shall be trained under the guidance of the manufacturers either at the site or in
the works of the manufacturers.
The training of mine personnel shall be conducted regularly at the operating

mines with respect to environmental protection.
Training and human resource development is not a single time function but a
continuous requirement to up-date and improve the skills of employees. Hence,
in addition to whatever statutory training is required, the company looks forward
to continue the process by way of participative training of the personnel in
various courses, workshops, seminars training courses organized by
manufacturers/ professional agencies.
5.13 Budgetary Allocation for Environmental Protection

As environmental protection will be monitored and implemented by a centralized
environmental management cell, the fiscal estimates have been arrived for the
mining activity, which is discussed in the following paragraphs.
JHCP is proposed to spend about Rs 35 lakhs towards environmental protection

measures. The details of investment for procuring the equipments for efficient
control and monitoring of pollution are given in Table-5.3.

Chapter-5
TABLE-5.3
BUDGET PROVISION FOR EMP IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING
Sr. Expenditure
Particulars
No. (Rs. In Lakhs)
1 Air & water pollution 17.0
2 Environmental Monitoring 10.00
3 Green belt / Afforestation 3.00
4 Engineering constructions like retention wall, check dam, 5.00
garland drain, settling tank
Sub Total 35.00

Chapter-5A
Environmental Monitoring Programme
5A.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME
5A.1 Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures
The mitigation measures suggested in Chapter-4 shall be implemented so as to

reduce the impact on environment due to the operations of the mine. In order to
facilitate easy implementation of mitigation measures, these are phased as per
the priority implementation as given in Table-5A.1.
TABLE-5A.1
RECOMMENDED IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE
Sr. No. Recommendations Time Requirement Schedule

Air pollution control Before commissioning of Immediate
1
measures respective units
Water pollution control Before commissioning of the Immediate
2
measures mine
Noise control measures Along with the commissioning of Immediate
3
the mine
Ecological preservation and Stage wise implementation Immediate
4 upgradation &
Progressive
5A.2 Environmental Monitoring
The environmental monitoring for the proposed mining operations shall be

conducted as follows:
 Air quality;
 Water and wastewater quality;
 Noise levels;
 Soil Quality; and
 Greenbelt Development.
A centralized environmental monitoring cell will be established in mining project

(as described in Chapter-10). Monitoring of important and crucial environmental
parameters are of immense importance to assess the status of environment
during operation phase of lime stone mine. With the knowledge of baseline
conditions, the monitoring program will serve as an indicator for any deterioration
in environmental conditions due to mining operations and suitable mitigatory
steps could be taken in time to safeguard the environment. Monitoring is as
important as that of control of pollution since the efficiency of control measures
can only be determined by monitoring. The monitoring program for
implementation is given below.
 Air Pollution and Meteorological Aspects
Both ambient air quality and meteorology will be monitored. The ambient air will
be monitored twice in a week in line with the guidelines of Central Pollution
Control Board and SPCB. Meteorological parameters like wind speed, wind
VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad C5A-1

Chapter-5A
direction, temperature, relative humidity and rainfall will be recorded continuously

at mine lease area.
 Water and Wastewater Quality
The storm water will be analyzed in the rainy season. The ground and surface
water quality will be monitored in every season at selected locations. The water
depths will be monitored in the wells of surrounding villages in every season.
 Noise Levels
Noise levels in the work zone environment will be monitored regularly. The
ground vibration will be recorded at the time of blasting. The frequency of noise
monitoring will be once in a month in the work zone. The ambient noise levels in
the surrounding villages will be monitored once in six months.
 Soil Sampling
Soil samples will be tested before plantation/vegetation of the area. The

environmental monitoring cell will co-ordinate all monitoring programs at site and
data thus generated will be regularly furnished to the State regulatory agencies.
The environmental monitoring program to be implemented is given in Table-

5A.2.
TABLE-5A.2
MONITORING SCHEDULE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS
Sr. Particulars Monitoring Duration of Important Monitoring

No. Frequency Sampling Parameters
1 Air Pollution and Meteorology
Air Quality
A Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
Selected 4 locations in Twice in a 24 hr PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx and CO
and around ml area week continuously
specified by HPPCB
B Fugitive dust sampling Once in three 24 hr PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx
at work zone as per months continuously
CPCB or HPPCB and
IBM guidelines
Meteorology
a Meteorological data to Daily Continuous Wind speed, direction,
be monitored at mine Monitoring temperature, relative humidity
lease area and rainfall.
2 Water and Wastewater Quality
A Industrial/Domestic
1 Sewage treatment Once in a 24 hr composite As per EPA rules, 1989.
plant from colony month
B Water quality in the study area
1 Ground Water quality Once in a Grab As per the parameters specified
month under IS:10500
2 Surface Water Once in a Grab Parameters specified under
month IS:2296
(Class C)
3 Water flows in major Once in a Once time As per IS specifications

Chapter-5A
Sr. Particulars Monitoring Duration of Important Monitoring

No. Frequency Sampling Parameters
streams near to Mine season
leases or as per CPCB
or HPPCB guidelines
4 Water level studies in Once in a One time Water levels and chemistry of
well or bore wells or season water
piezometers in Mine
leases and
surrounding areas
3 Industrial Noise Levels
1 Major noise generating Every 24 hr continuous Noise level in dB(A)
sources fortnight with 1 hr interval
2 Near the blasting Fortnight 24 hr continuous Noise level in dB(A)
/drilling site with 1 hr interval
3 Along the haul road Fortnight 24 hr continuous Noise level in dB(A)
for transportation with 1 hr interval
noise
Ambient Noise Levels
4 10 Locations around Seasonal 24 hr continuous Noise levels in dB(A)
mine lease areas with one hr
interval
4. Soil Characteristics
1 Selected 4 locations in Pre-Monsoon One Grab Colour, textural class, grain
core and buffer zone season sample size, distribution, pH, Electrical
in nearby villages Conductivity, Bulk Density,
Porosity, Infiltration rate,
Moisture retention capacity,
Wilting Co-efficient, Organic
matter Na, N, K, PO4, SO4, SAR,
Base Exchange Capacity, Pb,
Cu, Zn, Cd, Fe.
Source: Vimta Labs Limited
5A.3 Monitoring Methods and Data Analysis
All environmental monitoring and relevant operational data will be stored in a

relational database. Regular data extracts and interpretive reports will be sent to
the regulator.
5A.3.1 Air Quality Monitoring and Data Analysis
The concentration of air borne pollutants in the workspace / work zone

environment will be monitored periodically. If concentrations higher than
threshold limit values are observed, the source of fugitive emissions will be
identified and necessary measures taken. If the levels are high suitable measures
as detailed in EMP shall be initiated.
The base line concentrations of PM, SO2, NOX and CO in the ambient air will be
monitored at regular intervals. Any abnormal rise will be investigated to identify
the causes, and appropriate action will be initiated. Greenbelt shall be developed
for minimising dust propagation. The ambient air quality data should be
transferred and processed in a centralised computer facility equipped with
required software. Trend and statistical analysis should be done.

Chapter-5A
5A.3.2 Water and Wastewater Quality Monitoring and Data Analysis
Methods prescribed in "Standard Methods for Examination of Water and

Wastewater" prepared and published jointly by American Public Health
Association (APHA), American Water Works Association (AWWA) and Water
Pollution Control Federation (WPCF); Manual on Water and Wastewater Analysis
published by NEERI, Nagpur are recommended.
5A.4 Monitoring Equipment and Consumables
A well-equipped laboratory with consumable items will be provided for monitoring

of environmental parameters. Alternatively, monitoring can be outsourced to a
recognized laboratory.
a) Air Quality and Meteorology
Following equipment and consumable items will be made available with the
environmental cell to meet the monitoring frequency and to implement the
monitoring program.
 Respirable Dust Samplers;
 Personal sampler;
 CO Monitor;
 Weather station (automatic recording);
 Spectrophotometer (visible range);
 Single pan balance;
 Relevant chemicals as per IS:5182; and
 Chemical/Glass ware.
b) Water and Waste Water Quality
The sampling should be done in jerry cans as per the standard procedures laid
down by IS: 3025. Following equipment are recommended to be available with the
environmental cell:
 BOD incubator;
 Refrigerator;
 Oven;
 Stop watch;
 Thermometer;
 PH meter;
 Distilled water plant;
 Spectrophotometer; and
 Relevant chemicals and Glass wares.
c) Noise Levels
The environmental cell shall have sound level meter to record noise levels in
different scales like A, B and C with slow and fast response options and vibration
meter.
Further, any recognized agency can also be engaged for carrying out the above
stated monitoring works.
Chapter-6
Analysis of Alternative Technology
6.0 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVE TECHNOLOGY
6.1 Introduction
A number of mining techniques are in widespread use depending on the site-

specific characteristics, and the environmental and other constraints that may be
imposed. The choice of using open-cast or underground mining will depend
largely on economic grounds based on the depth and concentration of minerals.
The proposed mining project will be highly mechanized opencast mine of 4.0
MTPA (3.60 MTPA Limestone and 0.40 MTPA Shale) capacity. Detailed exploration
was carried out in the adjoining M.L of the applicant. Baga-Bhalag Limestone and
Shale mine lease continues into the applied area under consideration with almost
unchanged parameters like thickness and grade which is demonstrated by the
few boreholes drilled.
The mineable reserves work out to be 65.731 million tons of Limestone and 7.021
million tons of Shale with a life of 30 years.
Baga-Bhalag Limestone and Shale mine is a virgin deposit in three blocks located
adjacent to the operating mine. It is proposed to develop the deposit for mining
of Limestone and Shale ore at the rate of 4.0 MTPA of ROM. For rock
fragmentation deep-hole drilling and blasting technique will be adopted. Shovel,
dumper combination will be deployed for excavation and transportation of
limestone from mine to the crushing plant.
6.2 Description of Alternative Site
The 3 blocks are selected based on the geological investigations and exploration
carried out. The mining projects are site specific and as such alternate sites were
not considered.
6.3 Assessment of New and Untested Technology for the Risk of

Technological Failure
The main considerations in designing the quarry layout have been:
 To design an economical production of required ore quality for the life of mine;
 To minimise transportation distance for ore and waste;
 To minimise rehandling of overburden;
 To minimise adverse effects on environment; and
 Non-sterlising the remaining potential reserves for future mining.
6.4 Mitigation Measures Proposed for Each Alternative
Safe, low-waste generating methods have been selected for ore, with attention
being paid to recirculation of water. These include:
 Technologies and operations selected will maximize the opportunities for

recycling and re-use of water;

Chapter-6
 Dust control is important at most mines, and involves both equipment design
and operational procedures; and
 Solid waste disposal activities will be appropriately located as well as

conservatively designed. Attention has given to long-term stability of disposal.
Drainage and leachate from disposal sites will be minimized by appropriate
location, design and maintenance.
 Dust Control
Dust is controlled on the mining site through careful design and selection of
excavation, transport and crushing equipment, and paying attention to control
equipment around mine. Water sprays are more effective in preventing dust
generation than in removal of dust from air. Dust suppression on haul roads will
be followed.
Storage dumps will be protected against wind to reduce dust generation.

Revegetation is usually the best option.
 Noise Reduction
Machinery will be inherently low-noise, or else fitted with noise shields. Noise will
also be one of the criteria for choice of mobile transport equipment. Traffic
movement will be planned to avoid as much as possible steep grades and noise
sensitive areas (habitats as well as human dwellings). Engines will be switched off
when not in use for significant periods. As a last resort, only personnel will be
required to wear hearing protection and be constrained to sound-proof cabins.
 Solid Waste
Waste disposal options has influenced the design and development of the mine,
and so is an integral part of the choice of operation. The location and design of
overburden dumps was determined by local conditions and engineering feasibility.
A high degree of design safety has been ensured. Close attention has been paid
to ongoing control of seepage and surface water which affect the stability of
waste deposits.
6.5 Selection of Alternative
Aspects which have been addressed include:
 Location of the mine, and of ancillary operations have been carefully

assessed, and appropriate mitigation measures taken in the planning stage;
 The mining technologies that are most suitable to the environment as well as
economic situation have been selected;
 Safe, low waste generating methods have been selected for ore, with
attention being paid to recirculation and reuse;

Chapter-6
 Dust control is done by both equipment design and operational procedures;
 Solid waste disposal activities will be appropriately located as well as

conservatively designed. Drainage and leachate from disposal sites has been
minimized by appropriate location, design and maintenance;
 Control of impact from ancillary operations such a roads, parking areas,

depots, borrow areas etc. has been an important part of site working plan;
 Safe handling of wastes has been ensured; and
 Site rehabilitation will be progressive during the active life of mine. Upon
closure all equipment will be removed and final site restoration effectuated.
All relevant actions will be taken on high minimize environmental impact. Within
mine environmental control has become a priority to be managed rather than an
unwelcome nuisance to be attended to when problems start to appear. Effective
control is will be undertaken by corporate management by adopting
environmental performance goals and a suitable management structure from the
outset.

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed Baga-Bhalag Limestone and Shale Deposit for
Production Capacity of 4.0 MTPA (3.60 MTPA Limestone Mine and 0.40 MTPA Shale) ML Area of
172.7434 ha at Baga, Bhalag, Samtyari, Padiyar & Sehnali Villages, Arki Tehsil, Solan District and
Soldha & Mains Villages, Sadar Tehsil, Bilaspur District, Himachal Pradesh
Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.0 ADDITIONAL STUDIES
This chapter describes the public consultation for the proposed limestone and shale
mine for production capacity 4.0 MTPA (3.60 MTPA Limestone and 0.40 MTPA
Shale), Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan, occupational health and
safety issues.
7.1 Public Consultation
Public Consultation refers to the process by which the concerns of local affected
persons and others who have plausible stake in the environmental impacts of the
project or activity are ascertained with a view to taking into account all the
material concerns in the project or activity design as appropriate. All Category ‘A’
and Category ‘B’ projects or activities under Schedule II of the EIA Notification,
dated 14th September 2006 shall undertake public consultation.
The proposed limestone and shale mine falls under ‘Category-A’ with project or
activity type number ‘1(a)’, as per EIA Notification 2006. Which requires EIA
studies as well as public consultation.
The public consultation will ordinarily have two components comprising of public
hearing at the site or in its close proximity-district wise, to be carried out in the
prescribed manner and obtaining responses in writing from other concerned
persons having a plausible stake in the environmental aspects of the project or
activity.
This report is being submitted to Himachal Pradesh State Pollution Control Board
for the purpose of public hearing/consultation purpose. After completion of the
public consultation, JHCP shall address all environmental concerns expressed
during this process, and make appropriate changes in the draft EIA and EMP. The
final EIA report, so prepared will be submitted by JHCP to MoEF, New Delhi to
complete EC process.
7.2 Occupational Health and Safety
In mining, where multifarious activities are involved during mine development and
operational phase, like drilling, blasting loading and transportation; the men,
materials and machines are the basic inputs. Along with the boons, industrialization
generally brings several problems like occupational health and safety.
The mining planner, therefore, has to properly plan and take steps to minimize the
impacts of mining and to ensure appropriate occupational health and safety
including fire plans. All these activities again may be classified under mine
development and mine operational phase.
7.2.1 Occupational Health
Occupational health needs attention both during mine development and operational
phase. However, the problem varies both in magnitude and variety in the above
phases.

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
 Construction and Erection
The occupational health problems envisaged at this stage can mainly be due to
constructional accident and noise. To overcome these hazards, in addition to
arrangements to reduce it within TLV's, necessary protective equipments will be
supplied to workers.
 Operation and Maintenance
The problem of occupational health, in the mine development and operational phase
is primarily due to noise which could affect hearing. The necessary personal
protective equipments will be given to all the workers. The working personnel will be
given the following appropriate personnel protective equipments.
 Industrial Safety Helmet;

 Crash Helmets;
 Face shield with replacement acrylic vision;
 Zero power plain goggles with cut type filters on both ends;
 Zero power goggles with cut type filters on both sides and blue color glasses;
 Welders equipment for eye and face protection;
 Cylindrical type earplug;
 Ear muffs;
 Canister Gas mask;
 Self contained breathing apparatus;
 Leather apron;
 Aluminized fiber glass fix proximity suit with hood and gloves;
 Boiler suit;
 Safety belt/line man's safety belt;
 Leather hand gloves;
 Asbestos hand gloves;
 Acid/Alkali proof rubberized hand gloves;
 Canvas cum leather hand gloves with leather palm;
 Lead hand glove;
 Electrically tested electrical resistance hand gloves; and
 Industrial safety shoes with steel toe.
Full-fledged hospital facilities will be provided round the clock for attending
emergency arising out of accidents, if any. All working personnel will be medically
examined at least once in every year and at the end of his term of employment.
This is in addition to the pre-employment medical examination.
7.2.2 Safety Plan
Safety of both men and materials during mine development and operational phase
is of concern. Safety plan is prepared and implemented in the mine. The
preparedness of an mine for the occurrence of possible disasters is known as
emergency plan. The disaster in the mine is possible due to land slide, collapse of
structures, vehicular accidents and fire/explosion etc.

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Keeping in view the safety requirement during construction, operation and

maintenance phases, and the mine formulates safety policy with the following
regulations:
 To allocate sufficient resources to maintain safe and healthy conditions of work;

 To take steps to ensure that all known safety factors are taken into account in
the design, construction, operation and maintenance of mine, machinery and
equipment;
 To ensure that adequate safety instructions are given to all employees;
 To provide wherever necessary protective equipment, safety appliances and
clothing and to ensure their proper use;
 To inform employees about materials, equipment or processes used in their
work which are known to be potentially hazardous to health or safety;
 To keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for making
necessary changes from the point of view of safety in the light of experience and
up to date knowledge;
 To provide appropriate facilities for first aid and prompt treatment of injuries and
illness at work;
 To provide appropriate instruction, training, retraining and supervision to
employees in health and safety, first aid and to ensure that adequate publicity is
given to these matters;
 To ensure proper implementation of fire prevention methods and an appropriate
fire fighting service together with training facilities for personnel involved in this
service;
 To organize collection, analysis and presentation of data on accident, sickness
and incident involving people injury or injury to health with a view to taking
corrective, remedial and preventive action;
 To promote through the established machinery, joint consultation in health and
safety matters to ensure effective participation by all employees;
 To publish/notify regulations, instructions and notices in the common language
of employees;
 To prepare separate safety rules for each type of occupation/processes involved
in a plant; and
 To ensure regular safety inspection by competent persons at suitable intervals of
all buildings, equipments, work places and operations.
7.2.3 Safety Organization
 Construction and Erection Phase
A qualified and experienced safety officer will be appointed. The responsibilities of

the safety officer include identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts
of workers and advice on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organize training
programs and provide professional expert advice on various issues related to
occupational safety and health. He is also responsible to ensure compliance of
Safety Rules/ Statutory Provisions. In addition to employment of safety officer by
industry, every contractor, who employs more than 250 workers, will also employ
one safety officer to ensure safety of the worker, in accordance with the conditions
of contract.

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
 Mine development and Operational phase
When the mine development is completed the posting of safety officers will be in
accordance with the requirement of Factories Act and their duties and
responsibilities shall be as defined there of.
7.2.4 Safety Circle
In order to fully develop the capabilities of the employees in identification of

hazardous processes and improving safety and health, safety circles are constituted
in each area of work. The circle consists of 5-6 employees from that area. The circle
normally will meet for about an hour every week.
7.2.5 Safety Training
A full-fledged training center exists at the existing cement plant. Safety training will
be provided by the Safety Officers with the assistance of faculty members called
from Professional Safety Institutions and Universities. In addition to regular
employees, limited contractor labors will also be provided safety training. To create
safety awareness safety films are being shown to workers and leaflets distributed.
Some precautions and remedial measures proposed to be adopted to prevent fires
are:
 Compartmentalization of cable galleries, use of proper sealing techniques of
cable passages and crevices in all directions would help in localizing and
identifying the area of occurrence of fire as well as ensure effective automatic
and manual fire fighting operations;
 Spread of fire in horizontal direction would be checked by providing fire stops for
cable shafts;
 Reliable and dependable type of fire detection system with proper zoning and
interlocks for alarms are effective protection methods for conveyor galleries;
 Housekeeping of high standard helps in eliminating the causes of fire and
regular fire watching system strengthens fire prevention and fire fighting; and
 Proper fire watching by all concerned would be ensured.
7.2.6 Health and Safety Monitoring Plan
The health of all employees is monitored once in a year for early detection of any
ailment due to exposure to dust, heat and noise.
7.3 Risk Assessment
The complete mining operation will be carried out under the management control
and direction of a qualified mine manager holding a First Class Manager’s
Certificate of competency to manage a metalliferous mine granted by the DGMS,
Dhanbad. The DGMS have been regularly issuing standing orders, model standing
orders and circulars to be followed by the mine management in case of disaster, if
any. Moreover, mining staff will be sent to refresher courses from time to time to
keep them alert. However, following natural/industrial hazards may occur during
normal operation.

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Natural Hazards
 Land slides;
 Flash floods;
 Damage of life and property;
 Disruption of road & telecommunication facilities; and
 Lightening.
Industrial Hazards
 Accident due to explosives;

 Accident due to heavy mining equipment; and
 Sabotage in case of magazine.
In order to take care of above hazard/disasters, the following control measures

will be adopted:
 All safety precautions and provisions of Mine Act,1952, metalliferous Mines

Regulation, 1961 and Mines Rules,1955 will be strictly followed during all
mining operations;
 Entry of unauthorized persons will be prohibited;
 Fire fighting and first-aid provisions in the mines office complex and mining
area;
 Provisions of all the safety appliances such as safety boot, helmets, goggles
etc. will be made available to the employees and regular check for their use;
 Training and refresher courses for all the employees working in hazardous
premises; Under Mines vocational training rules all employees of mines shall
have to undergo the training at a regular interval;
 Working of mine, as per approved plans and regularly updating the mine
plans;
 Cleaning of mine faces will be regularly done;
 Handling of explosives, charging and blasting will be carried out by competent
persons only;
 Provision of magazine at a safe place with fencing and necessary security
arrangement;
 Regular maintenance and testing of all mining equipment as per
manufacturer’s guidelines;
 Suppression of dust on the haulage roads;
 Adequate safety equipment will be provided at explosive magazine; and
 Increasing the awareness of safety and disaster through competitions, posters
and other similar drives.
For any type of above disaster, a rescue team will be formed by training the
mining staff with specialized training.
7.3.1 Possible Hazards in Open Cast Mine
There are various factors, which can cause disaster in the mines. The mining
activity has several disaster prone areas. The identification of various hazards is
shown in Figure-7.1 and the hazards are discussed below:

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
OPEN CAST MINE
DRILLING EXPLOITAT TRANSPORTA ORE

AND ION OF TION OF ORE CRUSHING LOADING
BLASTING ORE TO PLANT PLANT
CRUSHING
PLANT
ECOLOGICAL
RISK DUST NOISE
(LAND, AIR,
WATER)
FIGURE-7.1
IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDS IN OPEN CAST MINE

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.3.1.1 Blasting
Most of the accidents from blasting occur due to the projectiles, as they may
some times go even beyond the danger zone, mainly due to overcharging of the
shot-holes as a result of certain special features of the local ground. Flying rocks
are encountered during initial and final blasting operations. Vibrations also lead to
displacement of adjoining areas. Dust and noise are also problems commonly
encountered during blasting operations.
7.3.1.2 Heavy Machinery
Most of the accidents during operation of dumpers, excavators and dozers and
other heavy vehicles are often attributable to mechanical failures and human
errors.
7.3.1.3 Storage of Explosives
The explosive magazines of adjoining ML area of the same company shall be used
for the proposed working in the area.
The company already has established two Explosive Magazines of capacity 9 tones
each storage facility which will cater to the proposed mining activities. For the
purpose of transportation of explosives, explosive van is present. The main hazard
associated with the storage, transport and handling of explosives is fire and
explosion. The rules as per the Indian Explosive Act-1983 and Explosive Rules-2008
should be followed for handling of explosives, which includes transportation, storage
and use of explosives.
7.3.1.4 Fuel Storage
Most of the HEMM will operate on diesel. However, no major storage is envisaged at
the ML area. A diesel bouser is provided for the crawler mounted machines
operating in the mine.
7.3.1.5 Water Logging
The rainwater would flow down the slope of the hills and also along the natural
streams. Thus no water is likely to accumulate in the course of mining operations.
Hence no pumping arrangements are envisaged.
7.3.1.6 Safety Measures
 Safety Measures at the proposed Open Cast Mining Project
 The opencast mines have been planned for working with shovel dumper system
which requires proper benching not only for slope stability but also for
movement of dumpers and other heavy machinery. The inclination of the quarry
sides at the final stage i.e. at the dip most point will not exceed 600 to the
horizontal. (This angle is measured between the line joining the toe of the
bottom most bench to the crest of the top most bench and the horizontal line);
 Limestone benches, haul roads and ramps shall be developed and constructed
mostly in hard strata and as such loose material slopes are not anticipated. The

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
slopes, whether at faces/ benches or by the side of haul roads shall be in hard
strata;
 The gradient of the haul road, access trench will not be steeper than 1 in 25;
 Slope stabilization measures such as diversion drains, retaining walls, crib

structures trenches spurs and retards for seasonal streams shall be implemented
on highest priority so as to prevent landslides in totality;
 Afforestation shall be given full thrust particularly in non-forest areas to

rejuvenate the eco-system. The tree/shrub/grass species shall be selected as
given in table earlier which is most adaptive to the climate and altitude of the
area;
 The earthquake occurrences and tectonic activities are quite predominant. This
area falls under category V in the seismic map of India. Due to this, all of the
building and plant structures shall be designed so as to withstand expected
severity of the earthquake. This will be necessary to prevent loss of life and
damage to property; and
 All mining operations both within the quarry and outside will be conducted as
per the conditions laid down by DGMS and under the strict supervision of
competent persons appointed under Metaliferous Mines Regulation Act, 1961.
 Measures Suggested to Avoid Accidents due to Blasting
 The blasting operation shall be supervised by a competent person appointed for

the purpose;
 The blasting operation shall be strictly conducted as per the guideline given in
metalliferous mines regulation, 1961;
 Demarcation of danger zone area falling within a radius of 500 m from the blast
site;
 All employee and equipment shall be cleared from the blast area and located to
a safe location prior to any scheduled blasting;
 To prevent unauthorized entry, guards shall be posted at all access points

leading to the blast area;
 Audible signals such as sirens, whistles, etc. shall be used to warn employees,
visitors and neighbours about the scheduled blasting event; and
 Sign boards showing “Blasting Time” to be exhibited at every entry to the mine.
 Measures to Prevent Accidents due to Trucks and Dumpers
 All transportation within the main working area should be carried out under
the direct supervision and control of the management;

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
 The vehicles must be maintained in good repairs and checked thoroughly at

least once a week by a competent person authorized for this purpose by the
management;
 Broad signs should be provided at each and every turning point specially for
the guidance of the drivers at night;
 To avoid dangers while reversing the trackless vehicles, especially at the

embankment and tripping points, all areas for reversing of lorries should, as
far as possible, be made man free, and there should be a light and sound
device to indicate reversing of trucks; and
 A statutory provision of the fence, constant education, training etc. will go a

long way in reducing the incidence of such accidents.
7.4 Disaster Management Plan
7.4.1 Objectives of Disaster Management Plan
The Disaster Management Plan is aimed to ensure safety of life, protection of

environment, protection of installation, restoration of production and salvage
operations in this same order of priorities. For effective implementation of the
Disaster Management Plan, it should be widely circulated and personnel training
through rehearsals/drills.
The objective of the Disaster Management Plan is to make use of the combined
resources of the mine and the outside services to achieve the following:
 The objective of onsite disaster management plan for the captive mine is to
be a state of perceptual readiness through training, development to
immediately control and arrest any emergency situations, so as to avert a full
fledged disaster and the consequence of human and property damage. In the
event of a disaster still occurring & to manage the same so that the risk of the
damage to life and property is minimized.
 JCHP have a demented procedure for Emergency Preparedness & Responses.

The emergency situations arising out of the situations as defined in the clause
shall be addressed in the document.
The salient features are elaborated as below:
 Effect the rescue and medical treatment of casualties;

 Safeguard other people;
 Minimize damage to property and the environment;
 Initially contain and ultimately bring the incident under control;
 Identify any dead;
 Provide for the needs of relatives;
 Provide authoritative information to the news media;
 Secure the safe rehabilitation of affected area; and
 Preserve relevant records and equipment for the subsequent inquiry into the
cause and circumstances of the emergency.

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
In effect, it is to optimize operational efficiency to rescue rehabilitation and render

medical help and to restore normalcy.
 Emergency Organization
It is recommended to setup an Emergency Organization. A senior executive (Mine

Manager) who has control over the affairs of the mine would be heading the
Emergency Organization. He would be designated as Site Controller. As per the
General Organization chart, in the mines, the Mines Manager would be designated
as the Incident Controller. The Incident Controller would be reporting to the Site
Controller.
Each Incident Controller, for himself, organizes a team responsible for controlling
the incidence with the personnel under his control. Shift In-charge would be the
reporting officer, who would bring the incidence to the notice of the Incidence
Controller and Site Controller.
Emergency Co-ordinators would be appointed who would undertake the

responsibilities like fire fighting, rescue, rehabilitation, transport and provide
essential and support services. For this purposes, Security In-charge, Personnel
Department, Essential services personnel would be engaged. All these personnel
would be designated as key personnel.
In each shift, electrical supervisor, electrical fitters, pump house in-charge and other
maintenance staff would be drafted for emergency operations. In the event of
power or communication system failure, some of staff members in the mine offices
would be drafted and their services would be utilized as messengers for quick
passing of communications. All these personnel would be declared as essential
personnel.
Following officers of the mines will be responsible for co-ordination in case of

emergency situated in any section of the mine. Emergency responses are given in
Table-7.1.
TABLE-7.1
EMERGENCY RESPONSES
Person Responsibility
Head of the department/ Mine Agent Site Controller
Section In charge / Mine Manager Accident Controller/ Communication officer
Employee who gives the first information Primary Controller
about the incident/ accident
P & A Deptt. (HOD) Liaison officer
 Emergency Communication
Whoever notices an emergency situation such as fire, growth of fire etc would
inform his immediate superior and Emergency Control Center. The person on duty in
the Emergency Control Center would appraise the Site Controller. Site Controller
verifies the situation from the Incident Controller of that area or the Shift In-charge
and takes a decision about an impending On Site Emergency. This would be
communicated to all the Incident Controllers, Emergency Co-ordinators.
Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Simultaneously, the emergency warning system would be activated on the

instructions of the Site Controller.
Key Personnel and their Responsibility
 Site Controller
The head of the department/ Mine agent shall have an overall responsibility for
controlling the incident/ accident and directing the personnel.
 To prepare a full proof plan for control of accident like, landslides, subsidence
flood and other natural calamities;
 To inform statutory bodies of the State and Central Government;
 To inform communication officer about the emergency, control center and
assembly point;
 To provide all assistance and call for Fire Squad, Security Officer and other
services required for removing/ control of danger;
 To ensure that all necessary personnel assemble at assembly point; and
 To make arrangements for medical treatment to the personnel got injured
seriously.
 Accident Controller/Mines Manager
 Mock rehearsal of management plan prepared for accident;

 To withdraw men/ machines from the affected area with priority for safety of
personnel, minimize damage to the machines, environment and loss of
material;
 To act as an accident controller to all the later arrived;
 To make a report based on the facts and figure and submit to the Site
Controller; and
 To communicate to the site in charge and make arrangement for
transportation of the injured personnel.
 Primary Controller
 To inform the Accident Controller/ Mine Manager from the nearest means of
communication about the location and the nature of accident;
 To assist in clearing any obstruction in relief of accident;
 To carry out all instructions of accident controller; and
 To provide first aid treatment and communicate to the shift in charge.
7.4.2 Emergency Facilities
Emergency Control Center (ECC)
For the time being, Mine Office Block is identified as Emergency Control Center. It
would have external Telephone, Fax, Telex facility. All the Site Controller/ Incident
Controller Officers, Senior Personnel would be located here. Also, it would be an
elevated place.

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
The following information and equipment are to be provided at the Emergency

Control Center (ECC):
 Intercom, telephone;
 P and T telephone;
 Safe contained breathing apparatus;
 Fire suit/gas tight goggles/gloves/helmets;
 Hand tools, wind direction/velocities indications;
 Public address megaphone, hand bell, telephone directories;
 Internal P and T, factory layout, site plan;
 Emergency lamp/torch light/batteries;
 Plan indicating locations of hazard inventories, sources of safety equipment, work
road plan, assembly points, rescue location vulnerable zones, escape routes;
 Hazard chart;
 Emergency shut-down procedures;
 Nominal roll of employees;
 List of key personnel, list of essential employees, list of Emergency Co-ordinators;
 Duties of key personnel;
 Address with telephone numbers and key personnel, emergency coordinator,
essential employees; and
 Important address and telephone numbers including Government agencies,
neighboring industries and sources of help, out side experts, population details
around the Mine.
 Assembly Point
Number of assembly depending upon the mine location would be identified wherein
employees who are not directly connected with the disaster management would be
assembled for safety and rescue. Emergency breathing apparatus, minimum
facilities like water etc. would be organized.
In view of the size of mine, different locations should be ear marked as assembly
points. Depending upon the location of hazard, the assembly points are to be used.
 Emergency Power Supply
Power supply is drawn existing power supply of cement plant. In the event of any
supply failure, Diesel Generator will be provided, which is operated as soon as any
power failure occurs. Thus mine lighting and emergency control center,
administrative building and other auxiliary services are connected to emergency
power supply.
 Fire Fighting Facilities
First Aid Fire fighting equipment suitable for emergency should be maintained in
each operation areas of the mine as per statutory requirements.
 Location of Wind Sock
On the top of the Administration block, windsocks would be installed to indicate

direction of wind for emergency escape.
Chapter-7
Additional Studies
 Emergency Medical Facilities
Stretchers, gas masks and general first aid materials for dealing with chemical
burns, fire burns etc would be maintained in the medical center as well as in the
emergency control room. Private medical practitioners help would be sought.
Government hospital would be approached for emergency help.
First aid facilities would be augmented. Names of Medical Personnel, Medical

facilities in the area would be prepared and updated. Necessary specific medicines
for emergency treatment of Burns Patients and for those affected by toxicity would
be maintained.
Breathing apparatus and other emergency medical equipment would be provided

and maintained. The help of near by industrial management’s in this regard would
be taken on mutual support basis.
 Ambulance
An ambulance with driver availability in all the shifts, emergency shift vehicle would
be ensured and maintained to transport injured or affected persons. Number of
persons would be trained in first aid so that, in every shift first aid personnel would
be available.
7.4.3 Emergency Actions
 Emergency Warning
Communication of emergency would be made familiar to the personnel inside the

mine and people outside. An emergency warning system would be established.
 Evacuation of Personnel
In the event of an emergency, unconnected personnel have to escape to assembly

point. Operators have to take emergency shutdown procedure and escape. Time
Office maintains a copy of deployment of employees in each shift. If necessary,
persons can be evacuated by rescue teams.
 All Clear Signal
Also, at the end of an emergency, after discussing with Incident Controllers and
Emergency Co-ordinators, the Site Controller orders an all clear signal. When it
becomes essential, the Site Controller communicates to the District Emergency
Authority, Police and Fire Service personnel regarding help required or development
of the situation into an Off-Site Emergency.

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.4.4 General
 Employee Information
During an emergency, employees would be warned by raising siren in specific

pattern. Employees would be provided with information related to fire hazards,
antidotes and first aid measures. Those who would designate as key personnel and
essential employees should be given training to emergency response.
 Co-ordination with Local Authorities
Keeping in view of the nature of emergency, two levels of coordination are

proposed. In the case of an On Site Emergency, resources within the organization
would be mobilized and in the event of extreme emergency local authorities help
should be sought.
In the event of an emergency developing into an off site emergency, local authority
and District emergency Authority (normally the Collector) would be appraised and
under his supervision, the Off Site Disaster Management Plan would be exercised.
For this purpose, the facilities that are available locally, i.e. medical, transport,
personnel, rescue accommodation, voluntary organizations etc. would be mustered.
Necessary rehearsals and training in the form of mock drills should be organized.
 Mutual Aid
Mutual aid in the form of technical personnel, runners, helpers, special protective
equipment, transport vehicles, communication facility etc should be sought from the
neighboring industrial management’s.
 Mock Drills
Emergency preparedness is an important aspect of planning in Industrial Disaster

Management. Personnel would be trained suitably and prepared mentally and
physically in emergency response through carefully planned, simulated procedures.
Similarly, the key personnel and essential personnel should be trained in the
operations.
 Important Information
Important information such names and addresses of key personnel, essential

employees, medical personnel, transporters address, address of those connected
with Off Site Emergency such as Police, Local Authorities, Fire Services, District
Emergency Authority should be prepared and maintained.
The on-site emergency organization chart for various emergencies is shown in

Figure-7.2.

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
Emergency Control
Site Controller
Room
Emergency Co-ordinator Emergency Co-ordinator Emergency Co-ordinator

Safety Officer Incident Controller
(Rescue,Fire Fighting) (Medical,Mutual,Aid (Essential Services)
Rehabilitation,Transport
and Communication)
Shift Incharge Shift Incharge
Electrician, First Aid, Electrician

Operator Transport-Driver
Pump Operator Pump Operator
Telephone-Operator
FIGURE-7.2
ON-SITE EMERGENCY PLAN

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
The task of preparing the Off-Site Emergency Plan lies with the district collector.
However the off-site plan will be prepared with the help of the local district
authorities. The proposed plan will be based on the following guidelines.
 Aspects Proposed to be considered in the Off-Site Emergency Plan
The main aspects which should be included in the emergency plan are:
 Organization
Details of command structure, warning systems, implementation procedures,

emergency control centers, names and appointments of incident controller, site
main controller, their deputies and other key personnel
 Communications
Identification of personnel involved, communication center, call signs, network, lists

of telephone numbers.
7.4.5 Off-Site Emergency Preparedness Plan
 Specialized Knowledge
Details of specialist bodies, firms and people upon whom it may be necessary to call
e.g. those with specialized knowledge of fire control;
 Voluntary Organizations
Details of organizers, telephone numbers, resources etc;
 Chemical Information
Details of the hazardous substances stored or procedure on each site and a

summary of the risk associated with them;
 Meteorological Information
Arrangements for obtaining details of whether conditions prevailing at the time and
whether forecasts;
 Humanitarian Arrangements
Transport, evacuation centers, emergency feeding treatment of injured, first aid,

ambulances and temporary mortuaries;
 Public Information
Arrangements for dealing with the media press office and informing relatives, etc;

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
 Assessment
Arrangements for:
(a) Collecting information on the causes of the emergency; and

(b) Reviewing the efficiency and effectiveness of all aspects of the emergency plan.
 Role of the Emergency Coordinating Officer
The various emergency services should be coordinated by an emergency

coordinating officer (ECO), who will be designated by the district collector. The ECO
should liaise closely with the site main controller. The ECO should inform the DGMS
authorities in case of accidents as per the statutory requirement. Again depending
on local arrangements, for very severe incidents/accidents with major or prolonged
off-site consequences, the external control should be passed to a senior local
authority administrator or even an administrator appointed by the central or state
government.
 Role of the Local Authority
The duty to prepare the off-site plan lies with the local authorities. The emergency
planning officer (EPO) appointed should carry out his duty in preparing for a whole
range of different emergencies within the local authority area. The EPO should liaise
with the works, to obtain the information to provide the basis for the plan. This
liaison should ensure that the plan is continually kept upto date.
It will be the responsibility of the EPO to ensure that all those organizations which
will be involved off site in handling the emergency, know of their role and are able
to accept it by having for example, sufficient staff and appropriate equipment to
cover their particular responsibilities. Rehearsals for off-site plans should be
organized by the EPO.
 Role of Police
Formal duties of the police during an emergency include protecting life and property
and controlling traffic movements. Their functions should include controlling
bystanders evacuating the public, identifying the dead and dealing with casualties,
and informing relatives of death or injury.
 Role of Fire Authorities
The control of a fire should be normally the responsibility of the senior fire brigade
officer who would take over the handling of the fire from the site incident controller
on arrival at the site. The senior fire brigade officer should also have a similar
responsibility for other events, such as explosions. Fire authorities in the region
should be apprised about the location of all stores of flammable materials, water
supply points and fire-fighting equipment. They should be involved in on-site
emergency rehearsals both as participants and, on occasion, as observers of
exercises involving only site personnel.

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
 Role of Health Authorities
Health authorities, including doctors, surgeons, hospitals, ambulances, and so on,

should have a vital part to play following a major accident, and they should form an
integral part of the emergency plan.
For major fires, injuries should be the result of the effects of thermal radiation to a
varying degree, and the knowledge and experience to handle this in all but extreme
cases may be generally available in most hospitals.
Major off-site incidents are likely to require medical equipment and facilities
additional to those available locally, and a medical “mutual aid “scheme should exist
to enable the assistance of neighboring authorities to be obtained in the event of an
emergency.
 Role of Government Safety Authority
This will be the factory inspectorate available in the region. Inspectors are likely to
want to satisfy themselves that the organization responsible for producing the off-
site plan has made adequate arrangements for handling emergencies of all types
including major emergencies. They may wish to see well documented procedures
and evidence of exercise undertaken to test the plan.
In the event of an accident, local arrangements regarding the role of the factory
inspector will apply. These may vary from keeping a watching brief to a close
involvement in advising on operations in case involvement in advising on
operations.
The off-site emergency organization chart for major disaster is shown in Figure-
7.3.
Following facilities are available at JHC Plant
 Public address system;

 Telephones/ Mobile handsets;
 Runners/messenger;
 Emergency alarm;
 Fire fighting equipment & accessories with trained manpower;
 Full fledge hospital at a distance of 4 km from the mine;
 Training centre;
 Fire tender;
 Ambulance van; and
 Jeep van.
Facilities available out side JHCP
 Hospitals at a distance of 4.0 km.

 As per Risk Assessment studies the possibility of “Offsite” emergency situation
is ruled out as this proposed mine is not likely to pose any off-site emergency
hence does not call for any preparation of an off-site emergency plan.
Further the residential quarters and living area are far from the mine.
Chapter-7
Additional Studies
7.4.6 Care and Maintenance during Temporary Discontinuance
In case of any temporary discontinuance due to court order or due to statutory

requirement or any other unforeseen circumstance following measures for care
and maintenance and monitoring of status shall be taken.
 Notice of temporary discontinuance of work in mine shall be given to the

Controller of Mines and the Regional Controller and DGMS, JDMS as per the
Rule 24 of MCDR 1988 and Reg 6 of MMR 1961 respectively,
 All the mining machinery shall be shifted to a safe place
 Entrance to the mines or part of the mines to be discontinued shall be fenced

off and Security Guards shall be posted for the safety and to restrict any
unauthorized entry to the area. Fencing shall be as per the circular 11/1959
from DGMS
 Competent persons shall inspect the area regularly
 Air, water and other environmental monitoring shall be carried out
 Care and upkeep of plantation done shall be carried out on regular basis
 Status of the working and status monitoring for re-opening of the mines shall
be discussed in weekly meeting on last working day of the week
 In case of discontinuance due to any natural calamities mining operation will

be restarted as early as possible after completing rescue work restoring
safety and security repairs of roads.

Chapter-7
Additional Studies
FIGURE-7.3
OFF-SITE EMERGENCY CHART

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
8.0 PROJECT BENEFITS
8.1 Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure
The proposed Limestone and Shale mine production would benefit in improving
civic amenities in the nearby villages. The basic requirement of the community
needs are already being met by the project as part of its Corporate Social
Responsibility and will be further strengthened by extending health care,
educational facilities developed in the township to the community. The safe
drinking water supply will be streamlined and extended to the nearby villages.
The small enterprises and business development for the youth and women will be
extended. The existing roads in the area will be strengthened. JHCP will initiate
the above amenities either by providing or by improving the existing facilities in
the area, which will help in uplifting the living standards of local communities.
The construction of new roads in the project area will enhance the transportation
facilities. With improved transportation facilities the villages in 10 km radius is
developed with many of unemployed youth opting for truck transport business
and the scope of business will be enhanced. The communication facilities will
improve after the proposed mining operations. The medical facilities would also
be available to local people in the surrounding in case of emergencies.
8.2 Corporate Social Responsibility
CSR details of existing plant and mines are given below Table-8.1 & Table-8.2. So
far an amount of over Rs. 87.46 crores has been spent on the social activities

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
TABLE-8.1
BUDGET FOR CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY TILL OCTOBER 2015
CSR ACTIVITIES AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT WORKS EXECUTED BY JAYPEE HIMACHAL CEMENT PLANT BAGA IN ADJOINING AREAS OF DISTRICT SOLAN AND BILASPUR
(HP)
Sr. Particulars Expenditure For Common For villages of Mangal Panchayat Misc. For Misc. for
No. incurred till Public of Baga / Karog Hawani Kol / Samtyari/ Bhalag / Solan Bilaspur
date ( in Bilaspur and Padiyar Kandhar Sehnali District District
Rupees ) Solan Districts
A) EDUCATION UPLIFTMENT
IN DISTRICT SOLAN
UPGRADATION OF EXISTING GOVT MIDDLE SCHOOL
1 BAGA TO 10+2 STANDARD - CONSTRUCTION OF
4,869,299 4,869,299
BUILDING AND OTHER ACTIVITIES
CONSTRUCTION OF APPROACH PATH TO GOVT MIDDLE
2 SCHOOL BAGA FROM BAGA - KANDHAR PWD ROAD
98,000 98,000
(GRAM PANCHAYAT MANGAL)
CONSTRUCTION OF GOVT. PRIMARY SCHOOL AT
3
SEHNALI & GOVT. PRIMARY SCHOOL AT DANGOEL DHAR 3,202,890 3,202,890
CONSTRUCTION OF ANGANWADI KENDRA AND
4
DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AT PADIYAR. 700,000 700,000
CONSTRUCTION OF VARANDA (10 X 5 MTRS) WITH
5 STAIR CASE AT GOVT. SENIOR SECONDARY SCHOOL AT
425,050 425,050
KANDHAR AND ASSESTS FOR BHALAG SCHOOL
FOR AN INDUSTRIAL TRAINING INSTITUTE (RURAL ITI),
6 TO BE OPENED AT KANDHAR, LAND & BUILIDNG
18,400,328 18,400,328
INFRASTRUCTURE HAVE BEEN PROCURED
DONATIONS TO VARIOUS EDUCATIONAL INSTITUTES /
7
SOCIETIES / TOURS 424,660 424,660
DESK (30 NOS) FOR GOVT. PRIMARY SCHOOL,
8
KANDHAR, MANGAL 90,000 90,000
9 DESK (30 NOS) FOR GOVT. PRIMARY SCHOOL, HAWANI 90,000 90,000
10 RCC SLAB OF MIDDLE SCHOOL, BAGA 190,000 190,000
ELECTRIC PUMP AND PIPE FOR DRINKING WATER FOR
11
GOVT. HIGH SCHOOL, BERAL 110,000 110,000
TOTAL 28,600,227 23,269,627 288,000 790,000 515,050 3,202,890 534,660

-
IN DISTRICT BILASPUR

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
Sr. Particulars Expenditure For Common For villages of Mangal Panchayat Misc. For Misc. for
No. incurred till Public of Baga / Karog Hawani Kol / Samtyari/ Bhalag / Solan Bilaspur
date ( in Bilaspur and Padiyar Kandhar Sehnali District District
Rupees ) Solan Districts
10 + 2 ENGLISH MEDIUM SCHOOL AT DHAR TATOH
12
PROVIDED WITH 6 SCHOOL BUSES 78,640,109 78,640,109
CONSTRUCTION OF TOILET BLOCK, RETAINING WALL,
13 STAIR CASE ETC. FOR GOVT. MIDDLE SCHOOL AT SAI
450,000 450,000
BRAHMANA
CONSTRUCTION OF CLASS ROOM WITH VERANDAH AND
14 OTHER FACILITIES FOR GOVT. HIGH SCHOOL AT SAI
250,000 250,000
BRAHMANA.
DEVELOPMENT OF SCHOOL GROUND AT SMOG KANETA
15
UNDER PANCHAYAT CHHAKOH 34,508 34,508
CONSTRUCTION OF BOUNDARY WALL FOR
16 DEVELOPMENT OF PLAYGROUND AT SENIOR SECONDARY
450,000 450,000
SCHOOL AT JUKHALA
CONTRIBUTION TO PROMOTE GIRL CHILDREN (FROM
17 BELOW POVERTY LINE AND BACKWARD CLASSES) TO
31,000 31,000
ACQUIRE QUALITY EDUCATION.
DONATIONS/ PRICE MONEY TO VARIOUS EDUCATIONAL
18
INSTITUTES / SOCIETIES & SCHOOLS 237,000 237,000
Total -
80,092,617 78,640,109 - - - - 1,452,508
Total (1)
108,692,844 101,909,736 288,000 790,000 515,050 3,202,890 534,660 1,452,508

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
TABLE-8.1
BUDGET FOR CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY TILL OCTOBER 2015 (Contd…)
Expenditure For Common For villages of Mangal Panchayat

Misc. for
incurred till Public of Bilaspur Misc. For
Particulars Hawani Kol / Samtyari/ Bhalag / Bilaspur
date ( in and Solan Baga / Karog Solan District
Padiyar Kandhar Sehnali District
Rupees ) Districts
B) HEALTH CARE
A HOSPITAL EQUIPPED WITH ALL FACILITIES WITHIN
OUR TOWNSHIP AREA (AT DHARTATOH - BILASPUR)
1
HAS BEEN SET UP AND COMMISSIONED FOR PUBLIC
SERVICE.
A MOBILE HEALTH VAN BESIDES AN AMBULANCE
2
HAVE ALSO BEEN DEPLOYED IN PUBLIC SERVICE. 94,084,285
94,084,285
IN ADDITION TO ABOVE, TWO DISPENSARIES (BAGA
& PANALI) ARE PROVIDING HEALTH SERVICES TO
3 LOCALS IN THE PROJECT ADJOINING AREA OF SOLAN
DISTRICT AND DISTRIBUTING MEDICINES ON FREE OF
COST BASIS.
HEALTH CAMPS IN THE PROJECT SURROUNDING
4 AREAS OF SOLAN AND BILASPUR DISTRICTS (214 1,752,500
1,752,500
CAMPS SINCE 2006 TILL DATE).
RENOVATION OF SPECIAL WARD (TWO ROOMS WITH
5 REQUIRED INFRASTRUCTURE) AT REGIONAL HOSPITAL
891,611 891,611
BILASPUR (HP).
CONTRIBUTION TO RED CROSS (HEALTH) SOCIETY
6
SOLAN (HP) 110,000 110,000
FINANCIAL HELP FOR MEDICAL TREATMENT OF
7
VILLAGERS 50,000 50,000
Total (2) 96,888,396 - - -

95,836,785 50,000 110,000 891,611

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
TABLE-8.1
Expenditure For Common Public For villages of Mangal Panchayat

Misc. For Misc. for
Particulars incurred till date ( of Bilaspur and Hawani Kol / Samtyari/ Bhalag /
Baga / Karog Solan District Bilaspur District
in Rupees ) Solan Districts Padiyar Kandhar Sehnali
C) COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT
C a) WATER SUPPLY AND PROTECTION OF NATURAL WATER SOURCES
IN DISTRICT SOLAN
TO FULFILL THE WATER REQUIRMENTS OF PROJECT AND MANGAL
PANCHAYAT, TWO WATER LIFTING SCHEMES BASED ON RIVER
1 54,725,035 13,681,259 13,681,259 13,681,259 13,681,259
SATLUJ HAS BEEN COMMISSIONED DURING 2008 AND ARE
OPERATIONAL SINCE THEN.
BASED ON ABOVE TWO SCHEMES, AN OVERALL WATER
DISTRIBUTION SCHEME FOR MANGAL PANCHAYAT, WORTH RS. 132
2 8,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000
LACS, IS UNDER IMPLEMENTATION BY IPH DEPTT. AT THE COST OF
COMPANY.
PRESENTLY, WATER IS BEING SUPPLIED TO ADJOINING VILLAGES
3 1,196,000 598,000 598,000
THROUGH WATER TANKERS
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER TANK AND LAYING OF DRINKING WATER
4 SUPPLY PIPE LINE IN VILLAGE ROOG GHATI (LENGTH - 0.50 KM) AND 673,981 673,981
VILLAGE PADIYAR (LENGTH - 2.50 KM).
5 RENOVATION OF WATER SOURCE AT BAGA. 1,336,034 1,336,034
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER TANK, PROTECTIVE RETAINING WALLS,
6 353,000 353,000
FOR BOOMAG NATURAL WATER SOURCE AT KANDHAR.
DEVELOPMENT OF NATURAL WATER SOURCE IN VILLAGE - DHOTA
7 300,000 300,000
(BAGA)
CONSTRUCTION OF PROTECTIVE WALL IN BAGA NALA TO PROTECT
8 1,467,219 1,467,219
NATURAL WATER SOURCE.
RENOVATION AND CONSTRUCTION OF 5 Nos WATER TANK IN
9 876,053 876,053
TAREDA AND BAGA NALA
10 CONSTRUCTION OF WATER TANK IN VILLAGE TAREDA. 150,000 150,000
CONSTRUCTION OF KUHALS (DRAIN - 3.50KM LONG) FOR VILLAGE
11 1,674,509 1,674,509
PADIYAR AND 2.50 KM LONG DRAIN FOR VILLAGE TAREDA .
LAYING OF PIPELINE 1200m & CONSTRUCTION OF WATER TANK IN
12 595,868 595,868
VILLAGE SEHNALI
Total 71,347,699 - 20,408,565 18,029,749 16,632,259 16,277,127 - -

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
TABLE-8.1
Particulars Expenditure For For villages of Mangal Panchayat Misc. For Misc. for
incurred till Common Solan Bilaspur
date ( in Public of District District
Rupees ) Bilaspur
and Solan
Districts
Baga / Karog Hawani Kol / Samtyari/ Bhalag /
Padiyar Kandhar Sehnali
INSTALLATION OF TUBE WELL, CONSTRUCTION OF WATER
13 TANK AND LAYING OF WATER PIPE LINE ETC. FOR WATER 490,000
490,000
SUPPLY SCHEME FOR KHARSI
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER TANK AND LAYING OF DRINKING
14 WATER SUPPLY PIPE LINE IN VILLAGE DROBER (LENGTH - 250,000
250,000
1.50 KM)
15 DEVELOPMENT OF NATURAL WATER SOURCE AT BHARETAR. 37,488

37,488
16 Development of water source at Jajjar, Dhar Tatoh 56,000

56,000
Total - - 833,488
833,488 - - - -
Total (3 A) 18,029,749 16,632,259 833,488

72,181,187 - 20,408,565 16,277,127 -
C b) PRESERVATION OF RELIGIOUS PLACES, CULTURE, SPORTS AND
TRADITIONAL ART
IN DISTRICT SOLAN
CONSTRUCTION OF BADU BADA DEV TEMPLE AT
1 SHALUGHAT (SHALUGHAT TEMPLE) AND ASSOCIATED
AFFAIRS
18,693,184 18,693,184
CONSTRUCTION OF BADU BADA DEV TEMPLE, SARAI ROOM
2
DEVELOPMENT OF GROUND AT BAGA (BAGA TEMPLE)
CONSTRUCTION OF SIDH BABA BALAK NATH TEMPLE AND
3 SARAI ROOM AT PADIYAR INCLUDING COST OF 1,240,088
1,240,088
ELECTRIFICATION.
KOTA STONE & MARBLE FLOORING FOR TEMPLE AT BUGHAR
4
(BADIYAR). 100,000 100,000
5 MAA DURGA MANDIR NIRMAN COMMITTEE FOREST COLONY

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
Particulars Expenditure For For villages of Mangal Panchayat Misc. For Misc. for
incurred till Common Solan Bilaspur
date ( in Public of District District
Rupees ) Bilaspur
and Solan
Districts
Baga / Karog Hawani Kol / Samtyari/ Bhalag /
Padiyar Kandhar Sehnali
KUNIHAR 20,000 20,000
CONSTRUCTION OF SHIVA TEMPLE AT BHALAG AND
6
ASSOCIATED AFFAIRS 1,571,318 1,571,318
CONTRIBUTIONS TO DISTRICT LEVEL "SAIR UTSAV" ANNUAL
7
FUNCTION - ARKI 1,750,000 1,750,000
CONTRIBUTIONS TO STATE LEVEL "SHOOLNI FAIR" ANNUAL
8
FUNCTION - SOLAN. 2,579,000 2,579,000
CONTRIBUTIONS TO VARIOUS LOCAL CULTURAL MELA
9 COMMITTEES (DARLAGHAT, SHALAGHAT, BADDI,
490,781 490,781
DHUNDHAN, BAGA ETC.).
CONTRIBUTION TO VARIOUS SPORTS TOURNAMENTS
10 (INCLUDING IN-DOOR) AT VARIOUS LEVELS IN THE STATE /
1,162,250 1,162,250
DISTRICT SOLAN
11 DONATION TO MARRIAGE & OTHER FUNCTIONS

117,100 117,100
PARTICIPATION FEE GIVEN TO MINES ENVIRONMENT &
12
MINERAL CONSERVATION CELEBRATION COMMITTEE 45,000 45,000
CONTRIBUTION TO AKHIL BHARATIYA CEMENT MAZDOOR
13
MAHASANGH 10,000 10,000
14 Supply of Electricity to Baba Balak Nath Mandir 150,000 150,000
Supply of cement 400 Bags for construction of Sarai at Baba
15 120,000 120,000
Balak Nath Mandir
16 Stairs for Baba Badudev Temple, Panali 65,000 65,000
17 Development work for Temple at Torti 306,000 306,000
18 Manpower for maintenanace of Baba Badudev Temple, Baga 400,000 400,000
Supply of cement 270 Bags for Sh Badu Bada mandir,
19
Shalughat 81,000 81,000
Supply of cement 250 Bags for Sh Badu Bada mandir,
20 60,000
Kandhar 60,000
21 Supply of cement 200 Bags for Shiv Mandir, Badi dhar 60,000 60,000
Total 29,020,721 270,000 19,239,184 1,546,088 60,000 1,571,318 6,334,131 -

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
TABLE-8.1
For villages of Mangal Panchayat

Expenditure
For Common Misc. for
incurred till Misc. For
Particulars Public of Bilaspur Hawani Kol / Samtyari/ Bhalag / Bilaspur
date (in Baga / Karog Solan District
and Solan Padiyar Kandhar Sehnali District
Rupees)
Districts
PAYMENT TO TEMPLE COMMITTEE FOR
22 RENOVATION OF SHRI MATA NAINA DEVI 137,208 137,208
MANDIR NEAR LADAGHAT.
CONTRIBUTIONS TO RAM LEELA / NATAK
COMMITTEES / SAMITIES AT KAROT, MALOTHI
23 146,950 146,950
MALOKHAR, CHAKOH AND DEVELOPMENT OF
RAMLEELA MAIDAN AT KAROT NEAR JABBAL.
CONTRIBUTIONS TO STATE LEVEL "NALWARI
24 1,475,000 1,475,000
FAIR" ANNUAL FUNCTION - BILASPUR
CONTRIBUTIONS TO RISHI MARKANDAY JILA
25 STARIYA KRISHAK VIKAS & PASHU PALAK 50,000 50,000
SAIR MELA SAMITI JUKHALA.
CONTRIBUTION FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
26 PROTECTION WALL FOR CRICKET STADIUM AT 750,000 750,000
LUHNU, BILASPUR, DISTRICT BILASPUR.
CONTRIBUTION TO HP FOREST SPORTS AND
27 194,660 194,660
WELFARE SOCIETY BILASPUR.
CONTRIBUTION TO RURAL CRICKET
28 31,000 31,000
TOURNAMENT IN CHAKOH AND RANIKOTLA.
CONTRIBUTION TO HIM KALA SANGAM
RANIKOTALA, JAGRITI YUVA CLUB MALOKHAR
29 AND CHETNA ASSOCIATION BILASPUR FOR 172,403 172,403
PROMOTION OF CULTURAL AND TRADITIONAL
ART.
CONTRIBUTION TO VARIOUS SPORTS
TOURNAMENTS (INCLUDING IN-DOOR) AT
30 25,000 25,000
VARIOUS LEVELS IN THE STATE / DISTRICT
BILASPUR
CONTRIBUTIONS TO VARIOUS CULTURAL
31 MELA COMMITTEES (BILASPUR, SUNDER 50,525 50,525
NAGAR, MANDI ETC.).

Chapter-8
Project Benefits

Expenditure
Particulars Public of Bilaspur Hawani Kol / Samtyari/ Bhalag / Bilaspur
date (in Baga / Karog Solan District
and Solan Padiyar Kandhar Sehnali District
Rupees)
Districts
Supply of cement 40 bags for Sidh Mandir,
32 12,000 12,000
Malokhar
Supply of cement 50 bags for footpath at
33 15,000 15,000
KHARSI Thru Pradhan, Transport Society
Supply of cement 125 bags for road thru
34 37,500 37,500
Pradhan Sai Brahmana
Supply of cement 225 bags for Mukti Dham
35 67,500 67,500
Nirman Samiti, Bharatpur, Bilaspur
Supply of cement 200 bags for Sh. Naina
36 60,000 60,000
Mata Mandir, Malothi
Supply of cement 270 bags ,sand and other
37 misc. material for Sh. Badudev Mandir 120,000 120,000
Salughat
Total 3,344,746 - 120,000 - - - - 3,224,746
Total (3 B) 32,365,467 270,000 19,359,184 1,546,088 60,000 1,571,318 6,334,131 3,224,746

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
TABLE-8.1
Particulars Expenditure incurred For villages of Mangal Panchayat Misc. For Solan Misc. for
till date ( in Rupees ) For Common Baga / Hawani Kol / Samtyari/ Bhalag / District Bilaspur
Public of Karog Padiyar Kandhar Sehnali District
Bilaspur and
Solan Districts
C c) INFRASTRUCTURES SUPPORT AND CREATION OF DURABLE COMMUNITY
ASSETS cec
IN DISTRICT SOLAN
MAINTENANCE AND IMPROVEMENT OF HPPWD ROAD
1 8,272,030 2,068,008 2,068,008 2,068,008 2,068,008
BETWEEN BAGA AND KANDHAR.
MAINTENANCE OF BAGA - TORTI MANDIR ROAD (PAID TO
2 219,000 219,000
PWD IN JAN 2010)
CONSTRUCTION OF 6.00 km LONG FOOTPATH FROM BAGA
3 1,500,000 750,000 750,000
TO TAREDA.
CONSTRUCTION OF RETAINING WALL AND FOOTPATH
4 ALONG BAGA - KANDHAR ROAD IN VILLAGE BAGA & MARKET 3,141,551 3,141,551
AREA
CONSTRUCTION OF 1.50 km LONG FOOTPATH FROM ROOG
5 GHATI TO VILLAGE - DHOTA (BAGA) AND FROM BAGA TO 430,521 215,261 215,261
KAROG
CONSTRUCTION OF 1.50 km LONG FOOTPATH FROM ROOG
6 375,000 375,000
GHATI TO HAWANI.
CONSTRUCTION OF 1.00 km LONG FOOTPATH FROM
7 250,000 250,000
SAMTYARI TO BAGICHARU (Shmashan ghat)
CONSTRUCTION OF FOOTPATHS FROM MAIN ROAD (PWD)
NEAR STATE BANK OF PATIALA TO VILLAGE GHERI FROM
8 JUNIOR MIDDLE SCHOOL TO VILLAGE DHOTA AND FROM 331,463 331,463
VILLAGE BAGA (NEAR WATER SOURCE) TO VILLAGE GHERI
(GRAM PANCHAYAT MANGAL).
Construction of footpath for Punnu Ram House in village
9 100,000 100,000
Bhalag 600 mtr
Construction of road from New Bhalag to Chunnilal House
10 600,000 600,000
(1.0 KM)
Construction of Pucca Footpath in Village Baga and Karog
11 520,000 520,000
(2.2 KM)
CONSTRUCTION OF PUCCA FOOTPATH AT KANDHAR NEAR
12 500,000 500,000
BHOOMAG

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
Particulars Expenditure incurred For villages of Mangal Panchayat Misc. For Solan Misc. for
till date ( in Rupees ) For Common Baga / Hawani Kol / Samtyari/ Bhalag / District Bilaspur
Public of Karog Padiyar Kandhar Sehnali District
Bilaspur and
Solan Districts
CONSTRUCTION OF FOOTPATH FOR VILLAGE CHHAMYATAR
13 114,172 114,172
FROM BHALAG
CONSTRUCTION OF FOOTPATH AND ROAD AT SEHNALI
14 2,058,587 2,058,587
VILLAGE
CONSTRUCTION OF 3 Nos PULIA (CROSS CULVERTS) IN
15 954,705 954,705
TAREDA NALA.
CONSTRUCTION OF 2 Nos PULIA (CROSS CULVERTS) IN
16 300,000 300,000
PADIYAR NALA.
INSTALLATION OF 13 Nos SOLAR LIGHT IN VILLAGE
17 745,790 745,790
PADIYAR
CONTRIBUTION FOR COWSHED CONSTRUCTION AT
18 380,128 380,128
PADIYAR
PROCUREMENT OF LAND FOR MANGAL LAND LOOSERS
19 250,000 62,500 62,500 62,500 62,500
SOCIETY
CONSTRUCTION OF TRUCK UNION (MANGAL) OFFICE AT
20 68,192 17,048 17,048 17,048 17,048
SHALUGHAT
CONSTRUCTION OF MULTIPURPOSE COOPERATIVE SOCIETY
21 1,079,396 1,079,396
AT KANDHAR
22 KOL LAND WORK 228,897 228,897
23 Foothpath for forest rest house, Kandhar 50,000 50,000
Total 22,469,432 - 8,060,535 5,132,734 4,141,124 4,906,143 228,897 -

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
TABLE-8.1
Particulars Expenditure incurred till For villages of Mangal Panchayat Misc. For Misc. for
date ( in Rupees ) For Common Baga / Hawani Kol Samtyari/ Bhalag / Solan District Bilaspur
Public of Karog / Padiyar Kandhar Sehnali District
Bilaspur and
Solan Districts
IMPROVEMENT / WIDENING OF SINGLE LANE PWD ROAD
24 BETWEEN BAGA (SHALUGHAT) - JABBAL (15 KMS) TO NH
485,893,018 485,893,018
STANDARDS AND ITS MAINTENANCE.
CONSTRUCTION OF RETAINING WALL AT CHANDIGARH -
25 MANDI - MANALI ROAD (NH – 21) DURING THE YEAR 2008-
1,257,000 1,257,000
09 NEAR SWARGHAT.
MATALLING AND TARRING OF ROAD SIDE BERMS NEAR
26 EXCISE BARRIER SWARGHAT TO CREAT DEDICATED TRUCK
1,020,729 1,020,729
LANE TO AVOID TRAFFIC DECONGESTION AT NH - 21.
CONTRIBUTION FOR CCTV CAMERA AND OTHER FACILITY AT
27
NH - 21 NEAR NAUNI MORE IN DISTT. BILASPUR. 600,000 600,000
EXCAVATION WORK AT NARROW WIDTH NEAR GHAGAS
28
BRIDGE ON NH – 88 IN BRAHMPUKHAR - GHAGAS SECTION. 500,000 500,000
ROAD WIDENING ARRANGEMENT BY PROVIDING OF CC
29 RETAINING WALL AT NARROW PORTION OF NH – 88 NEAR
600,000 600,000
GHAGAS BRIDGE
CONSTRUCTION OF RCC HUME PIPE CULVERT AND
30
RETAINING WALL AT JUKHALA (NH - 88) 500,000 500,000
IMPROVMENT OF ROAD UNDER "SOLDHA PANCHAYAT" AND
31
ROAD TO LOWER SAI BRAHMNA. 17,340 17,340
CONTRIBUTION TO GRAM PANCHAYAT SAI KHARSI FOR
32 DEVELOPMENT OF LINK ROAD FROM NAVGAUN - BERI ROAD
53,525 53,525
TO KHARSI BRAHMANA.
IMPROVEMENT / DEVELOPMENT OF PATH CONNECTING SAI
33
BRAHMANA VILLAGE TO KHARSI SHALUGHAT ROAD. 40,000 40,000
34 IMPROVEMENT & DEVELOPMENT OF PATH AT KHARSI
28,723 28,723
CONSTRUCTION OF PATHWAY TO SAMSHAN GHAT AT
35
KHARSI 850,000 850,000
CONTRUCTION OF PUCCA SHED AT SAMSHAN GHAT AT
36
MALOTHI 50,000 50,000

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
Particulars Expenditure incurred till For villages of Mangal Panchayat Misc. For Misc. for
date ( in Rupees ) For Common Baga / Hawani Kol Samtyari/ Bhalag / Solan District Bilaspur
Public of Karog / Padiyar Kandhar Sehnali District
Bilaspur and
Solan Districts
CONSTRUCTION OF RETAINING WALL & SEPTIC TANK FOR
37
FOREST GUARD HUT AT MESSGHATI (MALOKHAR) 41,893 41,893
WATER SUPPLY CONNECTION AND OTHER REPAIR WORKS
38
AT PATWARKHANNA RANI KOTLA 75,000 75,000
CONSTRUCTION OF RR MASONARY RETAINING WALL FOR
39 PROTECTION OF PANCHAYAT GHAR AND DEVELOPMENT OF
100,000 100,000
GROUND AT SAI BRAHMANA.

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
TABLE-8.1

Expenditure
Particulars Public of Hawani Kol / Samtyari/ Bhalag / Bilaspur
date ( in Baga / Karog Solan District
Bilaspur and Padiyar Kandhar Sehnali District
Rupees )
Solan Districts
40 CONSTRUCTION OF RAIN SHELTER AT RANIKOTLA 275,000 275,000
41 CONSTRUCTION OF FOOTPATH AT NERI VILLAGE 267,558 267,558
IMPROVEMENT OF MALOKHAR CHOWK AND 4 NO'S
42 103,719 103,719
OF STREET LIGHTS (SOLAR LAMPS)
43 REPAIR OF PATWAR KHANNA (CHAKOH). 20,000 20,000
44 REPAIR OF PATWAR KHANNA (BHOLI). 25,000 25,000
WHITE WASHING AND PIPE FITTING FOR
45 16,350 16,350
TEHSILDAR OFFICE AT BILASPUR
47 Police Assistance post at Kharsi 75,000 75,000
Total 492,409,855 485,893,018 - - - - - 6,516,837
Total (3 C) 514,879,287 485,893,018 8,060,535 5,132,734 4,141,124 4,906,143 228,897 6,516,837
Total 3 (A + B +C) 619,425,941 486,163,018 47,828,284 24,708,571 20,833,382 22,754,587 6,563,028 10,575,071
D) WOMAN EMPOWERMENT
CONSTRUCTION OF MAHILA MANDAL BUILDING AT
BAGA (DISTRICT SOLAN) DEVELOPMENT OF LAND
1 183,000 183,000
THEREFORE & CONTRIBUTIONS TO VARIOUS MAHILA
MANDALS OPERATING AT DISTRICT SOLAN
CONTRIBUTIONS TO VARIOUS MAHILA MANDALS
OPERATING AT DHARTATOH, PANJAIL PACHCH,
2 36,000 36,000
HARDI KOTHI AND SAI BRAHMNA PANCHAYATS OF
DISTRICT BILASPUR.
Total (4) 219,000 - 183,000 - - - - 36,000
E) LAW & ORDER
LAW AND ORDER MAINTENANCE IN AND AROUND
1 49,398,971 49,398,971
PROJECT AREA
GRAND TOTAL (1+2+3+4+5) 874,625,152 733,308,510 48,349,284 25,498,571 21,348,432 25,957,477 7,207,688 12,955,190
Rs. (In crores) 87.46 73.33 4.83 2.55 2.13 2.60 0.72 1.30

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
TABLE-8.2
THE PROPOSED BUDGET FOR CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY
Sr. Expenditure
Particulars
No (Rs. In lakhs)
1 Education
i. School books, uniforms, conveyance to school children 5.00
ii. Scholarships 2.00
iii. Repairs and Maintenance of school buildings 5.00
2 Health camps 1.00
3 Water supply & sanitation in villages 1.00
4 Training of village women 1.00
5 Maintenance of village roads 3.00
6 Plantation in villages 2.00
Sub Total 20.00
8.3 Employment Potential
The impact of proposed mine on the economic aspects can be clearly observed.
The proposed project has facilitated in providing direct and indirect employment
to persons of different skills and trades. The local population is given preference
and the same is expected to continue in employment. The employment potential
will ameliorate economic conditions of these families directly and provide
employment to many other families indirectly who are involved in business and
service oriented activities.
The employment of local people in primary and secondary sectors of project shall
upgrade the prosperity of the region. These will in-turn improves the socio-
economic conditions of the area. The total manpower required for the proposed
project during operation is about 137 persons will be mainly sourced from local
community depending upon requirement & qualification in and around project
area and few technical persons will be also employed. In addition to the above,
contractual labour and indirect employment opportunities will also getting
benefited.
This project is expected to yield a positive impact on the socio-economic

environment of the region. It helps in sustainable development of this area
including further development of physical infrastructural facilities.

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
FIGURE-8.1
PHOTOGRAPHS OF EXISTING CSR INITIATIVES

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
Hospital Equipped with

- Pathlogist department
- Diagnostic lab
- Audiometric facility
- Dental Care
- Medicine
- Radio diagnosis X-ray/ECG
HOSPITAL AT DHARTATOH TOWNSHIP

AREA (BILASPUR DISTRICT)
FIGURE-8.1A

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
JAYPEE VIDYA MANDIR AT PANCHATANTRA (SHALUGHAT)
SCHOOL BUILDING AT SEHNALI
FIGURE-8.1B

Chapter-8
Project Benefits
JAYPEE VIDYA MANDIR
UPGRADED SCHOOL BUILDING
FIGURE-8.1C
Chapter-8
Project Benefits
CONSTRUCTION OF TEMPLE AT SHALUGHAT (SOLAN) AND DAUD (BILASPUR)
TANKER FOR WATER SUPPLY AT BAGA CONSTRUCTION OF MAHILA MANDAL CENTRE

VILLAGE
FIGURE-8.1D
Chapter-9
Administrative Aspects
9.0 ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS
9.1 Institutional Arrangements for Environment Protection and Conservation
The mine will be supervised and controlled by the head, supported by General
Manager (Plant operations) and manager (Mines) and adequate team of
technically and statutorily qualified personnel apart from the operating staff of
skilled, semi skilled, unskilled and other categories. The organizational structure
of environment cell for Mine lease area is presented in Figure-9.1.
The Environmental Engineer will be responsible for environment management

activities in the mine. As conscious of this, JHCP will create a department
consisting of officers from various disciplines to co-ordinate the activities
concerned with the management and implementation of the environmental
control measures.
Basically, this department will supervise the monitoring of environmental

pollution levels viz. ambient air quality, water and effluent quality, noise level
either departmentally or by appointing external agencies wherever necessary.
In case the monitored results of environmental pollution found to exceed the

allowable limits, the environmental management cell will suggest remedial action
and get these suggestions implemented through the concerned authorities.
The environmental management cell will also co-ordinate all the related activities
such as collection of statistics of health of workers and population of the region,
afforestation and green belt development.

Chapter-9
Administrative Aspects
FIGURE-9.1
ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE OF ENVIRONMENT CELL
Chapter-10
Summary & Conclusions
10.0 SUMMARY & CONCLUSIONS
10.1 Introduction
Jaypee Himachal Cement Plant (JHCP) a unit of Jaiprakash Associates

Limited (JAL) is proposing Baga-Bhalag Limstone and Shale Deposit for
production capacity of 4.0 MTPA (3.60 MTPA Limestone and 0.40 MTPA Shale) ML
area of 172.7434 ha at Baga, Bhalag, Samtyari, Padiyar & Sehnali villages, Arki
tehsil, Solan district and Soldha & Mains villages of Sadar Tehsil, Bilaspur district,
Himachal Pradesh state.
 Justification of the Project
 Project Background
 JHCP has set up an integrated cement plant (Line-I) to produce 2.05 MTPA
clinker and 2.54 MTPA cement at Baga village, Arki tehsil, Solan district,
Himachal Pradesh, after receiving Environmental clearance from MoEF vide its
letter no: J-11011/26/2006-IA.II (I) dated 18th May 2006;
 Subsequently, the Environmental Clearance was amended for augmentation in

clinker production capacity from 2.05 MTPA to 2.97 MTPA vide letter Ref. No.
J-11011/1216/2007-IA (I) dated 24th December, 2013;
 To utilize the existing facilities installed at site, JHCP proposes to de-

bottleneck and rationalize capacity usage of certain plant sections of Line-I
cement plant to achieve the higher level of production of clinker from 2.97
MTPA to 3.5 MTPA. Expansion of clinker production by 17.85% capacity.
Received TOR from MoEF&CC, vide letter F.No.J-11011/1216/2007-IA II(I)
dated 15th July, 2015 for clinker expansion; and
 JHCP also proposed expansion of cement plant by installing additional plant

(Line-II) to produce 2.50 MTPA clinker and 1.50 MTPA cement, within existing
cement plant premises. MoEF&CC issued combined TOR for Line-I clinker
expansion and Line-II additional cement plant vide letter no: F.No.J-
11011/1216/2007-IA II(I) dated 29th September, 2015.
Both the Cement plant (Line-I & Line-II) with combined clinker production
capacity of 6.0 MTPA will ultimately require about 9.25 MTPA limestone and shale.
JHCP Captive Mines
 JHCP is operating limestone mine with a production capacity of 2.8 MTPA and
0.3 MTPA of limestone stone and shale in ML area of 331.424 ha.
Environmental clearance obtained from MOEF&CC vide letter NO: J-
11015/11/2006-IA-II(M) dated 7th September, 2006;
 JHCP proposes production enhancement from 3.10 MTPA to 5.25 MTPA of

captive Baga-Bhalag lime stone and shale within existing mining lease area of
331.424 ha to meet limestone requirement of Line-I clinker expansion. The
Chapter-10
project has been recommended for Environmental Clearance by MoEF&CC vide

MOM of the EAC meeting held during 21st -22nd March, 2016.
 Project Justification
Now, to meet the raw material requirement of cement plant (Line-II), the
area in the three blocks i.e. Baga block, Bhalag block and Samtyari block over an
area of 172.7434 ha with a production capacity of 4.0 MTPA.
The Govt. of Himachal Pradesh has issued a letter of Intent (LOI) for Lime stone
and Shale Mine (172.7434 ha) in favour of M/s Jaiprakash Associates Limited vide
letter, no. Udyog-Bhu (khani-4) Major – 2662009-8669 dated 04.12.2013.
 Project Description
The mining project is proposed Baga-Bhalag Limstone and Shale Deposit for
production capacity of 4.0 MTPA (3.60 MTPA Limestone and 0.40 MTPA Shale) ML
area of 172.7434 ha. The life of mine at the proposed production rate for lime
stone and shale is up to 30 years. Total cost of the project is about 222 crores.
10.2 Environmental Setting
The study area covers 10-km radius around the proposed mine lease area. The
environmental setting of the proposed mine site is as follows:
The environmental setting within 10 km of the project site given in Table-10.1.

Topo sheet representing location map of 1:50,000 scale covering land use/land
cover, reserve forests, wildlife sanctuaries, national parks, tiger reserves etc (if
any) within 10 km of the project site is shown in Figure-1.2 of Chapter-1.
TABLE-10.1
DETAILS OF ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING (10 KM RADIUS)

No.
1 Location
a Village Baga, Bhalag, Samtyari, Padiyar, Sehnali villages, Arki
Tehsil, Soldha and Mains villages, Sadar Tehsil
b Tehsil Arki & Sadar
c District Solan & Bilaspur
d State Himachal Pradesh
e Geographical co-ordinates N 310 18’ 59.0” – N 310 19’ 25.3” – N 310 20’ 16.7” –
31 19’ 21.1”
0 310 20’ 01.3” 310 21’ 24.1”
E 76 53’ 16.4” –
0 E 76 54’ 08.1” –
0 E 760 53’ 21.6” –
760 53’ 42.0” 760 54’ 44.6” 760 54’ 44.8”
2 Elevation (MSL) 1540-1645 m 945-1340 m 675-1410 m
3 Area 9.1204 ha 36.8243 ha 126.7987 ha
4 Climatic conditions As per IMD, Sundarnagar (Annual)
Minimum Temp : 3.0°C
Maximum Temp : 34.3°C

Chapter-10

No.
Average rainfall : 1497.8 mm
5 Nearest NH-88 6.4 km, S 6.8 km, S 8.3 km, NW
highway
6 Nearest Kiratpur- 35.0 km, SW 37.0 km, SW 36.0 km, SW
railhead
/Railway
station
7 Nearest Simla 30.0 km, SE 30.0 km, SE 32.0 km, SE
airport
8 Defense installations Nil Nil Nil
9 Archaeological important places Nil Nil Nil
10 Ecological Sensitive Areas (National Parks, Wildlife sanctuaries)
1 Bandli WLS 11.3 km, N 9.9 km, N 7.5 km, N
2 Majathal WLS 4.7 km, ESE 3.7 km, SE 6.1 km, SE
Status of wildlife clearance:- An application for obtaining recommendations and NOC from the
National Board of Wild Life for additional ML area of 172.7434 has been submitted to Divisional
Forest Office (wildlife) Shimla & Kullu vide letter no: JAL/JHCP/Mines/WL/2015/N0. 18676
dated 23rd June, 2015. Letter attached as an Annexure-VI.
11 Reserved/Protected forests within 10 km radius
12 Other Industries in 10 km radius
1 Ambuja Cement 6.7 km, SSE 6.9 km, S 9.2 km, SSE
2 DharlaghatLimest 9.0 km, SE 8.7 km, SSE 11.1 km, SSE
one Mines
(Ambuja)
3 ACC Cement 9.6 km, NNW 9.4 km, NW 6.9 km, NW
Plant
4 ACC Mine 9.2 km, NNW 8.9 km, NW 6.5 km, NW
13 Nearest Bilaspur 12.0 km, W 13.2 km, W 12.3 km, W
major city
14 Nearest settlement Thar Village, 0.1 Bhalag Village, Karyard Village,

Chapter-10

No.
km, SW Adjacent, NW 0.2 km , E
15 Water bodies
1 Satluj River 3.2 km, N 2.9 km, E 0.7 km, N
2 Alikhand River 3.7 km, S 4.2 km, S 6.3 km, S
3 Bahairari Khad 10.1 km, N 9.3 km, N 6.9 km, N
16 R & R issues Acquisition of land under process

17 Seismic zone Zone Zone-V as per IS 1893 (part-1) 2002
10.3 Project Description
10.3.1 Salient Features of Limestone Mine
The salient features of Limestone Mine are given below in the Table-10.2.
TABLE-10.2
SALIENT FEATURES OF LIMESTONE MINE
Sr. No. Description Details

Baga Block Bhalag Block Samtyari Block
1 Name of the mine lease Baga & Bhalag limestone and shale mine
2 Mine lease (ML) area 172.7434 ha
3 Location & co-ordinates Arki & Sadar tehsils, Solan & Bilaspur districts, Himachal Pradesh
4 Latitude Latitude Latitude
31018’59.0”– 31019’21.1”N 31019’25.3”–31020’01.3”N 31020’16.7”–31021’24.1”N
Longitude Longitude Longitude
76053’16.4”–76053’42.0” E 76054’08.1”–76054’44.6” E 76053’21.6”–76054’44.8” E
5 Elevation MSL 1540-1645 MSL 945-1340 MSL 675-1410 MSL
6 Type of ML area Forest & private land
7 Capacity of mine 4.0 MTPA
3.60 MTPA - limestone production
0.40 MTPA - shale
8 Expected life of mine 30 years
9 Method of mining Open cast mechanized mining by shovel dumper combination

10 Mineable reserves Lime stone-65.731 million tonnes
11 Geological reserves Lime stone-244.436 million tonnes
12 Over burden thickness Nil
13 Average stripping ratio 1:0.0 (No OB Generation)
(Limestone : OB)
14 Maximum depth of mining 105 m 345 m 560 m
15 Safety zone 7.5 m around ML boundary

16 Working hours 2 shift per day of 8 hrs in 330 days of operation in a year
17 Maximum bench height 10 m
18 Bench Width 10-15 m at least
19 Working bench angle 15o with vertical
20 Overall final pit slope 45o to the horizontal
21 Water requirement 150 m3 per day
22 Water source From existing allocation of 3500 m3/day water from Treda & Padiyar nalla near the
confluence of Sutluj river
23 Power requirement 100-150 KV
24 Source of power State Electricity Board
25 Manpower requirement 137 nos.
26 Transport of OB Dumpers of capacity 35 T
Source: Mine Plan * No reserve estimation of Bhalag Block is done

Chapter-10
10.4 Project Features
 Land Requirement
The total area for mining of limestone is about 172.7434 ha for which letter of
intent has been issued by Himachal Pradesh government.
 Water Requirement
150 m3/day shall be met from existing allocation of 3500 m3/day water from
Treda and Padiyar nalla near the confluence with Satluj river that flows at a
distance of about 2.5 km from the ML area.
 Power Requirement
Power requirement for mining operations which includes operation of crusher,

closed belt and pipe conveyor and maintenance of mining machinery. Power
requirement will be met from State Electricity Board. In accordance with the
statutory requirements, the mine haul roads, excavation faces and other working
sites is being illuminated.
10.5 Method of Mining
The method of mining will be open cast working with formation of benches by
fully mechanized means. The mechanized method will consist of the following
operations:
 Drilling and blasting using DTH Drills;

 Excavation and loading by Hydraulic excavators,
 Haulage by high capacity rear dumpers up to crusher.
10.6 Land use Pattern
The additional mine lease area of 172.7434 ha involve 135.5843 ha of

government/forest land, out of which 9.1582 ha is already diverted and for
balance 126.4261 ha, on online proposal vide Ref. No. FP/HP/MIN/14832/2015
dated 20.08.2015 seeking prior approval of the Central Government under Forest
(Conservation) Act 1980 for diversion of 126.4261 ha of government/forest land
has been submitted to MoEF&CC, Government of India
The details of land use pattern of the lease area is given below in Table-10.3.
TABLE-10.3(A)
PRESENT LANDUSE PATTERN
Particulars Forest Private Inhabited Land Others Total

Land Land
waste & O.B.
(c) Tar road, foot 2.50 - - - 2.50*
track, structures
Chapter-10
Particulars Forest Private Inhabited Land Others Total

Land Land
(d) Habitation - - 0.6660 - 0.6660
(e) Others (intact)
(i) Forest land 133.0842 - - - 133.0842
Total occupied area 135.5842 36.4932 0.6660 - 172.7434
(g) Area backfilled by applicant – Nil (h) Area afforested by applied – Nil (* PDW Road)
TABLE-10.3(B)

Land Land Land
(a) Pits & Quarries 14.00 - - - 14.00
waste & O.B.
(c) Infrastructure 5.00 - - - 5.00*
Tar Road, Haulage,
Foot Track
(d) Habitation - - 0.6660 - 0.6660
(e) Others (intact)
(i) Forest land 116.5842 - - - 116.5842
TABLE-10.3(C)

Land Land Land
(a) Pits & Quarries 109.0 - - - 109.0
waste & O.B.
(c) Infrastructure 7.50 - - - 7.50
Tar Road, Haulage,
Foot Track
(e) Others (intact)
(i) Forest land 19.0842 - - - 19.0842
(f) Area to be backfilled by mine owner - Nil
(g) Area to be afforested by mine owner-20.0 ha
Source: Mine Plan

Chapter-10
10.7 Reclamation and Afforestation Programme
Reclamation and rehabilitation work will be taken up along with mining. Plantation
scheme will be taken up systematically with soil binding grasses and shrubs and
followed by trees plantation at magazine section, below the mines road (slopes),
along the mines road, mines office premises, crusher and adjoining areas.
10.8 Baseline Environmental Status
The baseline data monitoring studies have been carried out for three months
covering Post-monsoon season 2015 (October 2015 to December 2015).
10.8.1 Land Use
Based on the census report, 10-km radial distance around this mine has been
considered in the study. The revenue forest land is 12122.89 ha (30.74%) of the
total geographic area. The irrigated land admeasures to about 1601.14 ha in the
study area which works out to be 4.06% of total study area. The un-irrigated land
admeasures about 6262.67 ha and works out to about 15.88% of the total study
area and 5.31% cultivable wastelands.
10.8.2 Soil Quality
Thirteen soil samples were collected and analyzed in and around the mine lease
area to assess the present soil quality of the region. The pH of the soil indicates
that the soil is slightly alkaline to strongly alkaline in nature. The nitrogen
concentration was observed to be in the range of very less to better category.
Phosphorous concentration was observed to be in the range of medium to more
than sufficient category. Potassium concentration was observed to be in the range
of less to average category. Based on the results, it is evident that the soils are
not contaminated by any pollution sources.
10.8.3 Meteorology
Meteorological data at the site was monitored during October to December 2015
representing Post-monsoon season of 2015. It was observed that the during
study period, temperature ranged from 9.5 0C to 27.30C and the relative humidity
recorded in the range of 36% to 69%.
10.8.4 Ambient Air Quality
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) was carried out at fifteen locations with a
frequency of two days per week for three months during post-monsoon season of
2015. The minimum and maximum values of PM10 were observed in the range of
32.4-62.3 g/m3. The results thus obtained indicate that the concentrations of
PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx and CO in the ambient air are well within the National
Ambient Air Quality (NAAQ) standards for Residential and Rural areas.

Chapter-10
10.8.5 Water Quality
To assess the physical and chemical properties of water in the region, water
samples from ten ground water and four surface water locations were collected
and analysed from various water sources around the project site.
 Ground Water
 The pH ranges in between 7.07 to 7.89, which is well within the specified
standard of 6.5 to 8.5. The minimum pH of 7.07 was observed at GW9 and the
maximum pH of 7.89 was observed at GW2.
 Total hardness was observed to be ranging from 140 to 366 mg/l. The
minimum hardness (140 mg/l) was recorded at GW2 and the maximum
hardness (366 mg/l) was recorded at GW3.
 Chlorides were found to be in the range of 5.7 mg/l to 15.6 mg/l, the minimum
concentration of chlorides (5.7 mg/l) was observed at GW10, whereas the
maximum value of chlorides (15.6 mg/l) was observed at GW1 & GW9.
 Sulphates were found to be in the range of 4.0 mg/l to 51.7 mg/l. The
minimum value observed at GW2 (4.0 mg/l) whereas the maximum value
observed at GW8 (51.7 mg/l).
 The Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) concentrations were found to be ranging in

between 240 to 530 mg/l, the minimum TDS observed at GW2 (240 mg/l) and
maximum concentration of TDS observed at GW3 (530 mg/l).
 Iron is found in between 0.04 mg/l to 0.57 mg/l and Zinc found 0.13 mg/l to
1.44 mg/l.
The results indicate ground water is in conformity with IS-10500 standards.
 Surface Water
 The analysis results indicate that the pH values were found to be 7.40 to 7.78.
 DO was observed to be in the range of 5.2 to 5.6 mg/l. The TDS was observed
in the range of 250 mg/l to 350 mg/l, the minimum TDS value was observed at
SW3, and where as maximum value was observed at SW1.
 The chlorides and Sulphates were found to be in the range of 5.7 to 12.8 mg/l
and 1.5 to 68.3 mg/l, respectively.
 Total hardness expressed as CaCO3 ranges between 172 to 260 mg/l. The
concentration of nitrate fluctuates between 15.6 to 86.0 mg/l.
 The calcium & magnesium were found to be in the range of 33.6 to 49.6 mg/l
and 14.6 to 36.0 mg/l, respectively. Iron values are found between 0.04 – 0.07
mg/l and zinc is found to be less than 0.01 mg/l.

Chapter-10
10.8.6 Noise Levels
Ambient noise levels were measured at thirteen locations around the project site.
The daytime and night time noise levels in all the residential locations were
observed to be within the permissible limits.
10.8.7 Ecological Environment
Based on the field studies and review of published literature, it is observed that
study area comprises of Reserve Forests and two Wildlife Sanctuaries. The Core
zone of the study area does not harbour any Schedule-I species or migratory
corridors of any fauna.
As the two protected areas viz; Bandli Wildlife Sanctuary and Majhtal Wildlife
Sanctuary fall within the study area have species of conservation importance and
thus shall need a Conservation Plan.
A Conservation Plan has been prepared. A greenbelt development plan has also
been prepared and the native and local species have been selected for
compensatory afforestation.
10.8.8 Social Environment
The study area (10-km radius) area has a total population of 90753 according to
2011 census. Total male population is about 51.59% and total female population
is around 48.41%. The average literacy rate 80.05% in the region.
10.9 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures
The environmental impacts due to the proposed lime stone mining project,
associated activities like ore crushing have been assessed and adequate
management plan has been developed to mitigate the impacts.
10.9.1 Topography
peaks, steep slopes and deep incised valleys. The highest elevation in the applied
area is 1645 mRL (in central NE part of Baga block) and lowest is 675 mRL (in
NW part of Samtiyari block). However, no major impacts on topography due to
proposed project is envisaged.
10.9.2 Air Quality
Ore loading activities, waste dumping and vehicular movement are the sources to
air pollution on the surface. Major activities like drilling, blasting and crushing are
sources to air pollution.
The trucks plying on the haul roads within the ML area will contribute mainly to
dust generation and it is anticipated that marginal increase will occur in the PM

Chapter-10
level at the mine site. Mining of limestone will be for supplying to Captive Cement
plant by closed belt and pipe conveyor system.
The air quality predictions have been carried out by using the air quality model
AERMOD developed for estimation of fugitive dust due to mining operations. The
resultant concentrations are within the permissible limits.
10.9.3 Noise Levels and Ground Vibrations
With the mining operations, due to machinery, drilling and blasting for mine
development, excavation, transportation and crushing of lime stone, it is
imperative that noise levels would increase. However, the expected noise levels
will not have significant effect on the outside community as habitation area is far
away.
The blasting operations are proposed to use deep hole drilling and blasting using
delay detonators which are bound to reduce the ground vibrations. Further, the
ground vibrations will be controlled by using modern shock tubes with delay non-
electric (nonel) detonators. In addition various mitigation measures are given in
EMP are being practiced at the mine site and will be continued. Hence, ground
vibrations will be well within the specified maximum limits.
10.9.4 Water Resources
About 150 m3/day of water will be required for mining operations; water required
shall be met from existing allocation of 3500 m3/day water from Treda and
Padiyar nalla near the confluence with Satluj river that flows at a distance of
about 1000 m from the ML area, sprinkling purposes to suppress the dust and for
green belt purposes. The water requirement for drinking purpose will be 5 KLD.
Adequate drainage systems will be planned in the mining, service centre for
allowing the water to flow in the pre-determined path. The drainage system will
be designed in such a way even to meet excess rainfall. However, few check
dams will be constructed to arrest wash out from the mine area during rainy
season. All along the mine roads drainage will be provided and benches will be
properly sloped so as to avoid stagnation of water.
With the above measures no adverse impact is envisaged on the surface water
quality in proposed limestone mines.
Natural drains in the ML area are not disturbed and no wastewater is sent to
these bodies. No siltation of drains from mine operations is envisaged. Hence, no
impact on surface water bodies due to mining operations is envisaged.
10.9.5 Soil Environment
Limestone is outcropping, hence no top soil generation. Top soil generation, if

any, will be utilized for plantation purpose. No waste rock generation will be
involved.

Chapter-10
10.9.6 Solid Waste
No overburden is generated; a very small quantity of top soil will be generated

will be used for green belt development and construction of haulage roads.
Further, the wastewater generation during the mine development period will be
basically from the sanitary units provided for the workers, which will be of very
less in quantity.
10.9.7 Flora and Fauna
The major ecologically sensitive aspects pertaining to the project site are the
forest areas and the faunal diversity in the adjoining areas. The most important
and sensitive area are the two wildlife sanctuaries which harbours schedule-I
species. These protected areas falls within the boundary of the study area
although the core area does not harbour any scheduled species.
Impacts on Flora:
Introduction of obnoxious or exotic species and increase in weed frequencies is an

important threat to the ecosystem functioning. These species might overwhelm
the local biodiversity and thus eliminate local species occurring in the adjoining
forest areas. There is likeliness of introducing exotic species due to proposed
project activity. Influx of humans and regular human movement from the project
area and the adjoining areas may result in introduction of obnoxious species. The
vehicular movement and road traffic also sometimes results in introduction of
unwanted species. Air emissions and increase in dust may also result in restricted
growth, regeneration and degradation of sensitive vegetation. Loss of top soil
may occur if the overburden is not conserved properly and restored. These
alterations will have low impacts in the future course of proposed development,
thus the impacts will be low from ecosystem functioning point of view.
Impacts on Fauna:
The study area has large species range and there is no occurrence of endemic
species in the core zone. Furthermore, the core project area and the adjoining
areas share similar habitat and thus clearing of ground will not eliminate habitat
of any species permanently. If the project activities are not regulated, potential
negative impacts can be anticipated on the fauna due to increase in noise levels,
deterioration of air emissions, increase in dust levels, degradation of vegetation,
elicit hunting and road kills.
Initially wildlife management plan was prepared and approved by the Chief
Wildlife Warden Himachal Pradesh for Rs.54.12 Lakhs for taking remedial
measures. The plan is under implementation and being executed by the wild life
department. Further, a conservation plan for existing mine expansion with a
provision of Rs.50.0 Lakhs for Schedule-I wildlife species under wildlife
(protection) Act, 1972 has been prepared in consultation with state wildlife
department.

Chapter-10
10.9.8 Socio-Economic Aspects
The project will definitely help for the improvement of the socio-economic status
of the society in the region by extending the direct / indirect employment
opportunities. The project will also increase the development of ancillary and
related small-scale industries in the adjoining areas.
So far an amount of over Rs. 87.46 crores has been spent on the social activities
of existing mine and cement plant. Now it was proposed to spend nearly Rs. 20
lakhs for the proposed mining project.
10.9.9 Occupational Safety and Health
Occupational safety and health is very closely related to productivity and good
employer-employee relationship. The main factors of occupational health are
fugitive dust and noise. Safety of employee during blasting operation and
maintenance and handling of explosive materials will be taken care of as per mine
regulations. PPEs such as Dust masks, ear plugs/earmuffs will be provided to
workmen. Hence, no significant impact on health of workmen is envisaged.
10.10 Conclusion
The proposed project will have marginal impacts on the local environment with
proper mitigation measures with the effective implementation of the environment
management measures as suggested in the EIA/EMP report and as recommended
by MoEF, CPCB and State Pollution Control Board, the negative impacts will be
minimized to a great extent. However, development of this project has beneficial
impact/effects in terms of growth in regional economy, transform the region's
economy from predominantly agricultural to significantly industrial, increase
Government earnings and revenues and accelerate the pace of industrial
development in the region.
The proposed project will provide direct employment to a large number of

personnel. This project will also generate indirect employment to a considerable
number of families, who will render their services for the employees of the
project.
The project will also encourage ancillary industries in the region, which will not
only increase the employment potential but also the economic base of the region
will be further strengthened.
Thus, in view of considerable benefits from the project, the proposed project is
most advantageous to the region as well as to the nation.

Chapter-11
Disclosure of Consultants
11.0 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS
11.1 Introduction
The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environment Management Plan

(EMP) report has been prepared by carrying out various scientific studies. Studies
have been carried out by engaging scientists/engineers/experts of Vimta Labs
Limited, India and its associates. The list of experts involved in different studies is
given below:
Sr. No. Study Consultants

1 Environmental Impact Assessment study Vimta Labs Limited.,
including Environment Management Plan Hyderabad, India
2 Remote Sensing and Land use/Land cover Multi Tech Services Limited,
Studies Hyderabad, India
3 Study on baseline elevations & Subsidence
The profile of the Consultants is given below:
11.2 Vimta Labs Limited - Environment Consultant
Vimta Labs Limited is a leading multi-disciplinary testing and research

laboratory in India. VIMTA provides contract research and testing services in the
areas of environmental assessment, analytical testing, clinical research, pre-
clinical (animal) studies, clinical reference lab services, advanced molecular
biology services and research & development studies.
The Environment Division has been in the forefront of its vision to provide
better environment through guiding and assisting the industry for sustainable
development. A stalwart in the mission to protect and preserve the natural
resources on earth for future generations, it offers extensive research and
consultancy services in the field of environment. With its rich experience, multi-
disciplinary expertise and with the support of its state-of the-art analytical
equipment, the services offered by the division are wide ranging and
encompasses entire gamut of environment management and monitoring services.
With its emphasis on quality services over the years, it has evolved itself into a
single reference point in India for comprehensive environmental services.
11.2.1 The Quality Policy
 VIMTA is committed to good professional practices and quality of operations in

its testing, validation and research services;
 VIMTA shall ensure customer satisfaction by maintaining independence,

impartiality and integrity in its operations;
 VIMTA shall provide the services in accordance with national and international
norms;
VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad, India C11-1

Chapter-11
 VIMTA shall implement quality systems as per ISO/IEC 17025 and applicable
Good Laboratory Practices (GLPs) & Good Clinical Practices (GCPs), to
generate technically valid results/data; and
 VIMTA shall ensure that all its personnel familiarize with the policies and
procedures of the quality system and implement the same in their work.
11.2.2 Major Milestones and Accreditations
 1984 - Registered with an initial investment of Rs.200,000=00

 1985 - Recognized by ISI (now known as Bureau of Indian Standards)
 1987 - Qualified by the criteria of Ministry of Environment and Forests, India
and was notified as one of the first 14 Standard Environmental Laboratories
published in the Gazette of India
 1988 - Licensed for carrying out tests on Drugs and Pharmaceuticals
 1991 - Accredited by NCTCF, DST, Government of India (the forerunner of
NABL)
 1995 - Accredited by NABL, India under its revised scheme, certified by
Standards Australia, Quality Assurance Services as per ISO/IEC Guide 25 and
ISO 9002
 1996 - GLP Compliance
 1998 - Accreditation by GOSSTANDART and joint venture for certification of
Food Exports with ROSTEST, Russia
 1998 - World Bank Recognition
 2002 - ANVISA Brazil Certification
 2003 - USFDA accepts Vimta Bioequivalence study report. Showcased Vimta
at AAPS (USA) and ICSE-CPHI (Germany)
 2003 – Recognized by Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
 2004- Enters Gulf market - Executes a contract for environmental
consultancy in Kuwait
 2006 –Expands its overseas activities. Undertakes environmental assignment
in Saudi Arabia
 2006 – Undertakes environmental impact assignment in Tanzania, Africa
 2008 – Has been Pre-Qualified by World Health Organization (WHO)
 2008- Undertaken environmental impact assessment studies in Cameroon,
Africa
 2010 – Accredited by Quality Council of India/NABET for Environmental
Consultancy Division
11.2.3 Services Offered
Spread over 70,000 sq.ft lush green garden premises at Cherlapally, Hyderabad
(India), the scientifically designed and meticulously groomed infrastructural
facility of the Central Laboratory of VIMTA has the most sophisticated
instruments backed by an excellent team of professionals.

Chapter-11
Over 150,000 sq. ft. of world class research laboratory is also under operation at
Biotech Park-Genome Valley, Hyderabad (India). Having all the facilities under
one roof is perhaps the only one of its kind in South Asia in the contract testing
and research sector.
VIMTA Central Laboratory, Cherlapally, Hyderabad VIMTA Life Sciences, Genome Valley, Hyderabad
Vimta offers services under the following specializations:
 Environment;
 Analytical;
 Clinical Reference Lab;
 Clinical Research;
 Preclinical;
 Molecular Biology; and
 Research and Development.
The environment division of VIMTA Labs Limited (VLL) has its presence all over
India and other countries including a strong association with international
consultants like Japan Bank for International Cooperation (JBIC), Kennametal Inc.
- USA, Rudal Blanchard – UK, E&E Solutions – Japan, NAPESCO & Kuwait National
Petroleum Corporation – Kuwait, Marafiq and Haif Consultants – Saudi Arabia and
others. Vimta Labs Limited has the following credentials:
 Recognition by BIS, India;

 Recognition by Ministry of Environment and Forests, Govt. of India and
various State Pollution Control Boards (wherever applicable) ;
 Recognition by Department of Science & Technology, Govt. of India (NABL) ;
 Recognition by Ministry of Defence, Govt. of India;
 Recognition by APEDA, Ministry of Commerce, Govt. of India;
 Recognition by Saudi Arabia Standard Organization (SASO), Saudi Arabia;
 Recognition from NEMC, Tanzania;
 Accreditation by NCTCF;
 Certification from Standard Australia;
 Recognition from ANVISA Brazil;
 Recognition from USFDA;
 Quality Assurance Services as per ISO/IEC 17025;
 Quality Assurance Services as per ICH Guidelines; and
 Recognition by World Health Organization (WHO).
Chapter-11

Chapter-11
11.2.4 Environment Division
Environment essentially being a multi-disciplinary science, the range of services

offered by the division are also comprehensive and caters to the needs of
industry, pollution control agencies, regulatory authorities and in a larger pursuit
of a green globe. The services under environment include:
 Site selection and liability studies;

 Environmental impact assessments;
 Environment management plans;
 Carrying capacity based regional studies;
 Environmental audits;
 Solid and hazardous waste management;
 Risk assessment (MCA,HAZON,HAZOP) & disaster management plans;
 Occupational health and safety, industrial hygiene;
 Environmental monitoring for air, meteorology, water, soil, noise, ecology and
socio-economics;
 Industrial emission source monitoring;
 Offshore sampling and analysis of marine water and sediments;
 Marine ecological studies;
 Marine impact assessment;
 Rehabilitation and resettlement studies;
 Forestry and ecological studies;
 Geological and hydro-geological studies;
 Land use /land cover studies based on remote sensing;
 Socio-economic studies;
 Due diligence studies;
 Industrial epidemiological studies;
 Wasteland management studies; and
 Study on bio-indicators.
The services under Environmental Chemistry include:
 Analysis of water, wastewater, soil, solid waste, hazardous waste as per

international codes;
 Source emissions and work zone air/noise quality monitoring;
 Analysis of SVOCs, VOCs, PAH, BTEX, AOX, PCB’s, TCLP metals, TOC etc.;
 Categorization of hazardous waste; and
 Pesticide residue analysis.
11.2.5 Facilities of Environment Division
Vimta-Environment Division is located in scientifically designed Central Laboratory

with the state-of the-art modern facilities to offer vide range of services in indoor
and outdoor monitoring and analytical characterization in the field of
Environment. Further, it is ably supported by highly skilled and experienced team
of professionals in the fields of science, engineering, ecology, meteorology, social
planning, geology & hydro-geology and environmental planning.

Chapter-11
Besides the regular monitoring equipment such as Fine Dust Samplers, Respirable
Dust Samplers (RDS), automatic weather monitoring stations, stack monitoring
kits, personal samplers, noise meters, portable water kits etc, the other major
specialized equipment include:
 Monostatic Sodar–Designed by National Physical Laboratory, GOI;

 Integrated Noise Level Meters–Quest, U.S.A;
 Flue Gas Analyzers–Testo, Germany;
 113-A Gravimetric Dust Sampler-Casella, London;
 ICP AES– Varian, USA;
 Gas Liquid Chromatographs with FID, ECD & pFPD–Varian, USA;
 Gas Chromatograph with Mass Detector–Varian, USA;
 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer [AAS]–Varian, USA;
 PAS-AFC-123 instrument;
 High Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC);
 Laser Particle Size Analyzer;
 Bomb Calorimeter;
 Polarographs;
 X-ray Fluorescent Spectrometer;
 Flame Photometer;
 Carbon Sulphur Analyzer;
 Computerized Fatigue Testing Machine;
 Electronic Universal Testing Machine;
 Fourier Transmission Infrared Spectroscope; and
 Water Flow Current Meter – make Lawrence & Mayo.
HIGH RESOLUTION GAS CHROMATOGRAPHS

Chapter-11
11.2.6 Quality Systems
The basic fact that environment division and its supporting site laboratories are
accredited by NABL (IS0-17025) and Ministry of Environment and Forests, India
and by other international bodies stand testimony to its emphasis on Quality
Systems.
11.2.7 Achievements
Being the first laboratory to be recognized under Environment Protection (EP) Act
by Government of India (GOI), environment division with its best mind power and
industrial knowledge competency that allows it to compare with the best in the
business.
 The environment division till date has executed about 600 environmental
impact assessment and environment management studies with risk
assessment and disaster management plans for various spectrum of industries
and obtained statutory approvals;
 Supported by the strong modern laboratory and experienced hands,

environment division is well equipped in conducting due diligence, phase-I and
phase-II studies;
 Undertaken specialized studies such as regional environmental impact

assessment on carrying capacity principle; upper air meteorological studies
using monostatic SODAR for major industrial complexes;
 Associated with prestigious studies such as environmental pollution

monitoring around Taj Trapezium (India), pre and post satellite launch studies
for Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) and monitoring for offshore oil
& gas exploration for deep-sea water and sediment sampling;
 The services offered include vide spectrum of industries covering power,

chemical, cement, mining, steel & alloys, metallurgical, aluminium refining &
smelting, dye & intermediates, bulk drugs, pesticides, agro-chemicals, petro-
chemicals, refineries, pulp & paper, oil & gas exploration & production,
asbestos, infrastructure such as highways, seaports and airports, river valley,
foundries etc;
 Undertaken environmental consultancy for pipeline layout and up gradation of

API oil-water separators of various crude oil depots and petrol filling stations
of Kuwait National Petroleum Corporation, Kuwait;
 Undertaken performance evaluation and capacity expansion of sewage

treatment plant and industrial wastewater treatment Plant for Marafiq, Saudi
Arabia; and
 Undertaken environmental impact assessment studies for pulp and paper mill
expansion of Mufindi Paper Mills, Tanzania, Africa.
The details of the persons involved in the preparation of present EIA/EMP report
are presented below:
Chapter-11
DETAILS OF PERSONNEL INVOLVED IN CURRENT EIA/EMP STUDY – VIMTA LABS LTD

Sr. No. Name Qualification Position Contribution Experience
1 Mr. M. Janardhan M.Tech (Env. Vice President & Co-ordination About 24 years of experience in the field of environmental
Engg) Head (Env) management and environmental engineering
2 Dr. B. Chandra Sekhar M.Sc., Ph.D Sr. Manager Co-ordination About 14 years of experience in the field of environmental
management and modeling
3 Mr. G. V. Raghava Rao M.Tech (Env) Manager Expert About 15 years of experience in the field of environmental
management and environmental engineering
4 Mr. S. Srinivas Goud M.S.W Group Leader Expert About 23 years of experience in the field of social impact assessment
studies.
5 Ms. Durga Bhavani M. Sc., M.Tech Group Leader Expert About 11 years of experience in the field of Environmental
(Env) Management and Environmental Chemistry
6 Mr. S.Kishore Kumar M.Tech (Env) Group Leader Expert About 4 years of experience in the field of environment management
and engineering
7 Dr. Mandar Nanajkar M. Sc., Ph.D Env Scientist Expert About 11 years of experience in ecological and biodiversity studies
(Ecology)
8 Dr. M. Subba Reddy Ph.D (Env. Sr. Scientist Expert About 5 years of experience in the field of Environmental
Chem) Management and Environmental Chemistry
9 Mr. M. Raja Manohar M.Tech (Env ) Env Engineer Expert About 4 years of experience in the field of environment management
and engineering
10 Mr. P. Rama Krishna M.Tech (env) Env Engineer Expert About 3 years of experience in the field of Environment Management
and engineering
11 Mr. Ch. Narendra M.S.W Scientist Expert About 2 years of experience in the field of Social Impact Assessment
Studies
12 Mr. K.S. Vishnu Teja M.Tech (Env) Engineer Expert About 3 year of experience in the field of environment management
13 Mr. M. Praveen Kumar M.E (Env) Engineer Expert About 2 year of experience in the field of environment management
14 Mr. J. Sunil Kumar M.Tech (Env) Engineer Expert About 2 year of experience in the field of environment management
15 Mr. K.Rajeswar M.Sc (Geo) Scientist Expert About 5 years of experience in the field of geology and hydrogeology
16 Mr. Chavan Sanjay M.Sc. (Env. Scientist Expert About 3 years of experience in the field of Environmental
Kumar Laxman Science) Management and Environmental Chemistry
17 Ms. T. Ramya Devi B.Sc Quality Auditor Quality Check About 5 years of experience in quality assurance
18 Mr. P. Niranjan Babu B.Com Dy Manager Secretarial Support About 25 years of experience in the field of environmental monitoring
and secretarial support
19 Mr. P. Krishna I.T.I (Civil) Jr. Engineer Cartography About 15 years experience in the field of environmental management
and civil drawings
20 Mr. J. Rama Krishna I.T.I (Civil) Jr. Engineer Cartography About 14 years experience in the field of environmental management

Chapter-11
Sr. No. Name Qualification Position Contribution Experience

and civil drawings
Empanelled Experts
21 Mr. V.K.Bhatnagar B.Sc. (Mining Empanelled Expert About 40 years of experience in the field of mining engineering,
Engineering) Consultant geology and soil
22 Mr. J. Rajendra Prasad M.Sc. (Applied Empanelled Expert About 20 years of experience in the field of landuse and landcover,
Geology) Consultant satellite data interpretation and detailed hydrology & hydrogeology
(representing multi-tech services)
23 Mr. Rajgopal Krishnan M.Tech Empanelled Expert About 42 years of experience in the field of risk assessment and
(Chemical Consultant hazardous management
Engineering)
24 Mr. Balakrishna Lole M.Sc. (Ag) Empanelled Expert About 35 years of experience in the field of Soil Conservation
Consultant

ANNEXURE-II
TOR COMPLIANCE
TERMS OF REFERENCE AND COMPLIANCE
Sr. No Conditions Compliance

1 Year-wise production details since 1994 New mining blocks. Hence not applicable.
should be given, clearly stating the highest
production achieved in any one year prior to
1994. It may also be categorically informed
whether there had been any increase in
production after the EIA Notification, 1994
came into force w.r.t. the highest production
achieved prior to 1994.
2 A copy of the document in support of the fact A copy of approved Mining Plan letter dated
that the Proponent is the rightful lessee of 19/08/2014 from IBM is enclosed as
the mine should be given. Annexure-IV.
The copy of letter of intent from govt. of HP

for Baga & Bhalag lime stone & Shale mine
is enclosed in Annexure-III.
3 All documents including approved mine plan, All the documents including approved mine
EIA and public hearing should be compatible plan, EIA are consistent with one another.
with one another in terms of the mine lease
area, production levels, waste generation and Public hearing details will be incorporated
its management, mining technology etc. and after conducting Public hearing.
should be in the name of the lessee.
4 All corner coordinates of the mine lease area, The superimposed mine lessee area map on
superimposed on a High Resolution the toposheet along with co-ordinates is
Imagery/toposheet, topographic sheet, given in Figure-1.2 of Chapter-1.
geomorphology and geology of the area
should be provided. Such an Imagery of the
proposed area should clearly show the land
use and other ecological features of the study
area (core and buffer zone).
5 Information should be provided in Survey of Study area marked on the Toposheet
India Toposheet in 1:50,000 scale indicating representing 10 km radius is given in
geological map of the area, geomorphology Figure-1.2 of Chapter-1.
of land forms of the area, existing minerals
and mining history of the area, important
water bodies, streams and rivers and soil
characteristics.
6 Details about the land proposed for mining Details provided in Section-2.3.2 of
activity should be given with information as Chapter-2
to whether mining conforms to the land use
policy of the State; land diversion for mining
should have approval for State use board or
the concerned authority.
7 It should be clearly stated whether the The mine management will activity ultimate,
proponent Company has a well laid down develop and support the environmental
Environment Policy approved by its Board of mutual policy, which is relevant to its
Directors? If so, it may be spelt out in the activities, products and services and their
EIA report with description of the prescribed environmental effects. Broadly this should
operating process/procedures to bring into Be consistent with occupational health and
focus any infringement/deviation/violation of safety policy and other policies(such as
the environmental or forest norms/ quality policy)
conditions? The hierarchical system or
administrative order of the Company to deal Indicates which of the industrial activities
with the environmental issues and for are covered by the environmental
ensuring compliance with the EC conditions management system.
may also be given. The system of reporting
of non-compliances / violations of Be communicated and implemented at all
AII-1
ANNEXURE-II
TOR COMPLIANCE

environmental norms to the Board of levels of the project and
Directors of the Company and/or
shareholders or stakeholders at large may Be available publicity.
also be detailed in the EIA report.
8 Issues relating to Mine Safety, including Blasting details are provided in Section-
subsidence study in case of underground 2.7.2 of Chapter-2.
mining and slope study in case of open cast
mining, blasting study etc. should be Slope study will be conducted by CIMFR at
detailed. The proposed safeguard measures the time of mine operation.
in each case should also be provided.
9 The study area will comprise of 10 km zone The study area considered in the EIA report
around the mine lease from lease periphery is 10 km radius from the mine lease
and the data contained in the EIA such as boundary and is presented in Figure- 1.2 of
waste generation etc should be for the life of Chapter-1.
the mine / lease period.
Land use pattern of mine lease is given in
Table-2.6 of Chapter-2.
10 Land use of the study area delineating forest Land use plan of the mine lease area is
area, agricultural land, grazing land, wildlife prepared to encompass pre-operational,
sanctuary, national park, migratory routes of operational and post operational phases are
fauna, water bodies, human settlements and given in Table-2.4 of Chapter-2 of the EIA
other ecological features should be indicated. report.
Land use plan of the mine lease area should
be prepared to encompass preoperational, Impact on land use is given in Section-4.2.1
operational and post operational phases and for development phase and Section-4.3.2
submitted. Impact, if any, of change of land for operational phase of Chapter-4.
use should be given.
11 Details of the land for any Over Burden Lime stone is out crop with very thin layer
Dumps outside the mine lease, such as of top soil. No OB exists in the Baga-Bhalag
extent of land area, distance from mine lime stone and shale mine. Hence, no
lease, its land use, R&R issues, if any, should overburden dumps are proposed.
be given.
12 A Certificate from the Competent Authority in An online FCA diversion vide ref.no.
the State Forest Department should be FP/HP/MIN/14832/2015 dated 20.08.2015
provided, confirming the involvement of proposed has been submitted to MOEF&CC,
forest land, if any, in the project area. In the Govt. of India Application attached as an
event of any contrary claim by the Project Annexure-VIII.
Proponent regarding the status of forests, the
site may be inspected by the State Forest
Department along with the Regional Office of
the Ministry to ascertain the status of forests,
based on which, the Certificate in this regard
as mentioned above be issued. In all such
cases, it would be desirable for
representative of the State Forest
Department to assist the Expert Appraisal
Committees.
13 Status of forestry clearance for the broken up FCA diversion proposed of 126.4261 ha land
area and virgin forestland involved in the is under the scrutiny of Nodal officer-cum-
Project including deposition of net present Addl. Pr. CCF Shimla.
value (NPV) and compensatory afforestation
(CA) should be indicated. A copy of the
forestry clearance should also be furnished.
14 Implementation status of recognition of Application has already submitted to
forest rights under the Scheduled Tribes and concerned Authorities of Solan & Bilaspur
other Traditional Forest Dwellers (Recognition districts to obtain the requisite certificate
AII-2
ANNEXURE-II
TOR COMPLIANCE

of Forest Rights) Act, 2006 should be under the provisions of FRA 2006.
indicated.
15 The vegetation in the RF / PF areas in the The vegetation in the study covering the
study area, with necessary details, should be RF/PF are enclosed in Annexure-XIII.
given.
16 A study shall be got done to ascertain the Impact of mining project on wild life and
impact of the Mining Project on wildlife of the ecology is given in Section–4.8 of Chapter-4
study area and details furnished. Impact of
the project on the wildlife in the surrounding
and any other protected area and accordingly
detailed mitigative measures required, should
be worked out with cost implications and
submitted.
17 Location of National Parks, Sanctuaries, Two wild life sanctuary exists in the study
Biosphere Reserves, Wildlife Corridors, area
Tiger/Elephant Reserves/(existing as well as
proposed), if any, within 10 km of the mine Wild Life Baga Bhalag Samtyari
lease should be clearly indicated, supported Sanctuary Block Block Block
by a location map duly authenticated by Chief Bandli 11.3 9.9 km, 7.5 km, N
Wildlife Warden. Necessary clearance, as may WLS km, N N
Majathal 4.7 km, 3.7 km, 6.1 km,
be applicable to such projects due to
WLS ESE SE SE
proximity of the ecologically sensitive areas
as mentioned above, should be obtained from No other Ecologically sensitive like elephant
the Standing Committee of National Board of /tiger reserves (existing as well as
Wildlife and copy furnished. proposed), migration routes within 10 km
radius of the mine lease boundary.
The 10 km radius study area map is

presented in Figure-1.2 of Chapter-1.
Authenticated letter from PCCF and

authentication Map showing the wild life
sanctuary and ML boundary are shown in
Annexure-XIII.
18 A detailed biological study of the study area A detailed biological study of the study area
[core zone and buffer zone (10 km radius of is given in section 3.9 of Chapter-3
the periphery of the mine lease)] shall be
carried out. Details of flora and fauna, Authenticated list of flora & fauna are
endangered, endemic and RTE Species duly enclosed in Annexure-XIII.
authenticated, separately for core and buffer
zone should be furnished based on such Approved WL conservation plan for Sch-I
primary field survey, clearly indicating the species prepared for existing mine
Schedule of the fauna present. In case of any expansion project is attached as an
scheduled-I fauna found in the study area, Annexure-XIII.
the necessary plan along with budgetary
provisions for their conservation should be
prepared in consultation with State Forest
and Wildlife Department and details
furnished. Necessary allocation of funds for
implementing the same should be made as
part of the project cost.
19 Proximity to Areas declared as ‘Critically The proposed Baga-Bhalag lime stone is not
Polluted’ or the Project areas likely to come in proximity to ‘Critically Polluted Areas’
under the ‘Aravali Range’, (attracting court
restrictions for mining operations), should
also be indicated and where so required,
clearance certifications from the prescribed
AII-3
ANNEXURE-II
TOR COMPLIANCE

Authorities, such as the SPCB or State
Minning Dept. Should be secured and
furnished to the effect that the proposed
mining activities could be considered.
20 Similarly, for coastal Projects, A CRZ map Not Applicable, Since the mining project is
duly authenticated by one of the authorized not in the coastal zone.
agencies demarcating LTL. HTL, CRZ area,
location of the mine lease w.r.t CRZ, coastal
features such as mangroves, if any, should
be furnished. (Note: The Mining Projects
falling under CRZ would also need to obtain
approval of the concerned Coastal Zone
Management Authority).
21 R&R Plan/compensation details for the Acquisition of land for proposed ML area is
Project Affected People (PAP) should be under process.
furnished. While preparing the R&R Plan, the
relevant State/National Rehabilitation & Rehabilitation & Resettlement grants and
Resettlement Policy should be kept in view. other benefits shall be paid as per State R &
In respect of SCs /STs and other weaker R policy.
sections of the society in the study area, a
need based sample survey, family-wise,
should be undertaken to assess their
requirements, and action programmes
prepared and submitted accordingly,
integrating the sectoral programmes of line
departments of the State Government. It
may be clearly brought out whether the
village(s) located in the mine lease area will
be shifted or not. The issues relating to
shifting of Village(s) including their R&R and
socioeconomic aspects should be discussed in
the report.
22 One season (non-monsoon) [i.e. March-May Ambient air quality monitoring has been
(Summer Season); October-December (Post carried out during (1st October 2015 to 31st
Monsoon Season); December-February December 2015) representing post monsoon
(Winter Season)] primary baseline data on and partly winter season. The detail are
ambient air quality as per CPCB Notification given in Section-3.6 of Chapter-3 of EIA
of 2009, water quality, noise level, soil and report.
flora and fauna shall be collected and the
AAQ and other data so compiled presented
date wise in the EIA and EMP Report. Site-
specific meteorological data should also be
collected. The location of the monitoring
stations should be such as to represent whole
of the study area and justified keeping in
view the pre-dominant downwind direction
and location of sensitive receptors. There
should be at least one monitoring station
within 500 m of the mine lease in the pre-
dominant downwind direction. The
mineralogical composition of PM10,
particularly for free silica, should be given.
23 Air quality modelling should be carried out for The impact of the proposed mining activities
prediction of impact of the project on the air on air quality has been assessed by using
quality of the area. It should also take into USEPA approved area source model namely
account the impact of movement of vehicles AERMOD. The results of the model are given
for transportation of mineral. The details of in section-4.4.1.5 of chapter-4 of EIA
the model used and input parameters used report.
AII-4
ANNEXURE-II
TOR COMPLIANCE

for modelling should be provided. The air
quality contours may be shown on a location
map clearly indicating the location of the site,
location of sensitive receptors, if any, and the
habitation. The wind roses showing pre-
dominant wind direction may also be
indicated on the map.
24 The water requirement for the Project, its The water requirement for the mine
availability and source should be furnished. A machinery operations, dust suppression and
detailed water balance should also be afforestation shall be 150 KLD; the source
provided. Fresh water requirement for the of water shall be from the Satluj river that
Project should be indicated. flows at a distance of about 2.5 km from ML
area.
The detailed break up of water requirement

for mining activities are given in section-
2.13.3 of Chapter-2 of EIA report.
25 Necessary clearance from the Competent Water allocation letter from IPH Division,
Authority for drawl of requisite quantity of Arki is given in Annexure-IX.
water for the Project should be provided.
26 Description of water conservation measures Location and photos of existing check dams
proposed to be adopted in the Project should and retaining walls of adjacent mine is
be given. Details of rainwater harvesting shown in Figure-4.5 and Figure-4.6. The
proposed in the Project, if any, should be mine office and other structures are
provided. provided with rain water harvesting
structures at the existing mine and similar
structures will be implemented in proposed
mining blocks also.
27 Impact of the project on the water quality, Impact of project on surface water and
both surface and groundwater should be ground water quality is given in section
assessed and necessary safeguard measures, 4.5.2 and 4.5.3 of chapter-4 of EIA report.
if any required, should be provided.
28 Based on actual monitored data, it may Water in the tube wells adjacent to ML area
clearly be shown whether working will has been encountered at the depth of nearly
intersect groundwater. Necessary data and 50 m below the surface. The surface level at
documentation in this regard may be these points is nearly 1100 m above MSL.
provided. In case the working will intersect
groundwater table, a detailed Hydro The mining operations shall commence from
Geological Study should be undertaken and an elevation of 1620 m above MSL in Baga
Report furnished. The Report inter-alia, shall block and from 1360 m above MSL in
include details of the aquifers present and Samtiyari block and the ultimate pit limit at
impact of mining activities on these aquifers. depth for the mining operations at present
Necessary permission from Central Ground is envisaged at 1050 m above MSL, which is
Water Authority for working below ground well above the existing water table in the
water and for pumping of ground water area. Thus, the water table is not likely to
should also be obtained and copy furnished. be encountered in the course of mining
operations.
Details of water table in and around the ML

area are given in section-2.8.1 of chapter-2
of EIA report.
29 Details of any stream, seasonal or otherwise, There are several seasonal nalas within the
passing through the lease area and mine lease area. All the nalas recharge
modification / diversion proposed, if any, and during the rainy season and ultimately
the impact of the same on the hydrology merge with the Satluj River the drainage
should be brought out. pattern of the ML area and the study area is
given in section-4.5.1 and Figure-4.3 of
chapter-4 of EIA report.
AII-5
ANNEXURE-II
TOR COMPLIANCE

30 Information on site elevation, working depth, The highest elevation in the applied area is
groundwater table etc. Should be provided 1645 mRL (in central NE part of Baga block)
both in AMSL and bgl. A schematic diagram and lowest is 675 mRL (in NW part of
may also be provided for the same. Samtiyari block).
Site elevation and working depth are given

in section-2.3.3 and section-2.6.3 of
chapter-2 of EIA report.
No ground water intersection involved.

31 A time bound Progressive Greenbelt Green belt development plan of existing
Development Plan shall be prepared in a mine and cement plant is given in section-
tabular form (indicating the linear and 5.8 of Chapter-5
quantitative coverage, plant species and time
frame) and submitted, keeping in mind, the EMP of the three blocks are shown in Figure-
same will have to be executed up front on 5.2, Figure-5.3 & Figure-5.4 of Chapter-5
commencement of the project. Phase-wise
plan of plantation and compensatory
afforestation should be charted clearly
indicating the area to be covered under
plantation and the species to be planted. The
details of plantation already done should be
given. The plant species selected for green
belt should have greater ecological value to
the local population with emphasis on local
and native species and the species which are
tolerant to pollution.
32 Impact on local transport infrastructure due The present traffic is 2970 PCU. After
to the Project should be indicated. Projected production enhancement, the traffic will not
increase in truck traffic as a result of the be increased, since the limestone crushed in
Project in the present road network (including the pit head crusher located nearby ML area
those outside the Project area) should be will be transported to the cement plant
worked out, indicating whether it is capable located at 500 m from the ML area through
of handling the incremental load. closed belt and pipe conveyor system.
Arrangement for improving the
infrastructure, if contemplated (including The impact of mining on the local transport
action to be taken by other agencies such as due to the proposed mining operation is
State Government) should be covered. negligible
Project proponent shall conduct Impacts of
Transportation study as per Indian Road
Congress Guidelines.
33 Details of the onsite shelter and facilities to Details of mine site services are given in
be provided to the mine workers should be Section-2.13.4 of Chapter-2 of EIA report.
included in the EIA report.
34 Conceptual post mining land use and Conceptual Plan is given in Section-2.11 of
Reclamation and Restoration of mined out Chapter-2 of EIA report.
areas (with plans and with adequate number
of sections) should be given in the EIA
report.
35 Occupational Health impacts of the Project Details of Occupational Safety and Health is
should be anticipated and the proposed given in Section-7.2 of Chapter-7 of EIA
preventive measures spelt out in detail. report.
Details of pre-placement medical examination
and periodical medical examination schedules
should be incorporated in the EMP. The
project specific occupational health mitigation
measures with required facilities proposed in
the mining area may be detailed.
AII-6
ANNEXURE-II
TOR COMPLIANCE

36 Public health implications of the Project and An amount of Rs. 87.46 Crores has been
related activities for the population in the incurred so far for the community
impact zone should be systematically welfare activities.
evaluated and the proposed remedial
measures should be detailed along with
budgetary allocations.
37 Measures of socio economic significance and Socio economic benefits due to the
influence to the local community proposed to proposed lime stone ML area of 172.7434 ha
be provided by the Project Proponent should are given in Chapter-8 of the EIA report.
be indicated. As far as possible, quantitative
dimensions may be given with time frames
for implementation.
38 Detailed environmental management plan A detailed Environmental Management plan
(EMP) to mitigate the environmental impacts is given in Chapter-5
which, should inter-alia include the impacts
of change of land use, loss of agricultural and
grazing land, if any, occupational health
impacts besides other impacts specific to the
proposed Project.
39 Public hearing points raised and commitment This EIA report is being prepared for public
of the project proponent on the same along hearing. After public hearing, the comments
with time bound action plan with budgetary from the public and reply’s by the project
provisions to implement the same should be proponent along with action plan will be
provided and also incorporated in the final incorporated in the final EIA report.
EIA/EMP Report of the Project.
40 Details of litigation pending against the No litigation matter is pending against the
project, if any, with direction/order passed by proposed project
any Court of Law against the project should
be given.
41 The cost of the project (capital cost and The capital cost of the project is Rs. 222
recurring cost) as well as the cost towards Crores and EMP cost is Rs. 35 lakhs and the
implementation of EMP should clearly be spelt details are given in Section-5.13, Table-5.3
out. of Chapter-5.
42 A Disaster Management plan shall be Disaster management plan is given in
prepared and include in the EIA/EMP Report. Section-7.4 of Chapter-7.
43 Benefits of the project if the Project is The project benefits details are give in
implemented should be spelt out. The Chapter-8.
benefits of the Project shall clearly indicate
environmental, Social, Economic,
Employment potential, etc.
AII-7

Limestone Mine

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Limestone Mine

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

REPORT FOR PUBLIC HEARING

Jaypee Himachal Cement Plant (JHCP)

Table of Contents TC-1

2.0 Project Description and Source of Pollution

2.1 Type of the Project C2-1

3.0 Baseline Environmental Status

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-1

Table of Contents (Contd...)

4.0 Impact Assessment

5.0 Environmental Management Plan

5.1 Introduction C5-1

5(A) Environmental Monitoring Programme

5(A).1 Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures C5(A)-1

6.0 Analysis of Alternative Technology

6.1 Introduction C6-1

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-2

Table of Contents (Contd...)

6.3 Assessment of New and Untested Technology for the

7.0 Additional Studies

7.1 Public Consultation C7-1

8.0 Project Benefits

8.1 Improvements in the Physical Infrastructure C8-1

9.0 Administrative Aspects

10.1 Institutional Arrangements for Environment Protection

10.0 Summary & Conclusions

10.1 Introduction C10-1

11.0 Disclosure of Consultants

11.1 Introduction C11-1

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-3

Table of Contents (Contd...)

Annexure-I : Terms of Reference

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-4

List of Figures (Contd…)

3.9.1 Locations for Terrestrial and Aquatic Ecological C3-52

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-6

1.1 Details of Environmental Setting (10-Km Radius) C1-4

List of Tables (Contd…)

List of Tables (Contd…)

4.14(E)Abandonment Cost Estimated during fifth year C4-40

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-9

Jaypee Himachal Cement Plant-JHCP (a unit of Jaiprakash Associates Limited)

1.1 Purpose of the Report

1.2 Identification of Project Proponent

M/s Jaypee Himachal Cement Plant (JHCP) a unit of Jaiprakash Associates

The company presently owns and operates state-of-the-art technology cement

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad C1-1

Limited are thus having substantial requisite experience in setting up and

The Baga-Bhalag limestone deposit was identified by Geological Wing, Dept. of

1.3 Project Background and Justification

 Subsequently, the Environmental Clearance was amended for augmentation in

 To utilize the existing facilities installed at site, JHCP proposes to de-

 JHCP also proposed expansion of cement plant by installing additional plant

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad C1-2

JHCP Captive Mines

 JHCP proposes production enhancement from 3.10 MTPA to 5.25 MTPA of

1.4 Project Details

1.4.1 Nature of the Project

1.4.2 Size of the Project

1.4.3 Cost of the Project

1.5 Environmental Setting

The environmental setting within 10 km of the project site given in Table-1.1.

Sr. Description Baga Block Bhalag Block Samtyari Block

Sr. Description Baga Block Bhalag Block Samtyari Block

_Contact conformable with local disconformities__